Home

RX USER`S MANUAL

1. m 13 6 170 7 2 Dimensional Drawing MI
2. Regjieiter Function name etn R W Monitor and setting parameters Rresolution No code d004 1005h l HIGH PID feedback value monitor R 0 to 9990 0 1 1006h do04 LOW ae 240 Terminal 1 to 2 7 Terminal 8 1007h Multi function input monitor d005 R 218 Terminal FW AN mA 1008h Multi function output d006 R 2 0 Terminal 11 to 2 4 Terminal 15 o monitor 2 6 Relay terminal ve Output fi it HIGH ek aaia ea R 0 to 39960 0 01 took after conversion d007 LOW 100Bh lee R Real frequency monitor 40000 to 40000 0 01 Hz 100Ch de R LOW 100Dh Torque reference monitor d009 R 200 to 200 1 100Eh Torque bias monitor d010 R 200 to 200 1 100Fh Not used 1010h Output torque monitor d012 R 200 to 200 1 1011h Output voltage monitor d013 R 0 to 6000 0 1 V 1012h Input power monitor d014 R 0 to 9999 0 1 kW d015 1013h l HIGH Integrated power monitor R 0 to 9999999 0 1 h 1014h dls LOW d016 1015h l HIGH Total RUN time R 0 to 999900 0 1 kW 1016h d016 LOW d017 1017h l l HIGH Power ON time monitor R 0 to 999900 1 h 1018h agay LOW 1019h Fin temperature monitor d018 R 200 to 2000 0 1 C 101Ah Motor temperature monitor d019 R 200 to 2000 0 1 C 101Bh _ __ _ Not used 101Ch 2 0 Capacitor on the main circuit board 101Dh Life assessment monitor d022 R 2 1 C
3. Reo Function name Reel R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code Light load signal output 0 Enabled during acceleration 1426h 9 9 P C038 R W deceleration constant speed mode 1 Enabled only during constant speed 0 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW A 1427h Light load detection level C039 R W 0 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 Ove head waminesanal 0 Enabled during acceleration 1428h SiiBubimode 9 sig C040 R W deceleration constant speed P 1 Enabled only during constant speed 0 0 Does not operate 1429h Overload warning level C041 R W 0 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 0 1 0 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 142Ah f f ie R W Arrival frequency during 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz acceleration C042 142Bh LOW R W 142Ch ice R W Arrival frequency during 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz deceleration C043 142Dh LOW R W 142Eh UERY PASES NS C044 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 142Fh aig R W Arrival frequency during 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz acceleration 2 C045 1430h LOW R W 1431h ign R W Arrival frequency during 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz deceleration 2 C046 1432h LOW R W 1433h to Not used 1437h 1438h PID FB upper limit C052 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 1439h PID FB lower limit C053 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 143Ah_ Not used Overtorque level 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW TBh Forward power running C039 RW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Del Overtorque level 0 to 200
4. Parameter Default Greige Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation Position ready range 0 to 9999 4 123 POT setting 1000 10000 Pe NO RANA poig Position ready delay 9 99 to 9 99 0 00 No ae ee time setting 4 129 Electronic gear Ex na 00 Position feedback side FB P019 Setting position 01 Position command side REF 09 N selection P020 Electronic gear ratio 0 to 9999 1 No Jao numerator 4 125 po21 Electronic gear ratio 0 to 9999 1 No denominator Position control 0 00 to 99 99 P022 feedforward gain 100 0 to 655 3 0 90 No 4 120 4 124 P023 Position loop gain 0 00 10 99 39 0 50 No rad s 4 125 100 0 4 129 4 131 P024 Position bias amount 204 2048 999 to 2048 0 Yes 4 124 Secondary resistance compensation 00 Disabled P025 enable disable 01 Enabled op No _ ale 2 selection Q Q S poze Overspeed error 00 to 150 0 135 0 No 56 detection level Speed deviation error 0 00 to 99 99 P027 detection level 100 0 to 120 0 aD No ne 4 120 paag SP orgeat rang 1 to 9999 1 No numerator f 4 128 paag MP Or gaar ralin 1 to 9999 1 No denominator Acceleration 00 Digital Operator P031 deceleration time 01 Option 1 00 No 4 8 input type 02 Option 2 00 Digital Operator P032 A a PN o 01 Option 1 o Nol P put typ 02 Option 2 00 Termina
5. 7 10 Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Drawing MRX A2550 2 12 380 79 352 UIMITA T LLAIUDAINIOUITOIITOIITOOINOORONOOITOITDOINTO ITTI ETT IITON 7 11 670 700 12 380 480 y O00000 250 7 2 Dimensional Drawing MRX A4750 A4900 2 12 300 79 357 MUNII LOUIIOITOIDOIUOOITOIITOITEOIITOIITOITDUITOIITOI ITIITI ITTO 670 700 12 300 390 y p 268 7 12 suoljeoyioeds Specifications 7 2 Dime
6. peger Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 1266h PID output limit function A078 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 s 0 Disabled 1267h PID feedforward selection A079 riw 1 Input O 2 Input Ol 3 Input O2 1268h Not used 0 Always ON 1269h AVR selection A081 R W 1 Always OFF 2 OFF during deceleration 200 V class 0 200 1 215 2 220 3 230 4 240 126Ah AVR voltage selection A082 R W 400 V class 5 380 6 400 7 415 8 440 9 460 10 480 126Bh Not used 126Ch Not used 0 Normal operation 126Dh_ RUN mode selection A085 R W 1 Energy saving operation 2 Automatic operation 126E h Energy saving response Aoge R W 0 to 1000 0 1 accuracy adjustment 126Fh to Not used 1273h A092 1274h HIGH R W Acceleration time 2 1 to 360000 0 01 s 1275h A092 R W LOW A093 1276h HIGH R W Deceleration time 2 T 1 to 360000 0 01 s 1277h LOW R W 2 step acceleration 0 Switched via terminal 2CH 12g deceleration selection A094 ay 1 Switched by setting F 1279h ice R W ae oe 09 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 5 127Ah LOW R W 127Bh i R W 2 step deceleration 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 127Ch S AOS R W LOW 4 183 4 4 Communication Function pedicle Function name Funeden R W Monit
7. Power cable External Applicable Motor Applicable mm Ground 7 Terminal Tightening device braking resistor Crimp oe output Inverter R S T U V cable between PD 1 screw aA torque kW model W PD 1 mm al az Nem Earth leakage A and RB mm breaker ELB P N 0 4 RX A2004 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 12 5A max 1 8 0 75 RX A2007 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 12 10A max 1 8 1 5 RX A2015 2 2 2 M4 2 4 1 2 15A max 1 8 2 2 RX A2022 2 2 2 M4 2 4 i 20A max 1 8 3 7 RX A2037 3 5 3 5 3 5 M4 3 5 4 ie 30A max 1 8 5 5 RX A2055 5 5 5 5 5 5 M5 R5 5 5 an 50 A 4 0 max 7 5 RX A2075 8 8 8 M5 R8 5 af 60A 2 4 0 max amp 4 0 S 11 RX A2110 14 14 14 M6 R14 6 75A z 4 4 max a 4 5 15 RX A2150 22 22 22 M6 22 6 100A 4 9 max 18 5 RX A2185 30 22 30 M6 38 6 12 100 A 4 9 max 22 RX A2220 38 30 38 M8 38 8 a 150A 8 8 max 60 8 1 30 RX A2300 22 x 2 30 M8 60 8 8 8 max 200 A 100 4 8 1 37 RX A2370 38 x 2 38 M8 100 8 20 0 max 225 A 100 4 8 1 45 RX A2450 38 x 2 38 M8 100 8 20 0 max 225 A 150 20 0 55 RX A2550 60 x 2 60 M10 150 10 22 0 max 350 A 2 18 u s q Design 2 2 Wiring Power cable Applicable External Motor Applicable mm Ground Terminal f Tightening device braking resistor Crimp eae output Inverter R S T U V cable Gehl PD 1 s
8. Name Code Name Code Overcurrent protection during constant speed 1 During stop 1 Overvoltage protection during deceleration 2 During deceleration 2 Overcurrent protection during acceleration 3 During constant speed 3 Overcurrent protection during stop 4 During acceleration 4 Overload protection 5 Operates at frequency 0 5 Braking resistor overload protection 6 During startup 6 Overvoltage protection 7 During DB 7 EEPROM error 8 During overload limit 8 Undervoltage protection 9 During SON FOC 9 CT error 10 CPU error 11 External trip 12 USP error 13 Grounding protection 14 Incoming overvoltage protection 15 Momentary power interruption protection 16 Power module abnormal temperature 20 during FAN stop Power module abnormal temperature 21 Gate array communications error 23 Input phase loss protection 24 Main circuit error 25 IGBT error 30 Thermistor error 35 Brake error addition 36 Emergency shutoff error 37 Low speed range electronic thermal 38 Option 1 errors 0 to 9 60 to 69 Option 2 errors 0 to 9 70 to 79 lt Holding Register Number List Monitor gt Bede Function name Buneten R W Monitor and setting parameters Rresolution No code 1001h aan Output frequency monitor a 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 1002h LOW 1003h Output current monitor d002 0 to 9999 0 1 A 0 Stop 1004h Rotation direction monitor d003 1 Forward 2 Reverse 4 176 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function
9. egite Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 Output frequency 1 Output current 2 Output torque 3 Digital output frequency 4 Output voltage 5 Input power 141Bh FM selection C027 R W 6 Thermal load rate 7 LAD frequency 8 Digital current monitor 9 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 12 Not used 0 Output frequency 1 Output current 2 Output torque 4 Output voltage 5 Input power 141Ch AM selection C028 R W 6 Thermal load rate 7 LAD frequency 9 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 11 Output torque signed 13 Not used 0 Output frequency 1 Output current 2 Output torque 4 Output voltage 5 Input power 141Dh AMI selection C029 R W 6 Thermal load rate 7 LAD frequency 9 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 14 Not used 441E h_ P Sital current monitor C030 R W 200 to 2000 0 1 reference value Multi function output 141Fh terminal 11 contact C031 R W selection Multi function output 1420h terminal 12 contact C032 R W selection Multi function output 1421h terminal 13 contact C033 R W selection 0 NO 1 NC Multi function output 1422h terminal 14 contact C034 R W selection Multi function output 1423h terminal 15 contact C035 R W selection 1424h Relay output AL2 AL1 C036 R W 2 contact selection 1425h Not used 4 195 4 4 Communication Function
10. 4 123 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P020 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 4 _ numerator P021 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 4 o denominator P022 PorHan conte 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 0 00 feedforward gain P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 0 50 rad s P024 Position bias amount 204 2048 999 to 2048 0 Multi function inputs 47 PCLR position deviation clear C001 to C008 np 48 STAT pulse train position command 1 to 8 selection aa input permission Frequency reference for the pulse train position control mode is calculated with the following formu la P Number of motor poles F i jjs 6 4 x P x Kv AP Kv Position loop gain frequency relerence Hz ENC 255 ENC Number of encoder pulses AP Position deviation In the position control mode the acceleration deceleration time settings are disabled The Inverter is automatically brought into LAD cancel status The higher the position loop back gain the shorter the acceleration deceleration time For details on the pulse train input mode refer to the following Mode 0 Pulse train with 90 phase difference sn LSI LS LU Ss LS LI Pulse train input Pulse train input Detected pulses Reverse Forward Time Mode 1 Forward Reverse command Pulse train sn
11. omron OPOWER RX INVERTER OMAR One RUNO OvJ PRGO On O o STOP HON RESET ODJ AJY J C Warning Description A AWARNING HAZARD OF PERSONAL INJURY OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK Read the manual carefully betore installation and follow the instructions Do not open the cover while power is applied or for 10 minutes alter power has been removed Ba sure to connect the grounding termina to earth ground Be sure to install the inverter on flame resistant material such as a steel plate ESABENAT MTAZOV RARESIRAL TOBE Feia ea A 1 OSORIO by l 4RSUc FELSSE5 SRUPCOAMRCETACe Checking Before Unpacking Checking Before Unpacking Checking the Product On delivery be sure to check that the delivered product is the Inverter RX model that you ordered Should you find any problems with the product immediately contact your nearest local sales representative or OMRON sales office e Checking the Nameplate r Inverter model ______ gt Type name RX A4004 EF Model SJ700 OO4HFEF2 INVERTER ae kW HP 0 4 1 2 Input specifications ___ Input Entree 50Hz 60H V Ph A 5OH7 60H 380 480 V JPh Dey Output specifications gt Dulput Sortie O 40047 J80 480 V SPH S N 1621082000000 DATI 00 NE TAO Y s y i PAN Fe Service t Onat ta t Omer i meee e ee Checking the Model RX A2055 EF F Built in filter E Europe standard
12. Operation status Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item During startup eis ts during Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H034 During Reduce the speed response H005 Motor hunting deceleration Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H034 During PRE e T Set a overload limit level lower than that of the b021 torque limit q i g torque torque b041 to b044 Ea Rotation is not constant Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H034 Related functions A001 A044 F001 b040 H002 H003 H004 H020 H021 H022 H023 H050 H051 H052 P011 P012 Note 1 Make sure that the carrier frequency b083 is not lower than 2 1 kHz If the carrier frequency is at 2 1 Hz or lower the Inverter does not operate normally Note 2 To use a lower rank motor size than the Inverter set a torque limit value b041 to b044 while keeping the value a calculated with the following formula at 200 or lower Otherwise the motor may burn out a Torque limit set value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example If the Inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit set value 4 121 for a 200 calculated with the above formula is as follows Torque limit set value b041 to b044 a x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used Torque Bias Function Th
13. e To operate with this function set RUN mode selection A085 to 01 You can adjust the response and accuracy with energy saving response accuracy adjustment A086 e Controls the output power at a comparatively slow rate Should rapid load fluctuation like impact load occur the motor may stall resulting in an overcurrent trip Parameter No Function name Data Response Accuracy 0 Slow High A086 Energy saving response accuracy adjustment 100 Fast Low Automatic Optimum Acceleration Deceleration e The automatic acceleration deceleration function eliminates the need for acceleration deceleration settings during Inverter operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Normal operation 01 Energy saving operation 00 02 Automatic operation A044 A244 A344 b021 b024 b022 b025 A085 RUN mode selection Related functions e Conventionally the user had to set an Inverter acceleration deceleration time depending on the actual load conditions However this function can automatically set an acceleration deceleration time making full use of the Inverter s capacity The acceleration time is a time during which acceleration is performed within a current value set in the overload limit parameter when the overload limit function is enabled or within approx 150 of the rated current when the overload limit function is disabled The deceleration time is
14. Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Peer 0 to 255 H006 H206 H306 Stabilization parameter If hunting occurs adjust the set value 100 20 to 100 6 A049 Output voltage gain If hunting occurs reduce the set value 190 G b083 Carrier frequency Dole ea 5 0 kHz If hunting occurs reduce the set value 4 118 suoljoun Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used Functions That Need 3G3AX PG01 e Generally the Feedback Option Board 3G3AX PG01 is required for the following two cases e 05 V2 sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 e Pulse train frequency input is selected in any of the following parameters 06 pulse train frequency is selected in frequency reference selection A001 With 10 operation function result selected in frequency reference selection A001 07 pulse train frequency is selected in operation frequency input A setting A141 or operation frequency input B setting A142 03 pulse train frequency is selected in PID feedback selection A076 When running the Inverter with V f characteristics selection A044 set to 00 VC you can check the rotation direction with real frequency monitor d008 If positive frequency is detected when the forward command is activated or if negative frequency is detected when the reverse
15. y y i fJ i D 13 1 A A y To lower limit 1 The setting displayed varies depending on the parameter 2 To change the data be sure to press the Enter key 3 12 oN Operation 3 6 Parameter Transition E Operation Example for Complete Display Default b037 00 Displays all parameters Operation and sequence Operation and sequence of Operation and sequence of Operation and sequence of of code display monitor data display code display monitor data display Monitor Function modes Monitor Function modes Extended function mode Extended function mode Press the Increment Decrement key to scroll through codes in the code display and to increase decrease the number in the data display Press either key until you see the desired code or data For fast forwarding press and hold either key vy d mode A yvy Cd Monitor display 1 1 The setting displayed varies depending on the parameter Par i 2 To change the data be sure to press the Enter key Function 7 mode FOG I lE ANE Data displa A Data display 1 2 2 play X Extended A y or arr function A v A
16. Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A041 Torque boost selection 00 Manual torque boost jo A241 2nd torque boost selection 01 Automatic torque boost A042 Manual torque boost voltage 2nd manual torque boost 9 0 t0 200 A242 voltag Ratio to the value of AVR voltage 1 0 9 selection A082 A342 3rd manual torque boost voltage A043 Manual torque boost frequency A243 2nd a boost 0 0 to 50 0 Eo 7 q y Ratio to base frequency i A343 3rd manual torque boost frequency H003 Motor capacity selection 0 20 to 160 0 Factory at kW H203 2nd motor capacity selection Ratio to base frequency default H004 Motor pole number selection 2nd motor pole number 2 4 6 8 10 4 Pole H204 selection A046 Automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain 0 to 255 100 2nd automatic torque boost A246 A voltage compensation gain 4 19 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A047 Automatic torque boost slip compensation gain 0 to 255 100 A247 2nd automatic torque boost slip compensation gain To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Manual Torque Boost e Outputs the voltage set in A042 A242 A342 or A043 A243 A343 eIn A042 A242 A342 set a ratio based on the voltage set in the motor voltage selection as 100 Output voltage 100 A042
17. 1215h Multi step speed selection A019 R W oe 1216h age R W Multizstep speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 0 1217h nue R W LOW 1218h EN R W BIDE Step Speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 1 1219h et R W LOW 121Ah ig R W Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 2 121Bh A022 R W LOW 121Ch aga R W MUI Step SPERE 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 3 121Dh nue R W LOW 4 179 4 4 Communication Function Bogie Function name punen R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 121Eh l E RAN Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 4 A024 121Fh row RW 1220h l age ROY Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 5 A025 1221h ow RW 1222h l ies RW Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 6 A026 1223h row RW 1224h l ies RW Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 7 A027 1225h ow RW 1226h l RET RN Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 8 A028 1227h ow RW 1228h l Mee RW Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 9 A029 1229h ow RW 122Ah l PE RW Multi step
18. Data RUN command source 01 Turn on off the FW or RV allocated to terminals The STOP command is activated if both Forward Reverse commands are input simultaneously 02 Use the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator 03 Use the ModBus communication 04 Use option board 1 05 Use option board 2 Base Frequency e Match the Inverter output frequency voltage to the motor rating Be careful especially if you set a base frequency below 50 Hz Otherwise the motor may burn out Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A003 Base frequency 30 to Max frequency A004 A203 2nd base frequency 30 to 2nd max frequency A204 50 0 Hz A303 3rd base frequency 30 to 3rd max frequency A304 Related functions A004 A204 A304 A081 A082 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 11 For the base frequency and motor voltage selections match the Inverter output frequency voltage to the motor rating Output voltage AVR voltage selection A082 Base frequency A003 A203 A303 gt Output frequency Hz lf you apply a base frequency of over 60 Hz a special motor is required This may require the Inverter to increase its capacity to accommodate a different applicable motor e Set the motor voltage selection according to the motor specifications If the voltage exceeds the spec
19. Item Data 1 terminal 00000001 2 terminal 00000002 3 terminal 00000004 4 terminal 00000008 5 terminal 00000010 6 terminal 00000020 7 terminal 00000040 8 terminal 00000080 FW terminal 00000100 2 Multi function output terminal monitor Item 11 terminal 00000001 12 terminal 00000002 13 terminal 00000004 14 terminal 00000008 15 terminal 00000010 Relay terminal 00000020 4 148 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Command 04 gt Reads the Inverter status e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 04 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Data 8 bytes Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Inverter status data includes the following three
20. Set values ee 00 01 02 03 04 Line S shape U shape Inverted U shape EL S shape A097 E Acceleration 2 2 Ei fe 6 6 6 Time Time Time Time Time Deceleration 2 a 3 O O 6 6 fo Time Time Time Time Time Accelerates Helps prevent the Helps with tension control and roll break Provides shockless Decelerates collapse of cargo prevention for a winding machine etc start stop as with D scripti n linearly before on the elevating the S pattern but P reaching the set machine or the intermediate output frequency conveyor section is linear value 4 39 4 2 Function Mode Pattern Curve Parameter Curve Factor e Determine a curve factor with reference to the figures below Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Target Target Target frequency frequency frequency 100 gt 100 gt 100 gt 96 9 eee 82 4 875 68 4 64 6 65 35 35 4 31 6 12 5 17 6 6 25 3 1 0 39 25 50 75 Time 25 50 75 1 Time 25 50 75 Time Acceleration time before reaching the Acceleration time before reaching the Acceleration time before reaching the output frequency set value 100 output frequency set value 100 output frequency set value 100 e The S pattern has an intermediate section where acceleration deceleration time is shortened lf LAD cancel LAC is selected for a multi function input and that input is turned on the acceleration deceleration pattern
21. Max applicable motor capacity 004 0 4 kW 007 0 75 kW 220 22 kW 015 1 5 kW 300 30 kW 022 2 2 kW 370 37 kW 037 3 7 kW 450 45 kW 055 5 5 kW 550 55 kW 075 7 5 kW 750 75 kW 110 11 kw 900 90 kW 150 15 kW 11K 110 kW 185 18 5 kW 13K 132 kW Voltage class 2 3 phase 200 V AC 200 V class 4 3 phase 400 V AC 400 V class Enclosure rating Panel mounting IP20 min or closed wall mounting models B IPOO A Checking the Accessories Note that this manual is the only accessory included with the RX model Mounting screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the user 10 Revision History Revision History BA manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number located at the lower left of the front and back covers Cat No 1560 E2 03 Revision code Revision code Revision date Changes and revision pages 01 April 2009 First printing 11 About This Manual About This Manual This User s Manual is compiled chapter by chapter for user s convenience as follows Understanding the following configuration ensures more effective use of the product Overview Chapter 1 Overview Describes features and names of parts Provides external dimensions installation dimensions peripheral device Chapter 2 Design design selection i
22. A012 O end frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No Hz A013 O start ratio 0 to O end ratio No A014 O end ratio O start ratio to 100 100 No A015 O start selection 00 External start frequency A011 set value 01 0 Hz 01 No 4 14 A016 O O2 Ol sampling 1 to 30 31 with 500 ms Ollter 0 1 Hz hysteresis 31 No A017 Not used Use 00 Do not change 00 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 5 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ies Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation Multi step speed 00 Binary 16 step selection with 4 terminals A019 selection 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 terminals 00 Ne _ TIG A020 Multi step speed 0 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz reference 0 A220 2nd multi step 0 0 Starting frequency to 2nd Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz 4 8 speed reference 0 4 16 A320 3rd multistep speed 0 0 Starting frequency to 3rd Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz reference 0 A021 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 1 A022 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 2 A023 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 3 A024 Multi step speed 0 00 D reference 4
23. 7 Origin Position Low speed zero return frequency P071 1 The Inverter accelerates to the low speed zero return frequency according to the acceleration time setting 2 The Inverter runs at the low speed zero return speed 3 The Inverter performs positioning when the ORL signal is input 1 The Inverter accelerates to the high speed zero return frequency according to the acceleration time setting 2 The Inverter runs at the high speed zero return frequency 3 The Inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned on 4 The Inverter runs in reverse at the low speed zero return frequency 5 The Inverter performs positioning when the ORL signal is turned off 1 The Inverter accelerates to the high speed zero return frequency according to the acceleration time setting 2 The Inverter runs at the high speed zero return frequency 3 The Inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned on 4 The Inverter runs in reverse at the low speed zero return frequency 5 The Inverter starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned off 6 The Inverter runs forward at the low speed zero return frequency 7 The Inverter performs positioning at the first Z pulse position after the ORL signal is turned on 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used Forward Reverse Run Stop Function FOT ROT With a signal from the control range limit switch this functi
24. Daily Inspection and Periodic Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection period Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Ambient temperature Check ambient 10 C to 50 C F G Thermometer Ambient temperature as Refer to 2 1 no freezing oF O Doeg Hygrometer environment well as humidity Installation Ambient Recorder and dust levels humidity 90 max no condensation General Check that there Entire device are no abnormal o Visual or acoustic No faults vibrations or inspection sounds Bower Check that the Measure the voltage Must be within Tester Sos aen between Inverter allowable rae supply main circuit O PRA UR digital voltide Joltaaeis nomal main circuit terminals fluctuation of m ltineter 9 9 i R L1 S L2 and T L3 AC voltage Disconnect the I O wirings of the Inverter main circuit terminal block detach the control terminal block board and remove the short circuit bar Megger check used for switching the between main Inverter built in filter Main General circuit terminal O function Then use a 5 MQ min 500 V DC circuit megger and ground megger to measure terminal the resistance between the ground terminal and the short circuited parts of terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 P PD 1 N RB Ro and To 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient te
25. Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b012 Electronic thermal level b212 2nd electronic thermal level b312 3rd electronic thermal level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated current Rated current No b013 Electronic thermal characteristics selection b213 2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection b313 3rd electronic thermal characteristics selection 00 Reduced torque characteristics 01 Constant torque characteristics 02 Free setting 00 No 4 46 b015 Electronic Thermal Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 b017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 b019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 0 to 400 No Hz b016 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 b018 Free setting electronic thermal current 2 b020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 0 0 to Rated current 0 0 No 4 46 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 13 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ines Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation 00 Disabled 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed Ov
26. operation Automatic torque A046 _ boost voltage 0 to 255 100 compensation gain Yes 8 2nd automatic w A246 torque boost voltage 0 to 255 100 S compensation gain R 4 19 a Automatic torque 5 A047 boost slip 0 to 255 100 compensation gain Yes 2nd automatic A247 torque boost slip 0 to 255 100 compensation gain ae de 00 Disabled D S A051 Se braking 01 Enabled 00 No fi a 02 Frequency control A052 set value c oie y F DC injection braking 0 00 to 99 99 4 24 3 A052 frequency 100 0 to 400 0 0 50 Ng Hz T EEEE aos3 PC injection braking 00 to 5 0 0 0 No s Q delay time iniecti i 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No A054 DC injection braking g power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 40 No aos5 PC injection braking 0 0 to 60 0 0 5 No s gt time g A056 DC injection braking 00 Edge operation 01 No o 4 24 method selection 01 Level operation O 5 Startup DC injection 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW d AOSI braking power 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW o No f QO EE A agg Startup DC Injection 0 9 to 60 0 0 0 No s braking time A059 DC injection braking 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 No kHz carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 No kHz A061 Frequency upper limit 0 00 Frequency lower limit to Max frequency 0 00 3 2nd frequency 0 00 2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd Max No Hz A261 oe 0 00 Ko upper limit frequency l p A062 Frequency lowe
27. Parameter Default ees Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation z 0 to 9999 Factory COST O adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 defaut YS 5 0 to 9999 Factory n 6082 Olradjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 defaut YS y 0 to 9999 Factory y 6083 Sa adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 defaut YS T lt Thermistor 0 0 to 999 9 Factory C085 adjustment 1000 defaut YS 473 C091 Not used oe o No Do not change C101 UP DWN selection 00 gt Ro not store the frequency data 00 No 488 01 Store the frequency data 00 Trip reset at power on 01 Trip reset when the power is OFF 4 85 5 C102 Reset selection 02 Enabled only during trip Reset when the 00 Yes 4 132 5 power is ON 03 Trip reset only Reset frequenc 99 0 Mz Start C103 matchi paea 01 Frequency matching start 00 No 4 85 9 02 Active Frequency Matching restart z C105 FM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes 4 108 C106 AM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes n C107 AMI gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes aoe a S C109 AM bias setting 0 to 100 0 Yes C110 AMI bias setting 0 to 100 20 Yes amp Overload warning 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated E GI level 2 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current Mo A 449 He 0 to 9999 Factory 5 C121 O zero adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 d
28. og 100 0 to 655 3 Depends H222 2nd motor on the parameter L motor capacity Depends H023 Motor parameter lo onthe motor capacity 0 01 to 99 99 No A 100 0 to 655 3 Depends H223 2nd motor on the parameter lo motor capacity 4 113 Depends H024 Motor parameter J onte 0 001 to 9 999 motor 10 00 to 99 99 SPE agate ena 100 0 to 999 9 Depends 2nd motor 1000 to 9999 on the H224 parameter J motor capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 48 po uoiesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default a No Function name Monitor or data range eatin during Unit Page i g operation Depends H030 Motor parameter R1 on the auto tuning data motor 0 001 to 9 999 capacity i 5 10 00 to 65 53 Depends 2nd motor nthe H230 parameter R1 F motor auto tuning data capacity Depends Motor parameter R2 on the H031 f auto tuning data motor 0 001 to 9 999 capacity n gt 10 00 to 65 53 Depends 2nd motor anhe H231 parameter R2 A motor auto tuning data s capacity Depends H032 Motor parameter L on the auto tuning data motor S 0 01 to 99 99 a doe age 4 408 2 100 0 to 655 3 Depends 4 113 g 2nd motor nthe 5 H232 parameter L j motor S auto tuning data capacity Depends Motor parameter lo on the MORS auto
29. 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 25 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Greige Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation Overtorque level C055 _ Forward power 100 No running Overtorque level C056 _ Reverse 100 No regeneration 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW ae 5 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 3 C057 Reverse power 100 No E running E Overtorque level C058 Forward 100 No a regeneration O 7 Z goet Thermalwaming io to 100 80 No 4 46 level z 00 Disabled C062 Alarm code selection 01 3 bit 00 No 4 99 02 4 bit C063 0 Hz detection level an 93 93 0 00 No Hz 4 99 coe4 in overheat warning g to 200 120 No c 4 103 level 02 Loop back test Communication 03 2400 bps C071 speed selection 04 4800 bps 04 No Baud rate selection 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps co72 CoMmunication 4 to 32 1 No n station No selection Communication bit 7 7 bit Cora length selection 8 8 bit y No A z Communication 00 No parity iiai e C074 Anit selection 01 Even 00 No 2 Pay 02 Odd O Communication stop 1 1 bit 190 e E C075 bit selection 2 2 bit i Ne E 00 Trip 5 Communicatomerror 01 Trip after deceleration stop cove 02 Ignore 02 No
30. 4 138 pos7 Pulse train frequency 499 to 100 0 No bias amount P058 Pei train frequency 0 to 100 100 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 52 E uoiesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter i Default Cinge Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page Ne cen operation F rr Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position a x P060 c rmnmand O Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including ii Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position me P061 Somnand Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including gt pa Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position ue P062 command Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including ed Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position ma X P063 commands Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including T Yes 5 a a Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P064 Position range specification forward 0 2 command 4 inite j ing a D side Displays MSB 4 digits including 4 131 O o Multi step positi
31. Pe Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position be P063 c mman 3 Position range specification forward 0 E side Displays MSB 4 digits including Yes 5 PF F 7 Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to P064 Position range specification forward 0 9 command 4 acs Ngee z side Displays MSB 4 digits including 4 131 o Multi step position Position range specification reverse side to 5 P065 comand 5 Position range specification forward 0 2 side Displays MSB 4 digits including T a Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position i PO66 commandi6 Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including E Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position ne A P067 aah Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including 00 Low P068 Zero return mode 01 Hi1 00 Yes 02 Hi2 P069 Zero return direction OO Forward side 00 Yes S selection 01 Reverse side Bozo oN speed zerg 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Yes Hz return frequency High speed zero 0 00 to 99 99 POZI return frequency 100 0 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 4 131 S Position range 0 to 268435455 at P012 02 P072 specification 0 to 1073741823 at P012 03 268435455 Yes 9 forward Displays MSB 4 digits 5 Position range 268435455 to 0 at P012 02 P073 specification 1073741823 to 0
32. Position loop gain FB Electronic gear setting position 01 REF selected 4 127 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Motor Gear Ratio Setting Function This function is useful for a system with an optional encoder installed on the machine side Set the number of actual encoder pulses in encoder pulses P011 Set a motor to encoder rpm ratio in motor gear ratio numerator denominator P028 P029 With the above settings the number of encoder pulses converted into motor shaft data is set in the Inverter This function performs speed position detection based on the number of encoder pulses converted into motor shaft data and calculates the orientation stop position based on the number of encoder pulses P011 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Eg P028 Motor gear ratio numerator 0 to 9999 1 P029 Motor gear ratio Set a motor to encoder rpm ratio denominator P011 Encoder pulses 128 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 1024 Puls Set the number of actual encoder pulses Note Make sure that the N D setting is within the range of 1 50 lt N D lt 20 N Motor gear ratio numerator D Motor gear ratio denominator suoljoun lt Example gt Encoder Gear Load 1024 pulses When the motor to encoder rpm ratio is 1 10 set the following data Number of encoder pulses P011 1024 Motor gear ratio numerator P028 10 Motor gear ratio deno
33. eee eeeeeeeeeeeseceeeesseceeeeeseeeeeeeeseneenees 4 57 secondary resistance compensation 0 4 112 user SCISCUOMN 5 0 2ehSbcee send sencOeeeedandectastessennieanedees 4 53 sensor vector Control cee sensorless vector control CITAO RO IN aii eda een SA E E Sma a o AS a E A T ETETE ET signal during RUN ou eee eee etree ene SINK lOGIC ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeteenaeeeeeenaeeees Slide Switch tieira Seen eee DAs een ence A E AT ET AAR Wiring CONIO CHCA TOMES saiae stabilization parameter 0 ccccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeees Wiring the main circuit terminals Start fFeqUenCy e seeessieeieeeiisriserirteiresirrerssrrssneee Slam ratlOnct in ie aia aaa ee Z start selection oo eee eet eeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeteeeteaeeteeeeeneae a starting contact signal ZS ied 4 99 Starting frequency ceccceceseeeeeeeteeeeteeeteeeeteeeeeneee Stop key selection cece ceeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeees St p SeElOCHON nissin cores SO Pistect as ae aie Sa Synchronous Operation seee Index 3
34. gain switching H073 Gain switching time 0 to 9999 100 Yes ms P001 Operation selection a Trip 00 No o at option 1 error 01 Continues operation P Operation selection 00 Trip pane at option 2 error 01 Continues operation oY Ne 4 120 128 to 9999 P011 Encoder pulses 1000 to 6500 10000 to 65000 1024 No Pulse pars 00 ASR speed control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode i a P012 a moue 02 APR2 absolute position control mode 00 No 5 poa 5 03 HAPR High resolution absolute position 2 control mode O Pulse train mode 00 Mode 0 P013 Selection 01 Mode 1 00 No 4 123 i 02 Mode 2 po14 Orentation stop 0 to 4095 0 No n position P015 Orientation speed Starting frequency to Max frequency upper 5 00 No Hz 4 129 setting limit 120 0 P016 Orientation direction 00 Forward side 00 No setting 01 Reverse side 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 50 uoiesado E Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter i Default a a Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation Position ready range 0 to 9999 4 123 POT setting 1000 10000 Re NSE DISS deag po1g Position ready delay 0 00 to 9 99 0 00 No a e time setting 4 129 Electronic gear Ae p aA 00 Position feedback side FB P913 j setting position
35. 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 0004000000000000 0000000000080000 0008000000000000 0000000000100000 0010000000000000 0000000000200000 0020000000000000 0000000000400000 0040000000000000 0000000000800000 0080000000000000 0000000001000000 0100000000000000 0000000002000000 0200000000000000 0000000004000000 0400000000000000 0000000008000000 0800000000000000 0000000010000000 1000000000000000 0000000020000000 2000000000000000 0000000040000000 4000000000000000 0000000080000000 8000000000000000 suoi un4 Example To enable Forward Multi step speed 1 and Multi step speed 2 for the Inverter with station No 01 0x0000000000000001 0x0000000000000004 0x0000000000000008 0x000000000000000D The transmission frame is therefore STX 01 02 000000000000000D BCC CR 4 146 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 155 Negative response Refer to page 4 155 lt Command 03 gt Reads all monitor data e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmiss
36. 251Ch LOW R W 251Dh Hees R W HIGH 0 001 2nd motor parameter J 1 to 9999000 2 251Eh t1224 R W ows LOW 251Fh to Not used 2523h 2524h aan R W 2nd motor parameter R1 1 to 65530 0 001 Q auto tuning data H230 2525h LOW R W 4 208 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regjia Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 2526h ace R W 2nd motor parameter R2 4 to 65530 0 004 0 auto tuning data H231 2527h LOW R W 2528h Ge R W 2nd motor parameter L 1 to 65530 0 04 mH auto tuning data H232 2529h LOW R W 252Ah nace R W 2nd motor parameter lo 4 to 65530 0 01 A auto tuning data H233 252Bh LOW R W 252Ch poe R W 2nd motor parameter J HIGH 0 001 i 1 to 9999000 2 auto tuning data H234 kgm 252Dh LOW R W 252Eh to Not used 253Ch 253Dh 2nd PI proportional gain H250 R W O to 10000 0 1 253Eh 2nd PI integral gain H251 R W O to 10000 0 1 253Fh 2nd P proportional gain H252 R W 0 to 1000 0 01 2540h to Not used 2546h 2547h 2nd limit at O Hz H260 R W O to 1000 0 1 B5dBhe oo boost amount AE SEY Tioga RW 0 to 50 1 startup 0 Hz 2549h to Not used 3102h Data on H203 2nd motor capacity selection is the following code data Code data 00 01 02 03 04 0
37. 3 31 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default ines Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation RUN time Power ON 0 to 9999 0 to 99990 p934 time setting 1000 to 6553 10000 to 655300 0 No I Toz o Rotation direction 00 Forward and Reverse are enabled b035 limit selection 01 Only Forward is enabled 00 No 4 52 fo 02 Only Reverse is enabled Reduced voltage 0 Reduced voltage startup time small to z pee startup selection 255 Reduced voltage startup time large E Ng oe 00 Complete display 01 Individual display of functions b037 Display selection 02 User setting 04 No 4 53 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display 00 Screen when the Enter key was pressed o last Initial screen ote dO b038 eBIGeHOn 02 d002 01 No 4 56 03 d003 04 d007 05 F001 User parameter Bee b039 automatic setting 00 Disabled 00 No 4 57 01 Enabled function selection 00 Four quadrant separate setting 01 Terminal switch 4 57 b040 Torque limit selection 02 Analog input 00 No 4 59 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 ee mode 9 19200 04 1o 55 KW T b041 q 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No forward power Seat ak 4 59 no Torque limit disabled running Torque limit 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b042 Four quadrant mode 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No aa reverse regeneration no Torque limit disabl
38. Electronic gear setting position selection P019 01 REF Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 3000 Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 1024 x 2 2048 The following shows an example of the ratio of slave rpm to master rpm depending on the P019 to P021 settings Note that the same number of encoder pulses 1024 pulses should be set on both Inverters Electronic gear setting REF REF position selection Position Position FE FE P019 command side command side Position feedback side Position feedback side Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 1024 2048 1024 2048 4 126 suoljoun Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Electronic gear setting REF REF FB FB are ii PEE de Pat ea de Position feedback side Position feedback side Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 2048 1024 2048 1024 Slave rpm Master rpm 1 2 2 2 1 2 Configuration Example Main motor Number of encoder pulses 1024 Sub motor Number of encoder pulses 3000 Main motor rpm Sub motor rpm 2 1 For operation under the above conditions set the following data in the slave Inverter Electronic gear setting position selection P019 01 REF Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 3000 Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 1024 x 2 2048 Position control feedforward gain REF O ASR Position control feedforward gain C ASR REF
39. Function name Data Default setting Unit P001 P002 Operation selection at option error 00 TRP Outputs an alarm 01 RUN Continues to operate 00 lt Group H Motor Control Parameters gt Offline Auto Tuning Function e This function enables measurement and automatic setting of the motor parameters required for sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control and sensor vector control e To perform sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control for a motor with unknown motor parameters perform offline auto tuning to determine the motor parameters e To use the online auto tuning function described later be sure to perform offline auto tuning e This function is applicable to 1st 2nd control not to 3rd control For motor parameters the Inverter inputs data on one phase of Y connection at 50 Hz Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled H001 Auto tuning selection 01 Enabled Motor does not rotate 00 02 Enabled Motor rotates 00 Standard motor parameter H002 H202 Motor parameter selection o Auto tuning parameter 00 02 Auto tuning parameter Online auto tuning enabled H003 H203 Motor capacity selection 0 2 to 160 0 Factory default kW H004 H204 Motor pole number Aeg 4 Pole selection H030 H230 Motor parameter R 0 000 to 65 53 Depends ome Q auto tuning data m
40. No 41 Q selection S 04 Option 1 E 05 Option 2 4 11 A003 _ Base frequency 30 to Maximum frequency A004 60 4 110 A203 2nd base frequency 30 to 2nd maximum frequency A204 60 Ne He 4 11 A303 3rd base frequency 30 to 3rd maximum frequency A304 60 A004 Maximum frequency 30 to 400 60 2nd maximum A204 frequency 30 to 400 60 No Hz 4 12 E Apa San 30 to 400 60 frequency 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 4 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page A005 O OI selection 00 01 03 04 Switches between O OI via terminal AT Switches between O O2 via terminal AT 02 Switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between OI FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between O2 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 00 No A006 O2 selection 00 01 02 03 O2 only O Ol auxiliary frequency reference not reversible O Ol auxiliary frequency reference reversible O2 disabled 03 No 4 12 Analog input Others A011 O start frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No Hz
41. control b050 02 03 only 4 60 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Momentary Power Interruption Non stop Deceleration Stop b050 01 4 61 After the power is shut off during operation this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while keeping the voltage below the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level b052 e To use this function remove the J51 connector cable connected between terminals Ro and To and connect the cable from main terminal P to Ro and from N to To The cable size should be 0 75 mm or larger lf the power is shut off during operation and the voltage falls below the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 the frequency deceleration width decreases at the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration starting width b054 and then the Inverter decelerates for the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration time b053 lf an overvoltage condition momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level b052 or higher occurs because of regeneration during deceleration the Inverter is kept in the LAD STOP status until the overvoltage condition is reset 1 When the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level b052 lt the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 the Inverter performs this function by increasing the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration level b052
42. 02 Clears trip data The following describes each command 4 142 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 143 lt Command 00 gt Inputs the forward reverse stop command To use this command set A002 to 03 RS485 e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes of 10 32 ang FF Comm nication with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 00 Data Transmission data 1 byte Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Data Description Note 0 Stop command 1 Forward command 2 Reverse command Example To send a forward command to station 01 STX 01 00 1 BCC CR ASCII conversion 02 30 31 30 30 31 33 30 0D Em e Response frame Normal response Refer to page 4 155 Error response Refer to page 4 155 lt Command 01 gt Sets frequency reference To use this command set A001 to 03 RS485 e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01
43. 02 application value used for WCO WCOIl WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc output eYou can set hysteresis widths for the window comparator upper and lower limit levels eYou can set limit levels and a hysteresis width individually for O Ol and O2 inputs For the WCO WCOI WCO2 output you can fix the analog input application value to the desired value Set values in O OI O2 disconnection operation levels b070 b071 b072 If no is set the analog input value is directly reflected ODc OIDc O2Dc outputs are the same as WCO WCOI WCO2 respectively O OI O2 inputs Max 100 Hysteresis width b062 b065 b068 Window comparator upper limit level b061 b064 b067 Analog application value f w i Analog operating level on E ES EE ieee disconnection ae i b070 b07 1 b072 Window comparator lower l Analogiin limit level 0060 b063 b066 Min O OI 0 O2 100 WCO WCOI WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc 4 64 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Starting Frequency e Set the frequency for starting Inverter output when the RUN signal is turned on Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b082 Starting frequency 0 10 to 9 99 0 50 Hz Use mainly to adjust the starting torque With starting frequency b082 set high the starting current increases possibly causing the current to exceed the overload limit and ov
44. 1 O2 disconnection 134Ch to Not used 1350 1351h Integrated power clear b078 R W Clear by writing 1 1352h a power display 079 RW 1 to 1000 1 1353h Not used 1354h Not used 1355h Starting frequency b082 R W 10 to 999 0 01 Hz F 5 to 150 0 4 to 55 kW 1356h Carrier frequency b083 R W 5 to 100 75 to 132 kW 0 1 kHz 0 Clears the trip monitor T 1 Initializes data 1394h Initialization selection oe Ey 2 Clears the trip monitor and initializes data 4358h Mitialization parameter b085 R W Do not change am selection gaano E e aueney conversion b086 RW 1 to 999 0 1 coefficient 0 Enabled 135Ah STOP key selection b087 R W 1 Disabled 2 Disabled only during stop 0 0 Hz start 135Bh Free run stop selection b088 R W 1 Frequency matching start 2 Active Frequency Matching restart Automatic carrier 0 Disabled 1336 frequency reduction oe Ry 1 Enabled 135Dh USagerate ofregenerative Cogo RIW 0to 1000 0 1 braking function 135Eh Stop selection b091 pw Deceleration gt Stop 1 Free run stop 0 Always ON 135Fh Cooling fan control b092 R W 1 ON during RUN 1360h Not used 1361h Not used Regenerative braking 0 Disabled 1362h function operation b095 R W 1 Enabled disabled during stop selection 2 Enabled also during stop Regenerative braking 330 to 380 1363h function ON level b096 RAN 660 to 760 1M 1364h Not us
45. 11 Output torque signed AM output only 0 to 200 2 13 Not used 14 Not used 1 This output is enabled only when SLV O Hz SLV or V2 is selected Refer to Control Method V f Characteristics page 4 21 2 Below are the specifications of the output torque signed AM output V AM gain setting C106 100 10 AM gain setting C106 200 AM bias setting C109 50 Torque 0 100 200 3 When sensor vector control is selected A044 05 the real frequency detected frequency is displayed 4 108 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode BAM AMI Adjustment Adjust the Inverter output gain according to the meters connected to the AM and AMI terminals Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C106 AM gain setting 50 to 200 Set a gain for the AM monitor 100 gt 0 to 100 199 AM bias setting Set an offset for the AM monitor 0 C107 AMI gain setting 50 to 200 Set a gain for the AMI monitor 100 C110 AMI bias setting oe on 20 Set an offset for the AMI monitor Note The offset data is set in Example If AMI provides 4 to 20 mA output the offset value is 20 4 20 Default value Operation Selection During Option Error If the built in optional board causes an error you can set whether the Inverter trips or continues to run regardless of the option error Parameter No
46. 24 25 C045 C046 48 Any of C021 to C026 33 C142 to C144 49 Any of C021 to C026 34 C145 to C147 50 Any of C021 to C026 35 C148 to C150 51 Any of C021 to C026 36 C151 to C153 52 Any of C021 to C026 37 C154 to C156 53 Any of C021 to C026 38 C157 to C159 54 Any of C021 to C026 42 C064 User Setting Displays only the parameters optionally set in U001 to U012 eIn addition to U001 to U012 d001 F001 and b037 are displayed Data Comparison Display Displays only the parameters changed from the factory default Note that analog input adjustments C081 C082 C083 C121 C122 and C123 and thermistor adjustment C085 are not displayed e All monitors d and F001 are displayed 4 55 4 2 Function Mode MBasic Display Displays basic parameters Factory default Below are the parameters displayed when this function is enabled No Data Function name No Data Function name 1 d001 to d104 Monitor display 16 A045 Output voltage gain 2 F001 Output frequency setting monitor 17 A085 RUN mode selection 3 F002 Acceleration time 1 18 b001 Retry selection 4 F003 Deceleration time 1 19 p ga AlOwab s Inementaty power interruption time 5 F004 Operator Totation direction 20 b008 Trip retry selection selection 6 A001 Frequency reference selection 21 b011 Trip retry wait time 7 A002 RUN command selection 22 b037 Display selection 8 A003 Base fre
47. 3375 3900 4670 Load with 100 loss W 1150 1550 1900 2300 2800 3800 4800 5550 6650 Efficiency at rated output 95 0 95 0 95 1 95 1 95 1 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 2 1 Installation e To raise the carrier frequency reduce the output current or derate the rated current as shown in the graph below Voltage 200 V class 400 V class Capacity Max fc kHz Derating at fc 15 kHz Max fc kHz Derating at fc 15 kHz 0 4 kw 15 100 15 100 0 75 kw 15 100 15 100 1 5 kw 15 100 15 100 2 2 kW 15 100 15 100 a 3 7 kW 15 100 15 100 v 5 5 kW 15 100 15 100 7 5 kW 15 100 15 100 11 kw 12 90 41 4 max 15 100 15 kw 12 95 60 8 A max 14 95 30 4 A max 18 5 kW 10 90 68 4 A max 10 90 34 2 A max 22 kW 7 70 66 5 A max 6 75 36 0 A max 30 kW 5 80 96 8 A max 10 75 43 5 A max 37 kW 10 75 108 7 A max 8 80 60 0 A max 45 kw 5 70 127 4 A max 9 75 68 2 A max 55 kW 5 70 154 A max 6 60 67 2 A max 75 kW 6 85 126 7 A max 90 kW 4 75 132 0 A max 110 kW 6 70 151 9 A max 132 kW 3 60 156 0 A max 200 V cl ss 22KW 18 5KW py 400 V class 90kW 75kW 45kW 100 30 kW 15 kW E ee D 95 15 kW 2 90 4 5 85 5 80 30kW g 75 37kW 3 70 3 3 65 2 a 60 a 55 052 4 6 8 10 12 1415 052 4 6 8 10 12 1415 Carrier frequency
48. 36 Logic operation output 4 LOG4 C151 C152 C153 37 Logic operation output 5 LOG5 C154 C155 C156 38 Logic operation output 6 LOG6 C157 C158 C159 Example To output a logic output 1 LOG1 signal through AND operation of RUN signal 00 RUN and over set frequency arrival signal 02 FA2 to multi function output 2 e Multi function input 2 selection C002 33 LOG1 Logic output signal 1 selection 1 C142 00 RUN Logic output signal 1 selection 2 C143 02 FA2 Logic output signal 1 operator selection C144 00 AND Capacitor Life Warning Signal e This function determines estimated service life of the capacitor on the PCB based on the Inverter s internal temperature and ON time Life assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal e If this function is activated it is recommended that the main circuit board and logic board be replaced Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output E terminal selection 39 WAC Relay output AL2 AL1 Capacitor life warning signal on PCB function selection C026 05 4 101 4 2 Function Mode Network Error Enabled only when ModBus RTU is selected for RS485 communication If a reception timeout error occurs this signal is output until reception of the next data e Set a time before reception timeout in communication error timeout C077 For details refer to 4
49. 4 56 Functions 4 2 Function Mode User Parameter Automatic Setting Function When user parameter automatic setting function b039 is set to 01 enabled the parameters subjected to a data change are automatically stored in sequence from U001 to U012 This data can be used as changed data e The screen information is stored when the Enter key is pressed The monitor screens d are also stored in the same manner U001 is the most recent parameter and U012 is the oldest e The same parameter cannot be stored If the number of parameters stored exceeds 12 the oldest data U012 is erased Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit User parameter automatic 00 Disabled setting function selection 01 Enabled Related functions U001 to U012 b039 00 Torque Limit Function e This function limits motor output torque when 03 sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 sensor vector control is selected in control method A044 A244 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Vif characteristics 03 Sensorless vector A044 A244 selection 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 05 Sensor vector A244 is blank 00 Four quadrant separate setting 01 Terminal switch b040 Torque limit selection 02 Analog input 00 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Forward power running under
50. 4 56 03 d003 04 d007 05 F001 User parameter a b039 automatic setting 00 Disabled 00 No 457 01 Enabled function selection 00 Four quadrant separate setting 01 Terminal switch 4 57 b040 Torque limit selection 02 Analog input 00 No 4 59 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 Ce x mode 1200 0 4 to 55 KW a b041 q 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No forward power eater 4 59 no Torque limit disabled running E Torque limit 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b042 Four quadrant mode 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No S reverse regeneration no Torque limit disabled O erat mode 1 200 0 4 to 55 KW a b043 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No reverse power eae 4 59 no Torque limit disabled running Torque limit 4 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b044 Four quadrant mode 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No forward regeneration no Torque limit disabled Torque LADSTOP 00 Disabled b045 selection 01 Enabled 99 no F igen 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 15 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Greige Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting Operation Reverse rotation 00 Disabled oe prevention selection 01 Enabled 09 No x 459 Selection of non stop 00 Disabled function at 01 Enabled deceleration stop DOSU mo
51. 75 to 132 kW 0 Enabled when P036 01 P038 Torque bias polarity 00 As per sign selection 01 Depends on the RUN direction a _ Multi function inputs C001 to C008 52 ATR torque reference input permission Control Block Diagram Torque reference Reference value for current control The speed control P control operates when a speed detection value exceeds the limit value Speed detection value Pulse Train Position Control Mode To use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 to 05 V2 and V2 control mode selec tion P012 to 01 pulse train position control Sensor vector control can be selected for 1st control only Select a pulse train position command input mode in pulse train mode selection P013 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P012 V2 control mode selection 01 APR pulse train position control mode 00 Mode 0 pulse train with 90 phase difference 01 Mode 1 forward reverse command 00 pulse train 02 Mode 2 forward pulse train reverse pulse train 0 to 9999 1000 10000 Set a value equivalent to encoder x4 5 multiplication P013 Pulse train mode selection Position ready P017 range setting Position ready Pate delay time setting 0 00 to 9 99 0 00 s Electronic gear setting 00 FB feedback side POTS position selection 01 REF command side 00
52. A071 PID selection 01 Enabled 00 02 Reverse output enabled A072 PID P gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 A073 PID I gain 0 0 to 3600 0 1 0 s A074 PID D gain 0 00 to 100 0 0 0 s A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 Time 00 OI L 4 to 20 mA 01 O L 0 to 10 V A076 PID feedback selection 02 RS485 communication 00 03 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output 00 Deviation Target value Feedback value OTE Reverse PID function 01 Deviation Feedback value 00 Target value A078 PID output limit function 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 00 Disabled 01 O L 0 to 10 V A079 PID feedforward selection 02 Ol L 4 to 20 mA 00 03 O2 L 10 to 10 V C044 PID deviation excessive level 0 to 100 3 0 C052 PID FB upper limit 100 0 0 to 100 0 C053 PID FB lower limit 0 0 Related functions d004 A001 A005 A006 C001 to C008 C021 to C025 e To use this function set A071 to 01 or 02 You can disable the PID operation in progress using an external signal To use this function allocate 23 PID PID disabled to any of the multi function inputs While the PID terminal is turned on the Inverter disables the PID function and outputs normally eYou can limit the PID output under various conditions WBasic Structure of PID Control Example Feedforward Disabled 0to10V 4 to 20 mA 10 to 10 V Target value Deviation e 1 Control volume Normal control
53. Cc 5 T S a025 Multi step speed 0 00 5 reference 5 nol A A026 Multi step speed 0 00 Q reference 6 Qa oO j 21 A027 Multi step speed 0 00 5 reference 7 i A028 Multi step speed 0 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 4 16 reference 8 A029 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 9 A030 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 10 A031 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 11 A032 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 12 A033 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 13 A034 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 14 A035 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 15 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 6 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter i Default Cinge Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation A038 Jogging frequency 0 00 Starting frequency to 9 99 6 00 Yes Hz S 00 Free running on jogging stop 5 Disabled in operation D 01 Deceleration stop on jogging stop Disabled in operation 3 02 DC injection braking on jogging stop oO A s 2 4 1 8 2 Jogging stop Disabled in operation a A039 ee 00 No a selection 03 Free running on jogging stop 2 Enabled in operation 04 Deceleration stop on jogging stop J E x 5 Enabled in operation 05 DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation A041 Torque boost 00
54. Function name Data Default setting Unit 0 0 Does not operate 0 1 to 100 0 A regenerative braking usage rate for 100 seconds can be set in increments of 0 1 If the set usage rate is exceeded a braking resistor overload trip E06 occurs Usage rate of A i i b090 regenerative lt lt lt gt 0 0 braking function ON ON ON Regenerative E braking function activated ts Usage rate t1 t2 t3 x 100 100s 00 Disabled This function is not active F 01 Enabled during operation This function is Regenerative active b095 Boa A Disabled during stop This function is not active oe o P 02 Enabled during both operation and stop This function is active Regenerative 200 V class 330 to 380 eae b096 braking function 400 V class 660 to 760 i V 400 V class ON level Inverter DC voltage 720 V The regenerative braking function ON level conforms to the voltage setting for the Inverter s internal converter DC unit Cooling Fan Control eYou can set whether to operate the Inverter s cooling fan constantly or only during Inverter operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b092 Cooling fan control 00 Always ON 01 ON during RUN Regardless of the settings the cooling fan operates for 5 minutes after power on and for 5 minutes after the Inverter stops 01 Note If a momentary power interruption occurs or the power is shut off whil
55. Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level 1343h Window comparator Ol b064 R W Setting range 0 to 100 41 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and Window comparator Ol lower limit l y ls 1344h Eomp b065 R W Setting range 0 to 10 1 hysteresis width wees nae ar Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level 1345h Window comparator 02 b066 R W Setting range 100 to 100 i 41 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level 1346h Window comparator 02 b067 R W Setting range 100 to 100 1 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower limit levels 1347h Window comparator O2 b068 R W Setting range 0 to 10 1 hysteresis width Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 4 189 4 4 Communication Function Regis Function name Funeden R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 1348h Not used 1349h Analog operation level at b070 R W 0 to 100 255 no 1 O disconnection 134Ah Analog operation level at b071 R W 0 to 100 255 no 1 Ol disconnection 134Bh nalog operation level at b072 R W 100 to 100 127 no
56. Monitors the frequency reference Press the RUN key RUN l The RUN command LED indicator is lit and the monitor value of the ll ll frequency reference is displayed Factory default F001 6 Make sure that no errors have occurred in the Inverter during operation e Switch between forward and reverse with the operator rotation direction selection F004 Stopping the Motor After completing the no load operation press the STOP RESET key The motor will stop Actual Load Operation After checking the operation with the motor in the no load status connect the mechanical system and operate with an actual load Connecting the Mechanical System After confirming that the motor has stopped completely connect the mechanical system Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing the motor axis and the mechanical system Operation via the Digital Operator e Because a possible error may occur during operation make sure that the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible Use the Digital Operator to operate the Inverter the same way as in no load operation Checking the Operating Status After making sure that the operating direction is correct and that the Inverter is operating smoothly at a slow speed increase the frequency reference e By changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction make sure that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the
57. Once slide switch SW1 is set to ON allocation of multi function input terminals 1 and 3 will not be restored even if SW1 is reset to OFF afterward Re allocate the terminal function w D ca 5 Slide switch SW1 Slide lever factory default OFF OFF KIC ON Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals Main Power Supply Input Terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Use an earth leakage breaker for circuit wiring protection between the power supply and the main power supply terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 An earth leakage breaker may malfunction due to the effect of high frequency Use an earth leakage breaker with a large high frequency sensitivity current rating If the Inverter protection function is activated a malfunction or accident may have occurred to your system Connect a magnetic contactor to turn off the Inverter power supply Do not start or stop the Inverter by switching ON OFF the magnetic contactor connected on the Inverter power supply input primary side and output Secondary side To start or stop the Inverter via an external signal use the operation command FW or RV on the control circuit terminal block This Inverter uses a 3 phase power supply A single phase power supply cannot be used Do not use this Inverter with a phase loss power input Doing so may damage the Inverter By factory default the phase loss input protection is disabled If a phase of power
58. Response section lt Exception Response gt The master requires the response for a query except for broadcast Though the Inverter should re turn a response corresponding with the query it returns an exception response if the query has an error The exception response has the field configuration shown in the following table Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 The detailed field configuration is shown below The function code of the exception response is the value of the query function code to which 80h is added The exception code shows the cause of exception response 4 167 4 4 Communication Function Function code Exception code Code Description 01h An unsupported function has been specified 02h Specified address does not exist 03h Specified data has an unacceptable format 21h Data is out of the Inverter s range for writing into the holding register Sia e Oth 81h 03h 83h 05h 85h 06h 86h OFh 8Fh 10h 90h The Inverter does not allow this function during operation e Has issued the enter command during operation UV e Has written into the register during trip UV e Has written into the read only register coil 22h e Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed MSaving the Change to the Holding Register Enter Command Even if using the command to write into the h
59. SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 37 Appendix 2 Product Life Curve Appendix 2 Product Life Curve Ambient temperature C 24 hour power supply day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Capacitor life year Note 1 Ambient temperature refers to the temperature measured at the location approximately 5 cm from the bottom center of the Inverter atmospheric temperature It refers to the temperature inside if the Inverter is stored in an enclosure Note 2 The smoothing capacitor which will deteriorate because of the chemical reaction caused by the temperatures of the parts should normally be replaced once every 10 years which is the expected design life and not guaranteed However if the ambient temperature is high or the Inverter is used with a current exceeding the rated current for example under overload conditions its life will be significantly shortened App 38 xipueddy Appendix App 39 Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output When the product life becomes close to the end for the parts including the on board smoothing capacitor or cooling fan but excluding the main circuit smoothing capacitor an alarm can be output through the self diagnostic function Use it as a reference of the parts replacement period For details refer to Life Assessment Monitor d022 page 4 5 Multi function Pulse Counter PCNT PCC page 4 92 or Multi fu
60. an overvoltage trip may occur depending on the deceleration rate and load condition Note 3 When using this function the Inverter may reduce frequency depending on the moment of inertia of motor load and takes a long time to stop 4 76 Functions 4 2 Function Mode 1 If the b131 set value is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent the motor may not be stopped 2 When b130 01 PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant e Though quicker response is expected with a larger proportional gain b133 control tends to be divergent and may easily lead to a trip Response also becomes quicker with a shorter integral time b134 but if too short the same situation may occur lt Group C Multi function Terminal Function gt The RX has eight input terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 five open collector output ter minals 11 12 13 14 and 15 one relay output terminal AL2 and AL1 SPDT contact two analog output terminals AM and AMI as well as one digital output terminal FM Multi function Input Selection eYou can use the following functions by allocating them to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 To allocate the functions set the following data in C001 to C008 For example C001 corresponds to input terminal 1 e The same two functions cannot be allocated to the multi function input terminals If you attempt to allocate the same two functions to the terminals by
61. e There are no errors in the cooling system e There are no abnormal vibrations or sounds There are no abnormal overheat or discoloration e There are no abnormal odors e Check the input voltage of the Inverter during operation using a tester or other equipment There is no frequent power supply voltage fluctuation e The voltage level between the wires is balanced Cleaning Always keep the Inverter clean for operation Lightly remove any dirt with a soft cloth moistened with a neutral detergent Note Do not use such solutions as acetone benzene toluene or alcohol for cleaning Doing so may cause the Inverter surface to dissolve or its coating to come off Do not use any detergent or alcohol to clean the Digital Operator display Periodic Inspection eCheck the parts that cannot be checked without stopping operation as well as those that require periodic inspection Contact OMRON Corporation for periodic inspections eCheck that there are no errors in the cooling system Tatas Clean the air filter eCheck that all parts that need tightening are secure Cad Screws and bolts may become loose because of vibration or temperature change eCheck that there is no corrosion or damage to the conductors and or insulators eMeasurement of insulation resistance eCheck and replace the cooling fan smoothing capacitor and relay 6 2 Ss ueUa UIeI pue uons dsu j Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance
62. e When 1st 2nd control is enabled and the motor parameter selection is set to 00 gt Directly enter H020 to H024 e When 1st 2nd control is enabled and the motor parameter selection is set to 01 or 02 gt Directly enter H030 to H034 e If offline auto tuning has not been performed the motor parameters in the same capacity rank as the Inverter standard motor parameters are set in HO30 H230 to H034 H234 Sensorless Vector Control e This function estimates and controls motor rpm and output torque based on the Inverter s output voltage and current as well as the motor parameter settings This control method provides high starting torque in a low frequency range 0 3 Hz enabling high precision operation e To use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 A244 to 03 eTo use this function make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor Refer to Motor Parameter Selection page 4 113 eNote the following before use Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the motor size specified eif sensorless vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust the motor parameters depending on the phenomena as shown in the table below Ope taton Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item status Speed change ratio is a Increase motor parameter R2 gradually up to set H021 H221 H031 Power n
63. is 1 Hz To set 50 Hz set the change data to 50 0032h Query No Field name ee HEX 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 06 3 Register start number MSB 72 12 4 Register start number LSB 2 02 5 Change data MSB 00 6 Change data LSB 32 7 CRC 16 MSB AD 8 CRC 16 LSB 23 Response No Field name Pee HEX 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 06 3 Register start number MSB 12 4 Register start number LSB 02 5 Change data MSB 00 6 Change data LSB 32 7 CRC 16 MSB AD 8 CRC 16 LSB 23 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 If writing into the holding register cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section lt Loop back Test 08h gt Used to check the communications between master and slave A random value can be used for test Response No Field name ROE 1 Slave address 01 2 Function code 08 3 Diagnostic sub code MSB 00 4 Diagnostic sub code LSB 00 5 Data MSB Random 6 Data LSB Random 7 CRC 16 MSB CRC 8 CRC 16 LSB CRC data Example Loop back test to the Inverter with slave address 1 Query No Field name EN 1 Slave address 01 2 Function code 08 3 Diagnostic sub code MSB 00 4 Diagnostic sub code LSB 00 5 Data MSB Random 6 Data LSB Random 7 CRC 16 MSB CRC 8 CRC 16 LSB
64. on the logic board ON Correct the external device error If an overload is detected in the lowest speed range of 0 2 Hz max Overload cng Woo an electronic thermal trip inside the trip in low Is the load too large Reduce the loading Inverter works to shut off the Inverter sar speed eso factor range output 2nd electronic thermal However a higher frequency could remain in the error history 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal suoljei0do adueUDd UIeEW Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Displey em Reference Name Description Digital Check point and remedy page Operator ModBus Appears when ine imeout Occurs Is the communication speed correct _ because of disconnection during n communic e lt u i Is the wiring distance appropriate 4 141 ations error ModE US RTU communication ae Connection check Trip by the C076 setting E600 j Option 1 Detects an error on the board Has the option board been securely error mounted on option port 1 to mounted _ P P Check that the mounting is correct E650 EGG as th tion board b Option 2 Detects an error on the bo
65. operator selection 02 XOR C145 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C146 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 z Logic output signal 2 O0FAND 7 ANE eas eerie PG OF 99 a 02 XOR No 4 100 E C148 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 K z C149 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 2 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 O F 00 AND C150 Logic output signal 3 01 OR 00 operator selection 02 XOR C151 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 45 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default ines Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting Operation C152 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C153 Logic output signal 4 H S 00 operator selection 02 XOR g C154 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 5 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 5 C155 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 S selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 8 Logic output signal 5 00 AND a E i 190 A
66. speed control Sensor vector control can be selected for 1st control only To use this function make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor Refer to Inverter model RX user s manual Chapter 4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Motor Parameter Se lection Also be sure to set the number of your encoder pulses With V2 control mode selection P012 you can select four types of control modes Speed control Pulse train position control Absolute position control and High resolution absolute position control Note the following before use e Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the maximum applicable motor size e If the Inverter does not normally accelerate or if overload protection is activated check the phase order of the encoder signal If phase A is advanced by 90 from phase B during forward run it is judged as being normal When running the Inverter with V f characteristics selection A044 set to 00 VC you can check the rotation direction with real frequency monitor d008 If positive frequency is detected when the forward command is activated or if negative frequency is detected when the reverse command is activated the rotation direction is judged as being normal If sensor vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust the motor parameters de pending on the phenomena as shown in the table below
67. the motor may burn out a Torque limit set value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example If the Inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit set value for a 200 calculated with the above formula is as follows Torque limit set value b041 to b044 a x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 4 114 suoiun4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode 0 Hz Sensorless Vector Control e This function enables high torque operation in the 0 Hz range 0 to 3 Hz frequency reference This control method is particularly suitable for applications such as an elevating system which requires sufficient torque in a low frequency range at startup e g crane hoist eTo use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 A244 to 04 e To use this function make sure that the motor parameter settings are suitable for your motor Refer to Motor Parameter Selection page 4 113 e The parameters for 0 Hz SLV control are as follows eIn 0 Hz limit HO60 H260 you can set a current value used for constant current control in the 0 Hz range generally 3 0 Hz or lower This parameter is expressed as a ratio of the output current to the Inverter s rated current eIn 0 Hz SLV startup boost amount H061 H261 you can set a current boost amount at startup in the 0 Hz range A current value expressed as a ratio to the Inverter s rated current is added to the current value set
68. 0 4 to 55 kW 3 143Ch Reverse regeneration C056 RW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 Overtorque level 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 6 20h Reverse power running eis RAY 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 Overtorque level 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW TASEN Forward regeneration COS PUN 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Vile 143Fh Not used 1440h Not used 1441h Thermal warning level C061 R W 0 to 100 1 4 196 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regjia Function name Buncuon R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 Disabled 1442h Alarm code selection C062 R W 1 3 bits 2 4 bits 0 01 1443h 0 Hz detection level C063 R W 0 to 10000 Hz 1444h Fin overheat warning level C064 R W 0 to 200 1 C 1445h to Not used 144Ah 2 Loop back test Communication speed 3 2400 bps 144Bh selection C071 R W 4 4800 bps Baud rate selection 5 9600 bps 6 19200 bps 144Ch Communication station C072 R W 1 to 32 o No selection 144Dh Communication bit length C073 R W iG 7 bits selection 8 8 bits Pe i 0 No parity 144Eh TaN parity C074 RW 1 Even a 2 Odd 144Fh Communication stop bit C075 R W 1 1 bit selection 2 2 bits 0 Trip Comm nicaton error 1 Trip after deceleration stop 1450h C076 R W 2 Ignore selection 3 Free run stop 4 Deceleration stop asik Communication error C077
69. 00 to 65 53 Depends 2nd motor othe H231 parameter R2 motor auto tuning data capacity Depends H032 Motor parameter L on the auto tuning data motor g 0 01 to 99 99 a pet hehe ats io 100 0 to 655 3 4 113 Depends g 2nd motor onthe 5 H232 parameter L motor O auto tuning data capacity Depends Motor parameter lo on the H1033 auto tuning data motor 0 01 to 99 99 PEN tees A 100 0 to 655 3 Depends 2nd motor onthe H233 parameter lo motor auto tuning data capacity Depends Motor parameter J on the H034 i auto tuning data 0 001 to 9 999 motor 10 00 to 99 99 P cite ae 100 0 to 999 9 Depend g 2nd motor 1000 to 9999 onthe H234 parameter J i motor auto tuning data capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 32 gt x D 5 2 x Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default SHES Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation H050 PI proportional gain 100 0 0 0 to 999 9 Yes _ H250 2nd PI proportional 1000 100 0 gain H051 PI integral gain 0 0 to 999 9 100 0 4 87 Yes H251 2nd PI integral gain 1000 100 0 4 90 H052 P proportional gain 1 00 i 0 01 to 10 00 Yes H252 2nd P proportio
70. 1 To use this monitor set the number of encoder pulses P011 and the motor pole number selection H004 or H204 correctly Note 2 The monitored value does not depend on V f characteristics selection A044 Torque Reference Monitor d009 When torque control is selected for sensor vector control this monitor displays the currently entered torque reference value The data LED indicator lights up while the d009 setting is displayed Display 0 to 200 Displays in increments of 1 Torque Bias Monitor d010 When sensor vector control is selected this monitor displays the torque bias amount currently set in display code d010 The data LED indicator lights up while the d010 setting is displayed Display 150 to 150 Displays in increments of 1 Output Torque Monitor d012 Displays an estimated value of the Inverter s output torque The data LED indicator lights up while the d012 setting is displayed Display 300 to 300 Displays in increments of 1 Note This monitor is enabled only when sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control mode Output Voltage Monitor d013 Displays the output voltage of the Inverter The data LED indicator V lights up while the d013 setting is displayed Display 0 0 to 600 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 V 4 3 4 1 Monitor Mode Input Power Monitor d014 Displays the input p
71. 100 to 0 0 to 10 V 0 to 100 Example 3 Forward max frequency e For example to input voltage ranging from 5 to 5 V on the O2 L terminal set A113 to 50 and A114 to 50 O O2 Ol Sampling 10 V 100 A113 A112 A111 Reverse A114 100 Analog input 10 V 02 max frequency You can set the built in filter applied to frequency setting signals of the external voltage current input Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A016 O O2 Ol sampling 1 to 30 31 31 Time Related functions A011 to A016 C001 to C008 Helps remove noise in the frequency setting circuit Set a larger data value if stable operation cannot be secured because of noise Note that the larger the data value is the slower the response time This parameter specifies a filter time constant for a set value of 1 to 30 x 2 ms When 31 is selected a filter time constant of 500 ms and a hysteresis of 0 1 Hz are set Factory default 4 15 4 2 Function Mode Multi step Speed Operation Function eYou can set RUN speeds using codes and switch between the set speeds via the terminal For multi step speed operation you can select either 4 terminal binary operation with 16 steps max or 7 terminal bit operation with 8 steps max Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Binary 16 s
72. 1073741823 to 1073741823 4 5 monitor Displays MSB 4 digits including 4 132 Fault frequency 0 to 9999 i d080 monitor 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 poe O a as d081 Fault monitor 1 Latest 4 6 d082 Fault monitor 2 Error code condition of occurrence 4 6 d083 Fault monitor 3 Output frequency Hz Output current A 4 6 gt Internal DC voltage V d084 Fault monitor 4 RUN time h 4 6 d085 Fault monitor 5 gt ON time h 4 6 d086 Fault monitor 6 4 6 d090 Warning monitor Warning code 4 6 d102 DC voltage monitor 0 0 to 999 9 V 4 6 Regenerative d103 braking load rate 0 0 to 100 0 4 6 monitor digg Flectonic thermal 00 to 100 0 47 monitor 3 19 3 7 Parameter List Basic Function Mode F Parameter Default Os Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting Operation 0 0 Starting frequency to 1st 2nd 3rd max F001 EEEN frequency Yes Hz 48 9 0 0 to 100 0 PID control enabled 0 01 to 99 99 F002 Acceleration time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 1000 to 3600 2nd acceleration 0 01 10 93 99 F202 time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 O 1000 to 3600 p l 0 01 to 99 99 PR F302 isk ERES 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 c 1000 to 3600 S 0 01 to 99 99 F003 Deceleration time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 1000 to 3600 2nd deceleration 0 01716
73. 110 gt o 10 of 11 0 2110 REMO0K6035 IE 35 40 REM02K1017 IE 17 75 as g 15 0 2150 REM00K9017 IE 17 55 REM03K5010 IE 10 95 A 7 5 o 18 5 2185 75 95 REM03K5010 IE 10 REM19K0008 IE 8 22 0 2220 5 65 80 30 0 2300 6 80 2035090 TE 4 REM19K0006 IE 37 0 2370 6 60 45 0 2450 3 105 2070130 TE 2 8 2 x REM19K0006 IE 55 0 2550 3 85 0 55 4004 200 200 REMO00K1400 IE 400 REMO00K1400 IE 400 5 1 1 4007 200 200 oO 100 O 1 5 4015 REM00K1200 IE 200 190 REM00K2200 IE 200 190 h 2 2 4022 REMO00K2200 IE 200 130 REMO00K5120 IE 120 200 O fe 4 0 4040 REM00K2120 IE 120 120 REM00K6100 IE 100 140 70 re 5 5 4055 Built in 140 REMO00K9070 IE 70 150 5 REM00K4075 IE 75 7 5 4075 100 REM01K9070 IE 70 110 35 11 0 4110 REMO0K6100 IE 100 50 REM02K1070 IE 70 75 A 15 0 4150 REM00K9070 IE 70 55 REM03K5035 IE 35 110 gt S 24 amp 18 5 4185 90 100 t 2 REM03K5035 IE 35 REM19K0030 IE 30 cc 22 0 4220 20 75 85 30 0 4300 4015045 TE 16 REM19K0020 IE 20 95 37 0 4370 125 4017068 TE 11 REM38K0012 IE 15 _ 45 0 4450 100 55 0 4550 2 x REM19K0020 IE 10 100 4035090 TE 8 5 75 0 4750 3 x REM19K0030 IE 10 75 90 0 4900 4070130 TE 5 5 2 x REM38K0012 lE 6 105 110 0 411K 125 4090240 TE 3 2 3 x REM38K0012 IE 4 132 0 413K 105 1 Inverter specifications choose voltage capacity and model The content noted in the table assumes the case of combining one Inverter and one motor of the same capacity 2 Select the ED
74. 190 0 to 400 0 A296 frequency Related functions F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 C001 to C008 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 37 4 2 Function Mode e Select an acceleration deceleration time switching method from the following three Switching via a multi function input Automatic switching at a specified frequency Automatic switching only when switching between forward reverse If the 3rd control function is selected however switching by the 2 step acceleration deceleration frequency is disabled e To switch via a multi function input allocate 09 2CH to any of C001 to C008 Example 1 When A094 A294 is set to 00 Output frequency Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration Deceleration time 1 time 2 time 2 time 1 lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Fo02 F202 A092 A093 A293 F003 F203 F302 A292 A393 F303 A392 Example 3 When A094 A294 is set to 02 FW r a a Output i frequency H Acceleration time 1 F002 F202 F302 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern i Acceleration Deceleration 1 A392 1 F303 A093 A293 A393 time 2 i time 1 lt i 1 A092 A292 F003 F203 Example 2 When A094 A294 is set to 01 of TL Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 A096 A296 Acceleration 1 X Deceleration 1 1 c Output
75. 2 Wiring E Connection for Separating Inverter Control Circuit Power Supply from Main Power Supply If the Inverter protection circuit is activated to turn off the magnetic contactor of the Inverter input power supply the power to the Inverter control circuit is also turned off and the alarm signal cannot be kept on If the alarm signal must be kept on use control circuit power supply terminals Ro and To Connect control circuit power supply terminals Ro and To to the primary circuit of the magnetic Ea contactor according to the following procedure Connection method Incoming electricity specifications 200 V class 200 to 240 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 282 to 339 V DC 400 V class 380 to 480 V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 537 to 678 V DC 1 Disconnect the connected wire 2 Disconnect the J51 connector ubisag 3 Connect the control circuit power cable to the control circuit power supply terminal block To separate the control circuit power supply Ro To from the main circuit power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 observe the following instructions For wiring between terminals Ro and To terminal screw size M4 use a cable of 1 25 mm or more Connect a 3 A fuse to the control circuit power supply cable If the control circuit power supply Ro To is turned on before the main circuit power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 ground fault detection at power on is disabled To use a DC power supply for the c
76. 2 times p_a omron RX INVERTER POWER O ALARM J 9 is entered 2 e 9 of the 1st digit blinks 6 The extended function code setting is complete omron RX INVERTER POWER O ALARM Ke 7 Y The code display A029 selection is complete Note A of the 4th digit on the left starts to blink again when entering codes which have not been selected for display or codes not on the list Refer to Display Selection page 4 53 Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON page 4 56 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function page 4 57 and Appendix Parameter List to check the code and enter again 7 Press the Mode key to display the data Use the Increment Decrement keys to change the data and press the Enter key to set it The data can be set in the same procedure as 1 to 6 34 4 This operation is available even if code d001 is not displayed 2 f pressing the Mode key while each digit is blinking the display returns the status for the 1 digit higher entry 3 If pressing the Mode key while the 4th digit on the left is blinking the values under entry are canceled and the display returns to the status before pressing the Increment and Decrement keys simultaneously in 1 4 To change the data b
77. 2048 to 2048 Secondary resistance er 1619h compensation enable P025 RAN 0 Disabled n i 1 Enabled disable selection 161Ah GAS error detection po26 RIW 0 to 1500 0 1 1461Bh SPeed deviation error P027 RW 0to 12000 0 01 Hz detection level 161Ch Motor gear ratio numerator P028 R W 1 to 9999 1 161Dh Motor gear ratio P029 R W 1 to 9999 1 denominator 161Eh Not used 0 Digital Operator 161Fh PERA ER P031 R W 1 Option 1 put typ 2 Option 2 4 202 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function peger Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code a 0 Digital Operator 1620h ee stop position P032 R W 1 Option 1 z put typ 2 Option 2 0 Terminal O 1621h Torque reference input P033 R W ii Terminal Ol e selection 2 Terminal O2 3 Digital Operator r 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 1622h Torque reference setting P034 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 Polarity selection at torque 0 As per sign 10an reference via O2 P035 RAY 1 Depends on the RUN direction _ 0 Disabled 1624h Torque bias mode P036 R W 1 Digital Operator 2 Input via terminal O2 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW o 1625h Torque bias value P037 R W 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 1 Torque bias polarity 0 As per sign 1929h selection POSS RUN 1 Depends on the RUN direction _ 1627h P099 R W Speed limit value in t
78. 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 TRQ signal during torque limit RNT RUN time exceeded ONT ON time exceeded THM thermal warning BRK brake release BER brake error ZS 0 Hz signal DSE excessive speed deviation POK position ready FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 FA5 set frequency only 2 OL2 overload warning 2 ODc analog O disconnection detection OlDc analog OI disconnection detection O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection FBV PID FB status output NDc network error LOG1 logic operation output 1 LOG2 LOG3 logic operation output 2 logic operation output 3 LOG4 logic operation output 4 LOG5 logic operation output 5 LOG6 logic operation output 6 WAC capacitor life warning signal WAF fan life warning signal a oe FR RUN command signal OHF fin overheat warning LOC light load detection signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used IRDY operation ready signal FWR forward run signal RVR reverse run signal MJA fatal fault signal WCO window comparator O WCOI window comparator Ol WCO2 window comparator O2 When alarm code output is selected in C062 ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 ACn alarm code output are forced to be allocated to multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 4 194 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function
79. 3rd control function 4 80 18 RS Reset Reset 4 85 20 STA 3 wire start 21 STP 3 wire stop 3 wire input function 4 86 22 F R _ 3 wire forward reverse 23 PID PID enabled disabled PID function 4 31 24 PIDC PID integral reset 26 CAS Control gain switching Control gain switching 4 87 27 UP UP DWN function accelerated 28 DWN UP DWN function decelerated UP DOWN function 4 88 29 UDC UP DWN function data clear 31 OPE Forced operator Forced operator function 4 89 32 SF1 Multi step speed setting bit 1 33 SF2 Multi step speed setting bit 2 34 SF3 Multi step speed setting bit 3 35 SF4 Multi step speed setting bit 4 Multi step speed operation function 4 16 oo 36 SF5 Multi step speed setting bit 5 37 SF6 Multi step speed setting bit 6 38 SF7 Multi step speed setting bit 7 39 OLR Overload limit switching Overload limit 4 49 40 TL Torque limit enabled 41 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 Torque limit function 4 57 42 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 43 PPI P PI switching P PI switching function 4 90 44 BOK Brake confirmation Brake control function 4 74 45 ORT Orientation Orientation function 4 129 46 LAC LAD cancel LAD cancel function 4 9 47 PCLR Position deviation clear 4g STAT Pulse train position command input V2 control mode selection 4 120 permission 50 ADD Frequency addition Set frequency addition function 4 41 51 F TM Forced terminal block Forced terminal function 4 91 52 A
80. 4 116 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Preliminary Excitation Function FOC Output frequency e This function supplies excitation current from an input terminal to establish magnetic flux preliminarily when 03 Sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A004 A244 Allocate 55 FOC to the desired multi function input e The Inverter does not accept the RUN command unless the FOC terminal is turned on when FOC is allocated lf the FOC terminal is turned off during operation the Inverter goes into free run status If the FOC terminal is turned on again the Inverter restarts according to the setting of free run stop selection b088 FOC FW RV Does not operate because the FOC terminal is OFF Free running Restarts according to b088 Excitation current flows Related functions A044 A244 C001 to C008 High torque Multi operation When sensorless vector control or O Hz sensorless vector control is selected with a single Inverter this function controls two motors of the same type to drive a single load e To use this function you set the same parameters as when you select Sensorless Vector Control page 4 114 or O Hz Sensorless Vector Control page 4 115 However set the motor parameters as follows Set motor Set motor Set motor parameters R1
81. 4 144 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Data hexadecimal and description of multi function terminals For details refer to Multi function Input Selection page 4 77 Data hex Description Data hex Description 0000000000000001 FW _ Forward 0000000100000000 SF1 Multi step speed setting bit 1 0000000000000002 RV Reverse 0000000200000000 SF2 Multi step speed setting bit 2 0000000000000004 CF1 Multi step speed setting binary 1 0000000400000000 SF3 Multi step speed setting bit 3 0000000000000008 CF2_ Multi step speed setting binary 2 0000000800000000 SF4 Multi step speed setting bit 4 0000000000000010 CF3 Multi step speed setting binary 3 0000001000000000 SF5 Multi step speed setting bit 5 0000000000000020 CF4 Multi step speed setting binary 4 0000002000000000 SF6 _ Multi step speed setting bit 6 0000000000000040 JG Jogging 0000004000000000 SF7 Multi step speed setting bit 7 0000000000000080 DB External DC injection braking 0000008000000000 OLR Overload limit switching 0000000000000100 SET 2nd control 0000010000000000 TL Torque limit enabled disabled 0000000000000200 2CH_ 2 step acceleration deceleration 0000020000000000 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 0000000000000400 7 0000040000000000 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 0000000000000800 FRS Free run stop 0000080000000000 PPI _ P PI switching 0000000000001000 EXT External trip 00001000000000
82. 4 Communication Function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output o terminal selection 32 NDc network communication disconnection detection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection C077 Communication error 0 00 to 99 99 ee 0 00 P timeout Set a time before reception timeout External controller Inverter Monitor timer Communication trip time C077 Communication disconnection detection signal NDc Cooling Fan Speed Drop Signal e This signal is output when detecting that the Inverter s built in cooling fan rotation speed is reduced to 75 or less lf 01 is selected in cooling fan control b092 this signal is not output even while the fan is stopped While this signal is output check the cooling fan for clogging Life assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output terminal _ selection 40 WAF Relay output AL2 AL cooling fan life warning signal function selection C021 to C025 05 C026 Related functions b092 d022 4 102 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Starting Contact Signal While the Inverter is receiving the RUN command a starting contact signal is output e The output is enabled regardless of the setting of RUN command source selection A002 lf inputs FW an
83. 43 monitor dora Torque bias 200 to 200 4 3 monitor do12 OVtput torque 200 to 200 4 3 monitor do13 OVtput voltage 0 to 600 T V 4 3 monitor d014 Input power monitor 0 0 to 999 9 kW 4 4 0 0 to 999 9 d015 Integrated power 1000 to 9999 4 4 monitor 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 3 18 e uonesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default SHEA Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation 0 to 9999 d016 Total RUN time 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 h 4 4 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 0 to 9999 do17 Power ON time 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 ES h 44 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 dota Fintemperature 990 to 200 0 2 oC 44 monitor do1g Motor temperature 459 to 200 0 oC 4 5 monitor Life assessment Co 0 A on 1 Capacitor on the main circuit board 022 monitor GD CD CB ED oF 2 Cooling tan rotation speed reduced 4 5 2 i d023 Not used d024 Not used d025 Not used d026 Not used d027 Not used gag Pee counter 0 to 2147483647 Displays MSB 4 digits 4 5 monitor do29 Position command 1073741823 to 1073741823 4 5 monitor Displays MSB 4 digits including d030 Current position
84. 70 mm x Depth 10 mm 7 27 7 3 Options 3G3AX OP05 78 omron e e e e POWER RUN WARNING ALARM LOCAL e pevore READ WRITE OPE ESC A a y PREV PAGE NEXT PAGE e FWD REV STOP RUN RUN RESET EY ENABLED 122 7 28 suole oads Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List cccssseeeeeees App 1 Appendix 2 Product Life Curve 0000 App 38 Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output 008 App 39 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Appendix 1 Parameter List Monitor Mode d e The default setting displays d001 at power on To select the optional display change the setting in b038 Changes Pees Function name Monitor or data range Deew during Unit Page No setting operation d001 Fa an 0 0 to 400 0 Yes Hz 44 Output current 0 0 to 999 9 002 monitor 1000 to 9999 _ _ A A F Forward d003 Rotation direction o Stop 4 1 monitor r Reverse 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 d004 PID feedback value 1000 to 9999 4 1 monitor 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 Enabled when the PID function is selected Multi function input Example Terminals FW 7 2 1 ON doos monitor B G i j B Terminals 8 6 5 4 3 OFF 4 2
85. 93 93 F203 time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 1000 to 3600 3rd deceleration 001 toes F303 time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 l 1000 to 3600 Operator rotation 00 Forward oe direction selection 01 Reverse 0 No E a9 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 20 Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Extended Function Mode Parameter Default Orenga Function name Monitor or data range 3 during Unit Page No setting operation 00 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 Frequency reference 03 ModBus communication 4 10 A001 selection 04 Option 1 oS No 4 138 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency 07 Not used 10 Operation function result 01 Terminal D 02 Digital Operator F001 Noo EAA command 03 ModBus communication 02 No 41 Q selection K 04 Option 1 E 05 Option 2 4 11 A003 Base frequency 30 to Maximum frequency A004 50 44 10 A203 2nd base frequency 30 to 2nd maximum frequency A204 50 Ne Be 4 11 A303 3rd base frequency 30 to 3rd maximum frequency A304 50 A004 Maximum frequency 30 to 400 50 2nd maximum A204 frequency 30 to 400 50 No Hz 4 12 Agoa maximum 30 to 400 50 frequency 2nd 3rd control is displayed whe
86. AOSS RAN 5 to 100 75 to 132 kW 0 1 kHz 124Eh Not used 124Fh ANG R W aed HIGH 0 Frequency lower limit to Frequency upper limit 0 01 Hz A061 ar Max frequency 1250h LOW 1251h A082 R W Pai HIGH 0 Starting frequency to Frequency lower limit ee 0 01 Hz A062 BiN Frequency upper limit 1252h LOW A063 1253h HIGH R W Jump frequency 1 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 1254h A069 R W LOW 1255h Jump frequency width 1 A064 R W O to 1000 0 01 Hz A065 1256h HIGH R W Jump frequency 2 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 1257h A069 R W LOW 1258h Jump frequency width 2 A066 R W O to 1000 0 01 Hz A067 1259h HIGH R W Jump frequency 3 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 125Ah A0GT R W LOW 125Bh_ Jump frequency width 3 A068 R W O to 1000 0 01 Hz 125Ch eT R W Acceleration stop 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz frequency A069 arr 125Dh LOW 125Eh Acceleration stop time A070 R W 0 to 600 0 1 s 0 Disabled 125Fh PID selection A071 R W 1 Enabled 2 Reverse output enabled 1260h PID P gain A072 R W 2 to 50 0 1 1261h PID I gain A073 R W 0 to 36000 0 1 s 1262h PIDD gain A074 R W 0 to 10000 0 01 s 1263h PID scale A075 R W 1 to 9999 0 01 0 Input Ol 1 Input O 1264h PID feedback selection A076 R W 2 RS485 communication 3 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output 1265h Reverse PID function A077 pw Disabled 1 Enabled 4 182 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function
87. All When the input current is not supply Current R S T s i b Moving iron ammeter effective balanced current IR Is It 2 lin values lin IRt Is IT 3 naan Between R S S T and Electrodynamic AII ower T R Tand effective Three wattmeter method 1 12 B values p Wn Wiz W Win Calculated from the measured values of power supply voltage Input Ein power supply current lin and input electric power Win power factor Pfin z WIN o PfIN J3 EIn lin x 100 Effective ie Between U V V W W U owe sig below Value of Eout Eu Ev Ew Rectifier voltmeter sea Output Current U V W ee Al current Moving iron ammeter effective Iu Iv Iw lout values Output Between U V V W Electrodynamic fall F Two wattmeter method power effective Wo1 Woz wattmeter or three wattmeter method Wout values Output Calculated from the measured values of output voltage Eour power output current lout and output power Wout factor Wout g Pfour PfOUT a EOU Oir x 100 6 9 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Note 1 For output voltage use a measurement device that displays effective values of fundamental wave For current and electric power use a Power supply measurement device that displays all effective values Note 2 The Inverter output Diode waveform under PWM 600V 0 1 Amin 200 V class control has a margin of 1000 V 0 1 Amin 400 V class Voc error especially at a Moving coil typ
88. BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge 1 byte ACK 0x06 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 155 lt Negative Response gt Response frame Frame format 4 4 Communication Function STX Station No NAK Error code BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Control code NAK Negative AcKnowledge Tbyte NAK 0x15 Error code Communication error status 2 bytes i Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Error Code List Error code Description 01H Parity error 02H Checksum error 03H Framing error 04H Overrun error 05H Protocol error 06H ASCII code error 07H Receiving buffer overrun error 08H Receiving timeout error 11H Command invalid error 12H 13H Execution disabled error 14H 15H 16H Parameter invalid error 17H During communication with all stations the Inverter sends no response 4 156 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function MIBCC Blo
89. CRC Broadcasting cannot be performed 4 165 The diagnostic sub code corresponds only with the query data echo 00h 00h not any other commands 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into Multiple Coils OFh gt Rewrites consecutive multiple coils Example Change the status of multi function input terminals 1 to 6 on the Inverter with slave address 5 Set the multi function input terminals as shown in the following table etree eS EE eee Coil No 7 8 9 10 11 12 Terminal status ON ON ON OFF ON OFF Query Response No Field name TEER No Field name sree 1 Slave address 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code OF 2 Function code OF 3 Coil start number MSB 2 00 3 Coil start number MSB 00 4 Coil start number LSB 2 06 4 Coil start number LSB 06 5 Number of coils MSB 00 5 Number of coils MSB 00 6 Number of coils LSB 06 6 Number of coils LSB 06 7 Number of bytes 02 7 CRC 16 MSB 34 8 Change data MSB 17 8 CRC 16 LSB 4C 9 Change data LSB 00 10 CRC 16 MSB DB 11 CRC 16 LSB 3E 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 3 Since the change data comprises of both MSB and LSB as a set make the byte to be an even number by adding 1 even if the byte that actually needs to be changed is an odd number If writing into multiple coils
90. Frequency Matching restart z C105 FM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes 4 108 C106 AM gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes n C107 AMI gain setting 50 to 200 100 Yes ane 19 S C109 AM bias setting 0 to 100 0 Yes o C110 AMI bias setting 0 to 100 20 Yes T amp Overload warning 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated E S level 2 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current Ng A 449 He i 0 to 9999 Factory n C121 O zero adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 defautt YS 0 to 9999 Factory g 0122 Ol zero adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 defaut YS T lt 0 to 9999 Factory C123 02 zero adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 defautt YS 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 27 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ines No Function name Monitor or data range Stn during Unit Page g operation C130 Output 11 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C131 Output 11 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C132 Output 12 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C133 Output 12 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 5 C134 Output 13 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S 5 C135 Output 13 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S C136 Output 14 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No s 4 106 D C137 Output 14
91. H072 For P proportional gain 0 00 to 10 00 1 00 switching H073 Gain switching time 0 to 9999 mS 100 ms Taper time during gain switching lf control gain switching is selected in the multi function input selection turning off the signal selects the gain setting of H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 or H252 Turning on the signal selects the gain setting of H070 H071 or H072 lf control gain switching is not selected in multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 the gain setting conforms to the status in which the signal is turned off 4 87 4 2 Function Mode UP DOWN Function e This function allows you to change the Inverter output frequency using the UP and DWN terminals of the multi function inputs Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Increases the current speed during the signal 27 UP UP DWN function input period accelerated OFF Keeps the current speed f ON Decreases the current speed during the signal 28 DWN UP DWN function input period decelerated OFF Keeps the current speed UP DWN function ON Clears the stored UP DWN speed 29 UDC data clear OFF Keeps the stored UP DWN speed Available input terminals C001 to C008 Note Do not turn on off the UP DWN terminal after shutting off the power Otherwise the Inverter may not store data correctly Allocate 27 UP and 28 DWN to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 e
92. Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON page 4 56 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function page 4 57 Item Function code Data Description 00 Complete display 01 Individual display of functions Display selection b037 02 User setting 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display factory default 00 Screen when the Enter key was pressed last 01 d001 Output frequency monitor factory default Initial screen 02 d002 Output current monitor selection b038 Power On 03 d003 Rotation direction monitor 04 d007 Frequency conversion monitor 05 F001 Output frequency setting monitor User parameter 00 Disabled factory default automatic setting b039 function selection 01 Enabled Not displayed by factory default To return the display to 74 i or 0 05 from any display on the Digital Operator refer to the following procedures ane e Hold down the Mode key for 3 seconds or more to display 330 i and 0 00 alternately Press the Mode key to display 355 i or 6 00 4440 shows the status during stop Displays the output frequency of the Inverter during operation 3 9 3 4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator E Operation Example for Basic Di splay factory default b037 04 e Displays the limited basic parameters Monitor mod
93. Inverter i A 1 10 cm min 5 cm min k 5 cm min o 10 ommin i Note that replacing the smoothing capacitor i requires 22 cm or more i l l 2 i Poe ie a i When several RX models are installed in an enclosure and a ventilation fan is mounted in the enclosure be careful about the layout of the Inverters and the air intake apertures Depending on the internal layout of the panel the Inverter s cooling effect may deteriorate resulting in an increase in ambient temperature Also use thorough caution in making sure that the Inverter s ambient temperature is within the allowable operating temperature range A p Ventilation fan A Ventilation fan Inverter Inverter BZ Correct example Incorrect example e Before installing the Inverter place a cover over all the ventilation openings to shield them from foreign objects After completing the installation process be sure to remove the covers from the Inverter before operation e Below is the heat radiation according to the Inverter capacity Inverter capacity kw 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 Load with 70 loss W 64 76 102 127 179 242 312 435 575 698 Load with 100 loss W 70 88 125 160 235 325 425 600 800 975 Efficiency at rated output 85 1 89 5 92 3 93 2 94 0 94 4 94 6 94 8 94 9 95 0 Inverter capacity kw 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 Load with 70 loss W 820 1100 1345 1625 1975 2675
94. KQ 4 to 20 mA Input impedance 100 Q External port Setting through RS485 communication Standard Digital Operator Input RUN STOP Forward reverse switched via the parameter settings External signal Forward Stop Reverse Stop available at the time of multi functional input terminal allocation 3 wire input available at the time of control circuit terminal block allocation External port Forward or reverse operation Stop Frequency settings Setting through RS485 communication 7 3 7 1 Standard Specification List Item Specifications Input Multi function input 8 terminals NO NC switchable sink source logic switchable Terminal function 8 functions can be selected from among 61 Reverse RV Multi step speed setting binary 1 CF 1 Multi step speed setting binary 2 CF2 Multi step speed setting binary 3 CF3 Multi step speed setting binary 4 CF4 Jogging JG DC injection braking DB 2nd control SET 2 step acceleration deceleration 2CH Free run stop FRS External trip EXT USP function USP Commercial switching CS Soft lock SFT Analog input switching AT 3rd control SET3 Reset RS 3 wire start STA 3 wire stop STP 3 wire forward reverse F R PID enabled disabled PID PID integral reset PIDC Control gain switching CAS UP DWN function accelerated UP UP DWN function decelerated DWN UP DWN function data clear UDC Force
95. Lae ae 1 2 3 4 5 6 Coils 13 and 14 are OFF Coil No 7 8 9 10 11 12 Terminal status ON ON ON OFF ON OFF Query Response No Field name e No Field name greets 1 Slave address 08 1 Slave address 08 2 Function code 01 2 Function code 01 3 Coil start number MSB 00 3 Number of data bytes 01 4 Coil start number LSB 2 06 4 Coil data 17 5 Number of coils MSB 00 5 CRC 16 MSB 12 6 Number of coils LSB 06 6 CRC 16 LSB 1A 7 CRC 16 MSB 5C 4 Transfers data by the number of data bytes 8 CRC 16 LSB 90 1 Broadcasting cannot be performed 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 3 When specifying the value of 0 or over 32 for the number of reading coils the error code 3h is replied The data received as the response shows the status of coils 7 to 14 The data received here 17h 00010111b should be read with coil 7 as LSB as follows Coil No 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Coil status OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON If the read coil exceeds the defined coil range in the final coil data such coil data is regarded as 0 and sent If the coil status reading command has not been performed normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 162 suoljoun 4 4 Communication Function lt Reading Holding Register Content 03h gt Reads consecutively the specified number of holding register contents from the specified h
96. OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C138 Output 15 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 Cc C139 Output 15 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C140 Relay output ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S c141 RelayoutputOFF 9 6 to 100 0 0 0 delay C142 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C143 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 1 Deane C144 ee 01 OR 00 operator selection 02 XOR C145 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 Z selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C146 Logic output signal 2 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 5 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 z Logic output signal 2 Selita S cIa Raa sta 01OR on 2 02 XOR No 4 100 E C148 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 z C149 Logic output signal 3 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 2 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 O 00 AND C150 Logic output signal 3 01 OR 00 operator selection 02 XOR C151 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 28 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Citne N
97. PID output range PID target value a Nae o PID variable range A078 PID variable range A078 Time s EPID Reverse Output When a PID operation result is a negative value under normal PID control the frequency reference to the Inverter is limited at 0 Hz However if PID selection A071 is set to 02 reverse output enabled reverse output can be provided for the Inverter when the PID operation result is a negative value When A071 02 the above mentioned PID variable range limit function and the PID output stop function are disabled EPID Gain Adjustment lf a stable response cannot be obtained in PID function operation adjust each gain as follows according to the situation Feedback value variation is slow when the target value is changed Raise P gain A072 The feedback value changes fast but isn t stable Lower P gain A072 The target and feedback values wouldn t match smoothly Lower gain A073 eThe feedback value fluctuates unstably Raise gain A073 Response is slow even with P gain raised Raise D gain A074 With P gain raised the feedback value vibrates and isn t stable Lower D gain A074 Excessive Deviation Output You can set PID deviation excessive level C044 during PID control With this function allocated the multi function output terminal is turned on when the PID deviation reaches the set level in C044 C044 can be set from 0 to 100 The setting corre
98. R W Oto 9999 0 01 s timeout 1452h Communication wait time C078 R W O to 1000 1 ms Communication method 0 ASCII 1453h selection nad RW 4 ModBus RTU o 1454h Not used 1455h O adjustment C081 R W 0 to 65530 1 1456h Ol adjustment C082 R W 0 to 65530 1 1457h O2 adjustment C083 R W 0 to 65530 1 1458h Not used 1459h Thermistor adjustment C085 R W 0 to 10000 0 1 145Ah to Not used 145Eh 145Fh Not used 1460h to Not used 1468h 1469h UP DWN selection C101 R W 0 Does not store the frequency data 1 Stores the frequency data 4 197 4 4 Communication Function Regios Function name Funeden R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 Trip reset at power on 1 Trip reset at power off 146Ah Reset selection C102 R W 2 Enabled only during trip Reset at 3 Trip reset only Reset frequency matchin n 146Bh aa y 9 C103 R W 1 Frequency matching start Z 2 Active Frequency Matching restart 146Ch Not used 146Dh FM gain setting C105 R W 50 to 200 1 146Eh AM gain setting C106 R W 50 to 200 1 146Fh AMI gain setting C107 R W 50 to 200 1 1470h Not used 1471h AM bias setting C109 R W 0 to 100 1 1472h AMI bias setting C110 R W 0 to 100 1 A 0 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 1473h Overload w
99. R2 and L to one half of the set value for one motor parameter lo to be twice the set value for one motor parameter J to one half of the total moment of inertia of two motors and loads connected to these motors e Select the motor capacity value closest to the total capacity of two motors When different loads are driven with two motors a fluctuation in one load affects the operating condition of the other which may hinder normal control To prevent this be sure to operate a system in a way that the load driven by two motors is regarded as one load Related functions A044 A244 F001 b040 b041 to b044 H002 H202 HO03 H203 H004 H204 H005 H205 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 4 117 4 2 Function Mode Stabilization Parameter e This function adjusts to reduce motor hunting eIn case of motor hunting check whether motor capacity HO03 H203 and motor pole number selection H004 H204 match your motor If they do not match them If the motor s primary resistance is smaller than that of the standard motor increase the HOO06 H206 H306 set value gradually To run a motor with a capacity larger than the Inverter s rated capacity reduce the set value Other than this function the following methods are suggested to reduce hunting Lower the carrier frequency b083 Refer to page 4 65 Lower the output voltage gain A045 Refer to page 4 24
100. RS terminal from ON to OFF eTo reset via the control circuit terminal block allocate 18 RS to the desired multi function input With reset frequency matching selection C103 you can select how to restart the Inverter after reset a frequency matching or 0 Hz start If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching start increase the retry wait time b003 eYou can select an alarm reset timing in reset selection C102 In addition you can enable the reset signal only for alarm resetting during error For the RS terminal only NO contact is available Note Do not use the reset terminal to shut off the Inverter output Reset operation clears the internal data e g electronic thermal BRD counter causing damage to the Inverter Example 1 Example 2 Alarm l Alarm l Example 3 If 01 frequency matching start is selected in reset frequency matching selection C103 frequency 4 85 matching start is also enabled when the power is turned on again When C103 00 0 Hz start the retry wait time b003 is ignored Even if frequency matching start is selected however the Inverter may start at 0 Hz if e The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency e The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates 4 2 Function Mode Power supply looo ToS o o FW Frequency matching Free running Motor rpm Note The counters used for the Inverter s internal protection are cleared during reset To sh
101. S C138 operator selection a OR 09 02 XOR K z C157 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 e selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 o C158 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C159 Logic output signal 6 oe one 00 operator selection 02 XOR c160 NPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 1 c161 NPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 2 c162 NPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 3 e Input terminal Q C163 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 2 response time 4 g z T c1e4 nPYt terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 No ms 4 106 zZ response time 5 D 2 c165 Pee terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 2 response time 6 c c166 Peet terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 7 c167 NPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 8 c168 FW terminal response 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time v Multi step speed 4 16 2 C169 position 0 to 200 x 10 ms 0 No ms 4 132 5 determination time 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 46 pe uoiesado Operation po 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Citne Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation 00 Disabled H001 Auto tuning selection 01 Not rotate 00 No 4 109 02 Rotate Hoo2 Motor p
102. Sequence Output Method Sink Source Logic Sink logic Source logic Inverter Inverter 2 22 Design 2 2 Wiring Wiring the Digital Operator e The RX Series Inverter can be operated with the optional 3G3AX OP01 OP05 as well as the standard Digital Operator e To use the Digital Operator apart from the Inverter body place an order for the optional cable 3G3AX CAJOP300 EE 3 m e The optional cable should be 3 m or less Using a cable longer than 3 m may cause malfunction Conforming to EC Directives Conforming Standards EMC directive EN 61800 3 2004 Low voltage directive EN 61800 5 1 2003 Concept of Conformity EMC Directive OMRON products are the electrical devices incorporated and used in various machines or manufacturing equipment For this reason we make efforts to conform our products to their related EMC standards so that the machines or equipment which have incorporated our products should easily conform to the EMC standards The RX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN 61800 3 by following the installation and wiring method as shown below Your machines or equipment however vary in type and in addition EMC performance depends on the configuration wiring or location of the devices or control panels which incorporate the EC directive conforming products This in turn does not allow us to confirm the condition and the conformity in which our products are used Therefore we appr
103. This function is enabled only when frequency reference selection A001 is set to 01 or 02 If 01 terminal is selected however this function is enabled for multi step speed operation only When you use an external analog input as frequency reference input or when you set the jogging operation frequency this function is disabled While the UP DWN terminal is turned on the acceleration deceleration time depends on F002 F003 F202 F203 F302 and F303 To switch between the 1st 2nd 3rd controls allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn on off the SET terminal You can store a frequency set value after UP DWN adjustment Choose whether to store the value with C101 Also you can clear the stored frequency set value By allocating 29 UDC to a multi function input and turning on off the UDC terminal you can clear or store the frequency reference setting adjusted at UP DOWN Parameter No Data Description 00 Does not store the frequency reference adjusted at UP DWN einai After restoring the power returns to the value set before UP DWN adjustment 01 Stores the frequency reference adjusted at UP DWN After restoring the power maintains the set value after UP DWN adjustment RUN command FW RV Output C C UP CIl m DWN Acceleration Deceleration does not occur if the UP and DWN terminals turn on simultaneously frequency 4 88 suoi un4 Fun
104. Torque Monitor Function e This function allows you to monitor an estimated motor output torque when sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Wit characteristics 03 Sensorless vector A044 A244 selection 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 05 Sensor vector A244 is blank C027 FM selection pied ANI Selection if acti na signed C028 only o9 5 C029 AMI selection DE y H003 H203 Motor capacity selection 0 20 to 160 0 Factory default kW H004 H204 Motor pole number isaisa 4 Pole selection eTo use the monitor via the Digital Operator select display code d012 e To use the monitor with a signal from the control terminal block refer to Digital FM Terminal page 4 107 or Analog Output AM AMI Terminals page 4 108 e If VC special VP or free V f setting is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 A244 this function is disabled and the display or the output signal from the control terminal block is not defined For a torque monitor value of this function the output torque at the rated frequency equivalent to the motor s output rating during synchronous rotation is indicated as 100 e Since this function estimates output torque based on the motor current the accuracy is approx 20 when a motor with the same output capacity as the Inverter is used
105. Window comparator Ol Window comparator function 4 63 56 WCOz2 Window comparator O2 Related functions C021 to C025 C026 Multi function Output Terminal Contact Selection You can set NO or NC contact output individually for multi function output terminals 11 to 15 as well as the relay output terminal e Multi function output terminals 11 to 15 provide open collector output Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output 00 NO contact Cost Clee terminal contact selection 01 NC contact 09 Pa C036 Relay output AL2 AL1 00 NO contact between AL2 and ALO 01 o contact selection 01 NC contact between AL2 and ALO 4 94 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Specifications of Multi function Output Terminals 11 to 15 Below are the specifications of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 Inside a FR C031 to C035 set values Pomar Cupu Electrical characteristics supply status ON Between each terminal and CM2 00 ON OFF Voltage drop 4 V max at power on NO contact Max allowable voltage 27 V DC OFF Max allowable current 50 mA ON 01 ON NC contact OFF OFF MSpecifications of the Relay Output Terminals e The relay output terminals have an SPDT contact configuration Below is its operation Inside the Inverter a Zea O Default value C036 01 Example When the relay output terminal
106. a time during which deceleration is performed within approx 150 of the rated current value or within a DC voltage in the Inverter circuit of approx 370 V 200V class or approx 740 V 400 V class Thus the Inverter enables real time response to a change in applied load and inertia and sets acceleration deceleration time automatically e Note the following before use Note 1 This function is not suitable for a machine that needs a fixed acceleration deceleration time Acceleration deceleration time varies depending on applied load and inertia Note 2 If the machine inertia exceeds approx 20 times that of the motor shaft the Inverter may trip In this case reduce the carrier frequency Note 3 Acceleration deceleration time varies depending on fluctuations in current value even with the same motor Note 4 The automatic optimum acceleration deceleration setting is enabled only during V f control When sensorless vector control is selected the Inverter performs normal operation 4 36 suoljoun 4 2 Function Mode Note 5 If the jogging operation is performed when the automatic operation is selected the Inverter performs automatic acceleration which is different from normal jogging operation Note 6 When the applied load is larger than the rating deceleration time may be prolonged Note 7 If acceleration and deceleration are frequently repeated the Inverter may trip Note 8 When the internal braking circuit is us
107. arrival signal 02 FA2 over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL overload warning 04 OD excessive PID deviation 05 AL alarm output 06 FA3 set frequency only arrival signal 07 OTQ overtorque 08 IP signal during momentary power interruption 09 UV signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over 12 ONT Power ON time over 13 THM thermal warning 19 BRK brake release 20 BER brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 22 DSE excessive speed deviation 23 POK position ready 24 FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 25 FA5 set frequency only 2 26 OL2 overload warning 2 27 ODc analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc analog Ol disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc network error 33 LOG1 logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 logic operation output 3 36 LOG4 logic operation output 4 37 LOGS logic operation output 5 38 LOG6 logic operation output 6 39 WAC capacitor life warning signal 40 WAF cooling fan life warning signal 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF fin overheat warning 43 LOC light load detection signal 44 Not used 45 Not used 46 Not used 47 Not used 48 Not used 49 Not used 50 IRDY operation ready signal 51 FWR forward run signal 52 RVR reverse run signal 53 MJA fatal fault signal 54 WC
108. arrival signal during acceleration acceleration 2 C043 Arrival frequency during deceleration 0 0 Does not output arrival signal during deceleration 0 0 Hz Bode Arrival frequency during 0 1 to 400 0 Outputs arrival signal during deceleration deceleration 2 For elevating machines use this signal for applying the brake To release the brake use the overtorque signal Allocate 01 FA1 Constant speed arrival signal 02 FA2 Set frequency exceeded 06 FA3 Set frequency only 24 FA4 Set frequency exceeded 2 or 25 FA5 Set frequency only 2 to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 e Below is the hysteresis of the frequency arrival signal ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz If 06 FA3 or 25 FAS is set however operation during acceleration is ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz and operation during deceleration is ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz 4 96 4 2 Function Mode Constant Speed Arrival Output 01 FA1 A signal is output when the output frequency has reached the level set in the frequency setting F001 A020 A220 and A320 or multi step speed A021 to A035 fon 1 of
109. at P012 03 268435455 Yes reverse Displays MSB 4 digits including 2 00 Multi step position command 0 P060 8 01 Multi step position command 1 P061 lt 02 Multi step position command 2 P062 4 131 F 03 Multi step position command 3 P063 P074 Teaching selection 04 Multi step position command 4 P064 oe ea 05 Multi step position command 5 P065 06 Multi step position command 6 P066 07 Multi step position command 7 P067 P100 to Not used Do not use 0 P131 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 36 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Changes Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation U001 User 1 selection no d001 to P074 no U002 User 2 selection no d001 to P074 no U003 User 3 selection no d001 to P074 no U004 User 4 selection no d001 to P074 no U005 User 5 selection no d001 to P074 no oO E U006 User 6 selection no d001 to P074 no a Yes 4 53 2a U007 User 7 selection no d001 to P074 no E U008 User 8 selection no d001 to P074 no UO09 User 9 selection no d001 to P074 no U010 User 10 selection no d001 to P074 no U011 User 11 selection no d001 to P074 no U012 User 12 selection no d001 to P074 no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when
110. b050 b051 Operation b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop DC voltage constant control power recovery example 1 02 without recovery b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at power recovery Deceleration stop normal operation example 2 b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop DC voltage constant control power recovery example 1 03 with recovery b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at power recovery Operation normal operation example 2 e If operation of this function results in deceleration stop the Inverter is forced to stop even if the FW command is ON To restart the Inverter make sure that the incoming voltage has recovered and input the FW command again 4 Make sure that the b051 b052 set values are larger than the undervoltage level 200 V class 210 V 400 V class 410 V If undervoltage occurs this function is disabled Make sure that b051 is smaller than b052 If the proportional gain setting b055 is excessively increased when the difference between b051 and b052 is large the Inverter may accelerate immediately after this function starts resulting in overcurrent 5 When b050 02 03 PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant e Though quicker response is expected with a larger proportional gain b055 control tends to be divergent and may easily lead to a trip e Response also becomes quicker with a shorter integral time b056 but if
111. braking resistors The RB connection terminals terminal is provided for the Inverters with 22 kW or lower capacity P N Regenerative braking Connect optional regenerative braking units unit connection terminal G Ground terminal Inverter case ground terminal Connect this terminal to the ground type D 200 V class type C 400 V class E Control Circuit Terminal ES Terminal Terminal name Description Specifications symbol H Frequencyreference 10 V DC power supply for the O terminal Allowable load current power supply output 20 mA max O Frequencyreference With a 0 to 10 V DC voltage input the Input impedance 10 kQ input frequency reaches the maximum at 10 V Allowable input voltage Voltage Set at A014 if the maximum frequency range needs to be achieved at lower than 10 V 0 3 to 12 V DC 2 02 Auxiliary frequency With a O to 10 V DC voltage input the O2 Input impedance 10 kQ S reference input signal is added to the frequency reference Allowable input voltage 8 Voltage signal of the O or Ol terminal By changing range D L the setting the frequency reference canbe O to 12 V DC e oO y wl S input even with the O2 terminal z gt independently 5 Ol Frequencyreference With a 4 to 20 mA DC current input the Input impedance 100 Q F input maximum frequency is set at 20 mA The OI Allowable max current ra Current signal is only active when the AT terminalis 24 mA ON Alloca
112. cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 166 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into Multiple Holding Register 10h gt Writes into consecutive multiple holding registers Example Set acceleration time 1 F002 to 3000 sec for the Inverter with slave address 1 The data resolution of the holding register 1103h 1104h of acceleration time 1 F002 is 0 01 sec onds To set to 3000 seconds set data to 300000 493E0h Query Response No Field name Ene No Field name E xanpie HEX HEX 1 Slave address 01 1 Slave address 01 2 Function code 10 2 Function code 10 3 Start address MSB 2 11 3 Start address MSB 11 4 Start address LSB 2 02 4 Start address LSB 02 5 Number of holding registers 00 5 Number of holding registers 00 MSB MSB 6 EB of holding registers 02 6 sey of holding registers 02 7 Number of bytes 04 7 CRC 16 MSB E5 8 Change data 1 MSB 00 8 CRC 16 LSB 34 9 Change data 1 LSB 04 10 Change data 2 MSB 93 11 Change data 2 LSB EO 12 CRC 16 MSB 9E 13 CRC 16 LSB OF 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start address is reduced by 1 3 Specifies the number of actual bytes to change not the number of holding registers If writing into multiple holding registers cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception
113. circuit bar RX A4300 bar shaded area for EMC filter When not using the DC reactor function switching keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M6 EMC filter function switching method RX A2370 RX A4370 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M8 Others M8 WW EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled 2 16 2 2 Wiring Terminal arrangement Applicable model G PD short circuit bar i i Ircul Ground terminal with RX A2450 When not using the DC short circuit bar shaded area RX A4450 reactor keep the PD 1 P for EMC filter function switching RX A4550 short circuit bar attached EMC filter function switching method Ro To M4 Ground terminal M8 Others M8 EMC filter enabled factory default Ro To CHARGE LED indicator T V R L1 S L2 T L3 PD 1 P N U T1 V T2 W T3 G PD 1 P G short circuit bar Ground terminal with short circuit bar When not using the DC shaded area for EMC RX A2550 reactor keep the PD 1 P filter function switching short circuit bar attached F TER Ro To M4 EMC filter function switching method Ground terminal M8 Others M10 2 17 2 2 Wiring MRecommended Cable Size Wiring Device and Crimp Terminal For Inverter wiring crimp terminal and terminal screw tightening torque refer to the table below
114. command frequency reference via the Digital Operator This action operates the Inverter via a key sequence of the standard or optional Digital Operator When operating the Inverter only via the Digital Operator the Inverter does not need to be connected to the control circuit terminal block oJ O Digital Operator ETo enter the RUN command frequency reference from the control circuit terminal block This action operates the Inverter by connecting the external signals from the frequency setting device starting switch etc to the control circuit terminal block The operation starts by turning ON the RUN command FW RV while the input power supply is turned ON Note that the frequency can be set using a voltage signal or a current signal from the control circuit terminal block which can be selected according to the system For details refer to Control Circuit Terminal page 2 7 Requirements for operation e RUN command Switch Relay etc e Frequency reference External signal e g 0 to 10 V DC 10 to 10 V DC 4 to 20 mA Control circuit terminal block 1 lt RUN command switch Frequency reference ___ gt FW FREQ adjuster ETo enter the RUN command frequency reference in a combination of Sources from the Digital Operator and the control circuit terminal blo
115. current to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW Rated current A level Current limit level at Active Frequency Matching restart Active Frequency 0 10 to 30 00 b029 Matching restart Frequency reduction time at Active Frequency 0 50 s parameter Matching restart Starting frequency 00 Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max frequency 00 Matching restart 02 Set frequency Related functions C021 to C025 C026 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 If an overvoltage overcurrent trip occurs during deceleration momentary power interruption error E16 appears and the motor goes into free run status In this case increase the deceleration time When direct current P N is supplied to control power supply terminal Ro To the Inverter may detect undervoltage at power interruption and then trip If there is any problem with your system set 00 or 02 The Inverter may start at 0 Hz if The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates Even if retry selection b001 is set to Retry 01 to 03 and selection of momentary power interruption undervoltage trip during stop b004 is set to Disabled 00 or 02 the Inverter trips when the actual momentary power interruption time exceeds the allowable momentary power interruption time Example 2 Even if the trip retry operation is selected the Inverter trips if the cause of the trip is not remedied af
116. edr oe esas t8 2 wt seg thet ga Meee d gokart d Allie 13 Chapter 1 Overview MD SPRUMCUOINS ooeiceds cas chp caerie carveively re e p Eaa tuei 1 1 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts c c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneneaeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Chapter 2 Design Ze Sinstalati M ekee ee e ceutieruam mieebes E EE E EEEO EEEE ESEE 2 1 22 VAO a eae ee Sree eee eat ee eee we ae es 2 6 Chapter 3 Operation 31 Operation Me thOd ocisicscce cenectececiveladeutectectndecs a aE AE EEEE 3 3 3 2 WEST RUM Procedure ate aici aene ornes eeen E a ana a aaeain 3 4 3 3 Test RUN Operation s cenccie renee cutensiertect suedet seus uadeuchusiueyuech dite ibcanssecineseah 3 5 3 4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator 3 8 DO HIRO S ates eac dha ea a a a call less wg ar biel eta b tench bit ek te 3 11 36 Parameter Transition neisse Gas cae ule Gee wa eee nin EEEREN SEESE LEESE CEEE EDERSE 3 12 3 Parameter Lists ccccis topic cee cue testwelee lec delet cand y a y adie 3 18 Chapter 4 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode sic2iiei es nanena ee acti eale eee ele vealed 4 1 4 2 VRURICION Moder ss e aa ra aate priera orre uae cet eh Dalene AO eee eee alee 4 8 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 4 119 4 4 Communication FUNCTION ccccccceeeeeeeeeecceeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeseeeeeaeaeeeees 4 139 Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting cceeceeeeeeeeeee
117. elements A B and C Data Status A Status B Status C 00 Reserved Inverter status A Inverter status B Inverter status C Code Status Code Status Code Status 00 Initial status 00 During stop 00 01 01 During RUN 01 Stop 02 During stop 02 During trip 02 Deceleration 03 During RUN 03 Constant speed 04 During FRS 04 Acceleration 05 During JG 05 Forward 06 During DB 06 Reverse 07 During retry 07 Forward to reverse 08 During trip 08 Reverse to forward 09 During UV 09 Forward run start 10 Reverse run start lt Command 05 gt Reads trip data 4 149 4 4 Communication Function Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 05 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 150 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Each monitor s data at the time
118. feedback value in each control mode This function can be used in all control modes Set the input frequency at the maximum frequency in pulse train frequency scale P055 The analog input start end function cannot be used To limit the input frequency use pulse train fre quency bias amount P057 and pulse train frequency limit P058 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P055 Pulse train frequency scale 19 9 30 0 Sei ME Input MEJUENCY ALNE 25 0 kHz maximum frequency Pulse train frequency filter 0 01 to 2 00 Set a filter time constant for P056 a 0 10 S time constant pulse train input P057 Pulse train frequency bias 100 to 100 0 amount P058 Pulse train frequency limit 0 to 100 100 A001 Frequency rererenge 06 Pulse train frequency 02 selection A076 PID feedback selection 03 Pulse train frequency 00 A141 Operation frequency input 07 Pulse train frequency 02 a A setting A142 Operation frequency input 07 Pulse train frequency 03 B setting Pulse train frequency processing block Frequency measurement Frequency scale P055 1 0 to 50 0 kHz First order lag filter P056 Bias Limit Maximum frequency A004 Frequency reference Note The SWENC switch on PG Board is available for OFF encoder disconnection detection disabled 4 138 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 4 Communication Functi
119. function at b052 R W 0 to 10000 0 1 V momentary power interruption 1337h Deceleration time of Eee R W non stop function at 0 to 360000 0 01 s momentary power b053 1338h interruption LOW R W 4 188 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function pedlsice Function name Buneuon R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code Deceleration starting width 1339h Of non stop function at b054 R W 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz momentary power interruption Proportional gain setting of 133Ah nON stop function at boss Rw 0t0 255 0 01 momentary power interruption Integral time setting of 133Bh DOR function at b056 R W 0 to 65535 0 001 s momentary power interruption 133Ch to Not used 133Eh Set an upper limit level 133Fh Window comparator O up b060 R W Setting range 0 to 1 00 i 1 per limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level 1340h Window comparator O b061 R W Setting range 0 to 100 4 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and Window c imnaratoto lower limit levels 1341h Beuk b062 R W Setting range 0 to 10 1 hysteresis width T a ae Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level 1342h Window comparator Ol b063 R W Setting range 0 to 4 00 41 upper limit level Lower limit
120. gt x Oto10V O Kp lta Ss as E fs of the Inverter angor 4 to 20 mA Feedback 0 to 10V Transducer 4 to 20 mA Kp Proportional gain Ti Integral time Td Derivative time s Operator e Deviation 4 31 4 2 Function Mode EPID Operation P Operation e Operation where the control volume is proportional to the target value Step transition Ramp transition Target value __ Large Large i T T A072 A072 Control volume Vi Ni Operation Operation where the control volume increases linearly according to time Target value Control volume D Operation e Operation where the control volume is proportional to the variation ratio of the target value Target value Control volume ePI operation is the combination of the above P and operations PD is P and D operations PID is P and D operations MFeedback Selection e Select a terminal used for feedback signals in PID feedback selection A076 e The target value depends on the terminal selected in frequency reference selection A001 other than that in A076 When A001 is set to 01 terminal the setting of O OI selection A005 is disabled When analog input is selected for PID feedback and A001 is set to 01 terminal the PID target value is selected depending on the A006 set value as shown in the following table PID target value PID feedback selection A076 A006 00 A006 01 A006 02 A006 0
121. in HO60 H260 at startup only Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H060 H260 Limit at O Hz 0 0 fo 100 0 100 0 Current limit in low frequency range H061 H261 Boost amount at SEV 0 to 50 Current boost amount at startup 50 startup 0 Hz eNote the following before use e Select an Inverter with one rank higher in capacity than the motor s e Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the maximum applicable motor size eIn the 0 Hz sensorless control mode the digital command board 3GAX DI01 cannot be used lf 0 Hz sensorless vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust the motor parameters depending on the phenomena as shown in the table below operan Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item status Speed change ratio isa Increase motor parameter R2 gradually up to set H021 H221 H031 Power negative value parameter x 1 2 running Speed change ratio isa Reduce motor parameter R2 gradually down to set positive value parameter x 0 8 Ho2tH22tHoS Increase motor parameter R1 gradually up to set H020 H220 H030 ___ Insufficient torque at low Parameter x 1 2 Regeneration f IH requency several HZ Increase motor parameter lo gradually up to set H023 H223 H033 parameter x 1 2 During Shock occurs during Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024
122. is ignored and the output frequency instantaneously follows the reference frequency suoi un4 HEL S Curve Ratio If the EL S pattern is used you can set a curve ratio A151 to A153 individually for acceleration and deceleration If all settings are 50 the Inverter operates in the same manner as with the S curve Output frequency ratio 100 Curve ratio 2 during Curve ratio 1 during acceleration A151 deceleration A152 50 Curve ratio 2 during deceleration A153 Curve ratio 1 during Time s acceleration A150 4 40 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Operation Frequency Function e Two systems of frequency reference operation results are available for the frequency reference and PID feedback value Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A141 Operation frequency input A setting A142 Operation frequency input B setting 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Digital Operator F001 A020 A220 A320 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used Input O Input Ol RS485 communication Option 1 Option 2 Pulse train frequency 02 03 A143 Operator selection 00 01 02 Addition A B Subtraction A B Multiplication A x B 00 Related functions A001 10 A076 10 Note 1 When this function is enabled the Up Down function cannot be used In addi
123. is set with A020 A220 A320 or F001 refer to page 4 8 When the control circuit terminal block is selected speed 0 is set with terminals O O2 and Ol Multi step speeds CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1 11th Frequency from Oth Ore OFF the Digital Operator 1st ON or the external OFF analog input terminal 2nd OFF OFF 3rd ON OFF 4th OFF OFF __ 5th ON 6th OFF OFF CF1 JU UUUUUUUL a aT A ea CF2 8th OFF ec eas a a a 9th ON CF3 a LO e 10th OEE OFF CF4 11th ON ON A mE S 12th OFF Bi OFF 13th ON OFF 14th OFF OFF 15th ON For multi step speed binary operation you can set the wait time until which the terminal input is determined in multi step speed position determination time C169 This prevents the transition status before the input determination from being applied lf no input is made after the time set in C169 the data is determined Note that the longer the determination time the slower the input response Without determination time C169 i 9 Frequency reference 1 4 17 CF1 CF2 CF3 CF4 With determination time C169 Determination _ time C169 ZS 4 2 Function Mode HIBit Operation e By allocating 32 to 38 SF1 to SF7 to any of multi function inputs selection 1 to 8 C001 to C008 you can select from multi step speeds 0 to 7 For SF1
124. is turned on off e When both SET and SET3 terminals are turned on priority is given to SET and the 2nd control function is enabled e During operation you cannot switch between the 1st 2nd and 3rd control functions You can switch them only during stop 4 81 4 2 Function Mode External Trip e This function trips the Inverter via an error trip signal from a peripheral system To use this function allocate 12 EXT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Sets the motor to free run status by shutting off output 12 EXT External trip OFF The motor is in normal operation Available input terminals C001 to C008 Note Do not turn on the EXT terminal after shutting off the power Otherwise the Inverter may not store data correctly When the EXT terminal is turned on E12 is displayed and the Inverter trips to stop output When the Inverter has tripped indicating E12 the trip is not reset even if the error signal from external equipment is reset EXT terminal is turned off To reset the trip perform the reset operation or turn the power off and on again Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function RUN commands FW RV Free running Motor rpm sf 3 o o o oo RS terminal es eee Si Alarm output terminal to the Inverter turned on e This function trips the Inverter displaying E13 if the pow
125. kHz Carrier frequency kHz 2 1 Installation Backing Plate Inverter with 22 kW or Lower Capacity When running cables cut the points between the backing plate and unnecessary portions with 2 nippers or a wire cutter and remove ni Q Q Q Connecting points A D Unnecessary portion E inverter with 30 kW or Higher Capacity Design For Connection Without Cable Conduit Make a cut in the rubber bushing of the backing plate with nippers or a wire cutter and insert a ca ble lt lt _ _ Backing plate Rubber bushing For Connection With Cable Conduit Remove the rubber bushing from the conduit connecting portions and connect the cable conduit Do not remove the rubber bushing unless you connect a cable conduit Otherwise the cable sheath may be damaged by the inner edge of the backing plate resulting in short circuit or ground fault 2 2 Wiring 2 2 Wiring Standard Connection Diagram DC reactor _ 1 optional 4 Braking resistor B i e L par fae 1 optional L A O O O O O 3 phase 200 V AC 3 phase 400 V AC QOQ O G O O OO lt 33 po ubisa Short circuit Joi wire To wire the control circuit power E supply and main circuit power O supply separately be sure to remove the J51 connector wire first Relay outpu
126. kW C055 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 100 of Forward power running OTQ signal output level for forward i power running 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C056 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 100 Reverse regeneration OTQ signal output level for reverse regeneration 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C057 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 100 Reverse power running OTQ signal output level for reverse power running 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW C058 Overtorque level 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 100 Forward regeneration OTQ signal output level for forward regeneration Related functions A044 A244 A344 C063 e Enabled when overtorque signal is selected in the multi function output selection You can use this function only when sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 A244 With other settings the output is unstable For elevating machines use this signal for releasing the brake To close the brake use the frequency arrival signal 4 98 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode 0 Hz Detection Signal e This function outputs a detection signal when the Inverter s output frequency falls below the 0 Hz detection value set in 0 Hz detection level C063 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal
127. limit switching 2 43 PPI P PI switching 44 BOK Brake confirmation 45 ORT orientation 46 LAC LAD cancel 47 PCLR position deviation clear 48 STAT pulse train position command input permission 50 ADD frequency addition 51 F TM forced terminal block 52 ATR torque command input permission 53 KHC integrated power clear 54 SON servo ON 55 FOC preliminary excitation 56 Not used 57 Not used 58 Not used 59 Not used 60 Not used 61 Not used 62 Not used 63 Not used 65 AHD analog command held 66 CP1 position command selection 1 67 CP2 position command selection 2 68 CP3 position command selection 3 69 ORL zero return limit signal 70 ORG zero return startup signal 71 FOT forward driving stop 72 ROT reverse driving stop 73 SPD speed position switching 74 PCNT pulse counter 75 PCC pulse counter clear 255 no no allocation 1409h Not used 4 192 suoijoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regjia Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 140Ah Not used 140Bh Multi function input 1 C011 R W o operation selection 140Ch Multi function input 2 C012 R W o operation selection 140Dh Multi function input 3 C013 R W S operation selection 140Eh Multi function input 4 C014 R W operation selection Multi fun
128. motor Make sure that the output current output current monitor d002 is not excessive 3 7 3 4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator 3 4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator Part Names and Descriptions RUN command LED indicator po O POWER O ALARM omron RX INVERTER Data display Operation keys uonesado Name Function O POWER POWER LED indicator Lit when the power is supplied to the control circuit O ALARM ALARM LED indicator Lit when an Inverter error occurs RUNO RUN during RUN Lit when the Inverter is running LED indicator PROGRAM LED Lit when the set value of each function is indicated on the data PRGO indicator display Blinks during warning when the set value is incorrect a Data display Displays relevant data such as frequency reference output Hm H 4 current and set values Ouz Data LED indicator Lit according to the indication on the data display Ov oade Hz Frequency V Voltage A Current kW Power Ratio O o RUN command LED Lit when the RUN command is set to the Digital Operator The indicator RUN key on the Digital Operator is available for operation RUN key Activates the Inverter Available only when operation via the RUN Digital Operator is selected Check that the RUN command LED indicator is lit STOP STOP RESET key Decelerates and stops the
129. of 440 bytes tripping Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Each trip monitor stores the past six trips together with total trip count 8 bytes Total count Trip data 1 soccer cesces Trip data 6 Monitor item Unit Magnification Data size Note Trip factor 8 bytes Code display Inverter status A 8 bytes Inverter status B 8 bytes See Command 04 gt Inverter status C 8 bytes MSB Output frequency Hz x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Total RUN time h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code rig Output current A x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code DC voltage V x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Power ON time h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code lt Command 06 gt Reads a setting item e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Parameter BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 06 Parameter Parameter No for data 4 bytes i Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 151 All parameters except F001 and U001 to U012 are retrieved e Respon
130. other than b031 cannot be changed 03 Data other than b031 and specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed Related functions C001 to C008 SFT input 4 51 e Select the soft lock setting and performing method from the above table e To use a multi function input terminal allocate 15 SFT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 4 2 Function Mode RUN Time Power ON Time Exceeded lf the total RUN time of the Inverter exceeds the time set in ON time setting b034 a RUN Power ON time exceeded RNT ONT signal is output Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 0 Does not operate 1 to 9999 RUN time Power ON Set in increments of 10 hours popa time settin o 9 1000 to 6553 Set in increments of 100 hours 100000 to 655300 hours C021 to C025 C026 d016 d017 Related functions ERUN Time Exceeded RNT Allocate 11 RNT to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Set a time in RUN time Power ON time setting b034 EPower ON Time Exceeded ONT Allocate 12 ONT to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 e Set a time in RUN time Power ON time setting b034 Rotation Direction Limit Selection Limits motor rotation directio
131. protection E04 Overcurrent protection Overload protection 0 0 1 0 E05 E38 Overload protection in a low E05 Overload protection speed range 0 0 1 1 E07 E15 Overvoltage Incoming E07 E15 Overvoltage Incoming overvoltage protection overvoltage protection 0 1 0 0 E09 Undervoltage protection E09 Undervoltage protection 0 1 0 1 E16 Momentary power interruption E16 Momentary power protection interruption protection 0 1 1 0 E30 IGBT error E30 IGBT error 0 1 1 1 E06 Braking resistor overload Oiheroror protection 4 99 4 2 Function Mode Multi function output terminals With 4 bit code selected With 3 bit code selected 14 13 12 11 Factor code Trip cause Factor code Trip cause AC3 AC2 AC1 ACO EEPROM error CPU error 1 0 0 0 E08 ET GA communication error Main E23 E25 eae circuit error 1 0 0 1 E10 CT error 1 0 1 0 E12 E13 External trip USP error _ o E35 E36 Thermistor error Brake error 1 1 0 0 E14 Grounding protection 1 1 0 1 E20 Abnormal temperature due to the cooling fin s speed drop 1 1 0 1 E21 Abnormal temperature 1 1 1 0 E24 Input phase loss protection 1 1 1 1 E50 to E79 Network error Options 1 2 _ Errors 0 to 9 Output Signal Logic Operation e This function performs output signal logic operations inside the Inverter All output signals are operation targets However the logic operation
132. pulse output HFM Selection e Select a signal to output from the following table For 03 digital output frequency use the digital frequency counter For other output signals use the analog meter Parameter No Data Description Full scale value 4 00 Output frequency example 1 0 to Max frequency Hz 01 Output current example 1 0 to 200 02 Output torque example 1 1 0 to 200 2 03 Digital output frequency example 2 0 to Max frequency Hz Oo 04 Output voltage example 1 0 to 100 E aoe 05 Input voltage example 1 0 to 200 ra 06 Thermal load rate example 1 0 to 100 07 LAD frequency example 1 0 to Max frequency Hz 08 Digital current monitor 2 09 Motor temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 10 Fin temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 12 Not used 1 This output is enabled only when SLV 0 Hz SLV or V2 is selected Refer to Control Method V f Characteristics page 4 21 Example 1 Set values 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 12 Example 2 Set values 03 08 lt gt iets a l a lt T 5 Cycle T Constant 6 4 ms Cycle T Variable Duty ratio t T Variable Duty ratio t T Fixed to 1 2 2 Digital current monitor e When the monitor displays the value set in digital current monitor reference value C030 1440 Hz is output Parameter No Function name Data Defaul
133. selection 00 Manual torque boost x 01 Automatic torque boost No _ A241 2nd torque boost 00 selection A042 Manual torque boost 1 0 voltage 2nd manual torque A242 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 Yes boost voltage 4 19 A342 3rd manual torque 1 0 boost voltage A043 Manual torque boost 50 frequency 2nd manual torque A243 0 0 to 50 0 5 0 Yes 8 boost frequency 2 7 T A343 3rd manual torque 50 5 boost frequency S 00 Constant torque characteristics VC 01 Special reduced torque characteristics gt ne special VP A044 a ea 02 Free V f characteristics 00 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 Sensor vector control V2 00 Constant torque characteristics VC ars No 4 21 2nd VF 01 Special reduced torque characteristics ae special VP nee AR 02 Free V f characteristics 00 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 3rd V f 00 Constant torque characteristics VC A344 characteristics 01 Special reduced torque characteristics 00 selection special VP A045 Output voltage gain 20 to 100 100 Yes 4 24 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 7 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciega Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting
134. sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit V f characteristics 035 SLV A344 iS blank A044 A244 A344 Selection 04 0 Hz A344 is blank 00 05 Sensor vector Multi function inputs 1 to 8 selection 43 PPI P PI switching C001 to C008 H005 H205 Speed response 0 001 to 80 000 1 590 H050 H250 PI proportional gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 H051 H251 PI integral gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 H052 H252 P proportional gain 0 001 to 10 00 1 00 e If P PI switching is selected in the multi function input selection proportional integral compensation is enabled while the signal is off proportional compensation is enabled while the signal is on If P PI switching is not selected in multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 proportional integral compensation is enabled Normally the Inverter performs proportional integral compensation Picontrol PI control for speed control so that the difference between N x Bicone frequency reference and actual rom becomes zero If one loadis Torque operated by several motors however proportional control P control may be required To enable proportional control P control allocate the P PI switching function to any of multi A function input terminals 1 to 8 set 43 in any of C001 to C008 via the Digital Operator and turn on the ter
135. set value in EEPROM e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes OA Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 155 Negative response Refer to page 4 155 4 154 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Command OB gt Re calculates internal parameters Recalculation is required when the base frequency and H parameters are changed via RS485 communication e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 0B Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 155 Negative response Refer to page 4 155 HPositive Negative Responses lt Positive Response gt Response frame Frame format STX Station No ACK
136. shutoff function For details terminal 4 7 kQ 6 refer to Emergency Shutoff Function 7 page 2 10 Allowable max S 8 voltage 2 Voltage between S each input terminal liS and the CM1 c o terminal 27 V DC S IOIO g Load current at 27 V E 5 DC power supply 8 E voltage T E Approx 5 6 mA a CM1 Multi function input The sink and source logic for contact input can common be switched by connecting a short circuit bar on the control terminal block Short circuiting P24 and PLC Sink logic Short circuiting PLC and CM1 gt Source logic To activate contact input via an external power supply remove the short circuit bar and connect CM1 terminal to the external interface circuit 11 Multi function output Select 5 functions from among 45 and allocate Between each 5 12 them to terminals 11 through 15 terminal and CM2 2 gt 13 If an alarm code is selected in C062 terminals Voltage drop 4 V rane 14 11 to 13 or terminals 11 to 14 always output an max at power on g nt 15 alarm factor code e g Inverter trip The signal 215 between each terminal and CM2 always Max allowable 8 2 corresponds to the sink or source logic voltage 27 V DC cig a S CM2 Multi function output Common terminals for multi function output M Il bl Q common terminals 11 to 15 on ina current 50 mA AL2 Relay output Select the desired functions from among 45 Contact max AL1 functions and allocate them SPDT contact capacity output AL2 ALO P By
137. speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 10 A030 122Bh ow RW 122Ch l ace RAN Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 11 A031 122Dh row RW 122Eh l E RW Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 12 A032 122Fh ow RW 1230h l ice R W Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 13 A033 1231h row RW 1232h l ere RN Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 14 A034 1233h ow RW 1234h l ee RW Multi step speed 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 01 Hz reference 15 A035 1235h row RW 4 180 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regjia Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 1236h Not used 1237h Not used 1238h Jogging frequency A038 R W Starting frequency to 999 0 01 Hz 0 Free run stop Disabled in operation 1 Deceleration stop Disabled in operation 2 DC injection braking stop Disabled in operation 1239h Jogging stop selection A039 RW 3 Free run stop Enabled in operation _ 4 Deceleration stop Enabled in operation 5 DC injection braking stop Enabled in operation 123Ah_ Not used 123Bh Torque boost selection A041 pw Manual torque boost paz 1 Automatic torqu
138. supply input is interrupted the Inverter reverts to the following status R L1 phase or T L3 phase is inter The Inverter does not operate rupted S L2 phase is interrupted The Inverter reverts to single phase operation causing a trip due to undervoltage overcurrent etc or damage to the Inverter Even if the power input is under a phase loss condition the internal capacitor is charged with voltage causing an electric shock or injury When changing the cable connections refer to the instructions on page 2 1 2 12 2 2 Wiring e In the following cases the internal converter module may be damaged Use caution to avoid them Imbalance of power supply voltage is 3 or more Power supply capacity is ten times or more than the Inverter capacity and also 500 kVA or more Rapid change in power supply voltage 2 Example When several Inverters are connected with a short bus When the phase advance capacitor is turned on off e Do not turn power on off more than once every 3 minutes Doing so may damage the Inverter Winverter Output Terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 For connection of the output terminal use the applicable cable or a cable with a larger diameter Otherwise the output voltage between the Inverter and the motor may drop Particularly during low frequency output a voltage drop occurs with the cable resulting in motor torque reduction Do not mount a phase advance capacitor or surge absorber These devices
139. terminal FR ees eatis e ante aai free run Stop 20 eee eeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeteeeeeeeees free run stop selection and stop selection 4 68 frequency addition function frequency arrival signal frequency conversion coefficient ceeeeeee 4 2 PEQUENGCY JUMP eesin tee dels teen tenes einldes 4 30 frequency limits vic nck teen anaes 4 28 lower TIMI haneit E 4 28 upper limit sicions 4 28 N frequency Matching ccccceceeeseeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 68 frequency pull in restart 4 43 4 45 PUN eat eataa re E A 4 102 frequency reference Selection 0 0 0 4 10 MO sree Aah eee Mea i ee 4 77 FRS high torque Multi operation ecereereceeecees 4 117 IN See eee ear Ce RTE nT I dy err ee 4 52 OPER iisin hit aa Men ae ee tin Saas 4 89 l operation frequency function ccceeeeeteeeeeeeteees 4 41 EEEE Operation Method ceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaees 3 3 initial SCECN fesse ered eee tedden 4 56 Operation ready Signal scessseeeeteeteeeees 4 104 initialization aie as ware ees 4 66 operation selection during option error 4 109 input power MONILON e cece cee cesceseceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeens 4 4 Orientation function cccccesccececeeeeceeessesestteeees 4 129 integrated power MONIOF cccccecceeseecseecetseseses
140. to SF7 frequency settings set multi step speeds 1 to 7 A021 to A027 Frequency from the Multi step speeds SF7 SF6 SF5 SF4 SF3 SF2 SF1 ad E Digital E Oth OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ath A ia ist x x x x x x ON 2nd x x x x x ON OFF s 3rd x x x x ON OFF OFF s SL fT 4th x x On ore orrlorr srs AA 5th x x ON OFF OFF OFF OFF at a 6th x ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF oc Nn m 7th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF se N l e When several terminals are simultaneously turned on priority is given to the terminal with the smallest number ew SUL The x mark in the above table indicates that speed is selected regardless of ON OFF status Jogging Operation Function e The motor rotates while this function is turned on Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A038 Jogging frequency 0 00 Starting frequency to 9 99 6 00 Hz 00 Free run stop Disabled in operation 01 Deceleration stop Disabled in operation 02 DC injection braking stop Disabled in operation 00 03 Free run stop Enabled in operation 04 Deceleration stop Enabled in operation 05 DC injection braking stop Enabled in operation A039 Jogging stop selection When jogging stop selection A039 is set to 02 or 05 the DC injection braking settings are required Refer to page 4 24 e Allocate 0
141. to the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 The set value will not be changed If b052 is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent DC voltage or equivalent after rectification incoming voltage x V 2 the Inverter is brought into the LAD STOP status at power recovery during execution of this function disabling deceleration The Inverter will accept neither a STOP command nor frequency reference change until operation is complete Make sure that the b052 setting is higer than the normal incoming voltage or equivalent 2 This function is not reset before the operation is complete and stopped To run the Inverter after power recovery during this function input the RUN command following the STOP command RUN command OFF after a stop condition 3 If the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration starting width b054 is too large an overcurrent trip occurs because of rapid deceleration If b054 is too small or if the momentary power interruption non stop deceleration time b053 is too long an undervoltage trip occurs because of insufficient regeneration power Main circuit P N voltage VPN V b052 b051 Undervoltage level Time s Output frequency Hz Time s 4 2 Function Mode Momentary Power Interruption Non stop DC Voltage Constant Control b050 02 without recovery b050 03 with recovery lf a momentary power interruption or main circuit DC voltage drop oc
142. too short the same situation may occur e If the proportional gain b055 is too small the voltage drops immediately after this function starts resulting in an undervoltage trip 4 62 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Example 1 Main circuit P N voltage Example 2 Main circuit P N voltage Main circuit DC voltage at power recovery Vpn V Vpn V Le ancenuthetus b052 ee oom Power recovery nosy Main circuit DC voltage DC voltage kept constant _DC voltage kept constant Output Output ii frequenc frequenc q H a HA b050 03 Operation b050 02 03 Deceleration stop r Power recovery b050 02 Time Deceleration stop N Power recovery Time Note The main circuit DC voltage level while the function is running may fall below the b052 set value depending on the proportional gain and integral time settings Window Comparator Disconnection Detection ODc OIDc O2Dc e The Inverter activates the window comparator output when the O OI O2 analog input value is within the upper and lower limit levels of the window comparator This function allows you to monitor analog input based on the desired level e g to detect a disconnection Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output terminals 11 to 15 selection C021 to C025 Relay output AL2 AL1 ro function selection 27 ODc analog O
143. tuning data motor 0 01 to 99 99 ANA i r 100 0 to 655 3 Depends 2nd motor on the H233 parameter lo i motor auto tuning data i capacity Depends Motor parameter J on the H034 auto tuning data 0 001 to 9 999 motor 10 00 to 99 99 R e le 100 0 to 999 9 ee E 2nd motor 1000 to 9999 onte H234 parameter J motor auto tuning data capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 49 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Creige Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation H050 PI proportional gain 100 0 0 0 to 999 9 Yes En H250 2nd PI proportional 1000 100 0 gain H051 PI integral gain 0 0 to 999 9 100 0 4 87 i Yes H251 2nd PI integral gain 1000 100 0 4 90 H052 P proportional gain 1 00 i 0 01 to 10 00 Yes H252 2nd P proportional 1 00 gain 2 HO60 Limitat 0 Hz 100 0 E 0 0 to 100 0 Yes H260 2nd limit at 0 Hz 100 0 Q D Ho61 Boost amount at SLV 50 4 115 startup 0 Hz E TIR 0 to 50 Yes 2nd boost amount at B26 SLV startup 0 Hz 50 H070 For PI proportional 0 0 to 999 9 100 0 Yes gain switching 1000 H071 For PI integral gain 0 0 to 999 9 100 0 Yes switching 1000 4 87 Ho72 For P proportional 00 to 10 00 1 00 Yes
144. with the frequency reference established or a value larger than the A052 setting is input the initial operation is set to normal output Example 7 a Example 7 b ON ON RUN RUN command command A052 A052 Frequency Frequency reference reference rape ei W be frequency frequency e The operation to return to normal varies depending on the setting of DC injection braking power A054 a Edge operation b Level operation ON ON RUN RUN l command command A052 A052 Frequency Frequency reference reference Output Output frequency frequency A053 Frequency Limit eYou can set both the upper lower limits to the output frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A061 Frequency upper limit PA err it A062 to 0 0 A261 2nd frequency upper limit EA 0 0 H A062 Frequency lower limit ea N to Frequency 0 0 0 0 Starting frequency to 2nd 0 0 A262 2nd frequency lower limit frequency upper limit A261 Related functions C001 to C008 4 28 suoljoun 4 2 Function Mode To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Does not accept any frequency reference beyond the upper lower limits e Set the upper limit first Make sure that the upper limit A061 A261 is larger than the lower limit A062 A262 e Make sure tha
145. 0 Disabled Momentary power 1 Enabled 1304h interruption undervoltage b004 R W pae 2 Disabled during stop and deceleration trip during stop selection stop 4 185 4 4 Communication Function Reo Function name Reed R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code Momentary power 1305h interruption retry time poos Rw 16 times 1 No limit selection Input phase loss 0 Disabled 1396h protection selection oe BAN 1 Enabled 1307h HICE R W Frequency matching lower 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz limit frequency setting b007 1308h LOW R W 0 Trip 1 0 Hz start 2 Frequency matching start 1309h Trip retry selection b008 R W 3 Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 4 Active Frequency Matching restart 130Ah Undervoltage retry time b009 R W E 16 times o selection 1 No limit 130Bh Overvoltage overcurrent b010 RIW 1103 za retry time selection 130Ch Trip retry wait time b011 R W 3 to 1000 0 1 s 130Dh Electronic thermal level b012 R W 200 to 1000 0 1 Ele itonic theimal 0 Reduction characteristics 130Eh Tp F b013 R W 1 Constant torque characteristics characteristics selection i 2 Free setting 130Fh Not used 4310h Fee setting electronic b015 R W 0to400 1 Hz thermal frequency 1 4311h Free setting electronic b016 R W 0 to Rated current 0 1 A thermal current 1 4312h
146. 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 172 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Holding Register Number List Frequency Reference and Trip Monitor gt Recete Function name Bucs R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0001h F001 R W Output frequency setting monitor Tan 0 040099 0 01 in aai F001 Enabled when A001 03 Hz 0002h LOW R W 0 Initial status 4 2 Stop 3 RUN 0003h Inverter status A R a Free run Stop 5 Jogging 6 DC injection braking 7 Retry 8 Trip 9 During UV 0 During stop 0004h Inverter status B R 1 During RUN 2 During trip 0 1 Stop 2 Deceleration 3 Constant speed 4 Acceleration 0005h Inverter status C R 5 Forward 6 Reverse 7 Forward to reverse 8 Reverse to forward 9 Forward run start 10 Reverse run start 0 01 0006h PID feedback R W 0 to 10000 1 o 0007h to Not used 0010
147. 0 b018 x0 8 b016 Inverter output o 5 40 frequency Hz 0 b015 b017 b019 A004 A204 A304 Max frequency Hz Example Output frequency b017 x 0018 Rated current x 109 y 0018 Rated current x 150 z 0018 Rated current x 200 Trip time s Motor current A Ratio to the rated 0 x y z current of the Inverter Thermal Warning e This function outputs an alarm signal before electronic thermal overheat protection is activated The warning level can be set in C061 Allocate 13 THM to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 4 48 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Overload Limit Overload Warning This function helps prevent an overcurrent trip due to rapid load fluctuation in acceleration or constant speed operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b021 Overload limit selection 00 Disabled 01 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation 02 Enabled in constant speed operation b024 Overload limit selection 2 03 Enabled in acceleration constant 01 speed operation accelerates during regeneration b022 Overload limit level 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated 1 50 x Rated A current 0 4 to 55 kW current a 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated 1 50 x Rated b025 Overload limit level 2 current 75 to 132 kW c rr nt A b023
148. 0 00 reference 13 A034 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 14 A035 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 15 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 23 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default ane Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation A038 Jogging frequency 0 00 Starting frequency to 9 99 6 00 Yes Hz 5 00 Free running on jogging stop 5 Disabled in operation D 01 Deceleration stop on jogging stop E Disabled in operation 3 02 DC injection braking on jogging stop 2 Jogging stop Disabled in operation 4 18 a A039 ae 00 No a selection 03 Free running on jogging stop 2 Enabled in operation 04 Deceleration stop on jogging stop n y 5 Enabled in operation 05 DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation A041 Torque boost 00 selection 00 Manual torque boost 01 Automatic torque boost Ne A241 2nd torque boost 00 selection A042 Manual torque boost 1 0 voltage 2nd manual torque A242 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 Yes boost voltage 4 19 A342 3rd manual torque 1 0 boost voltage A043 Manual torque boost 50 frequency 2nd manual torque A243 0 0 to 50 0 5 0 Yes 8 boost frequency z T A343 3rd manual torque 50 5 boost frequency S 00 Constant torque characteristics VC 01 Special reduced torque cha
149. 0 01 100 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 1000 to 9999 Displays in increments of 1 100 to 999 Displays in increments of 10 4 1 Monitor Mode Multi function Input Monitor d005 e The LED lighting position indicates the input status of the multi function input terminals e The item that the built in CPU recognizes to be significant is indicated as being ON This does not depend on the NO NC contact setting Example FW Multi function input terminals 7 2 1 ON Multi function input terminals 8 6 5 4 3 OFF ON a Display a im GD Aon fron EL l i t i li OFF l OFF Multi function OEE A oa input terminals OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON Multi function Output Monitor d006 e The LED lighting position indicates the output status of the multi function output terminals e This monitor displays the output status of the built in CPU not the control circuit terminal status Example Multi function output terminals 12 11 ON Relay output terminal AL2 Multi function output terminals 15 14 13 OFF z Display Q Q a pe i t i f OFF OFF Multi function output terminals d h iy h Relay output terminals OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON Output Frequency Monitor After Conversion d007 Displays a gain conversion value based on the coefficient set in frequency conversion coefficient b086 This monitor is used to change the unit of displayed data
150. 0 2100 310 100 240 295 210 7 AX REM02K1017 IE 17 2100 AX REM03K5035 IE 35 3500 365 100 240 350 210 8 AX REM03K5010 IE 10 3500 AX REM19 38KO000 E c 2 lt D a H N M Specifications Dimensions Weight Type Resistance Q Power W L H M l T KG AX REM19K0030 IE 30 19000 AX REM19K0020 IE 20 19000 140 350 180 100 160 6 AX REM19K0008 IE 8 19000 AX REM19K0006 IE 6 19000 AX REM38K0012 IE 12 38000 240 350 180 200 160 11 7 17 7 3 Options Simplified Selection Table for Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Inverter Braking resistor unit External resistor 10 ED M t Braking min MB OLED 10 see mee Braking 10 sec max for built in Braking ax mo or Unit resistance oA torque 5 sec max for Braking Unit torque AX BCRI Q 3 pha Type AX Resist Q Type AX Resist Q 0 55 2004 180 REM00K1200 IE 200 180 50 REM00K1200 IE 200 1 1 2007 100 REM00K2070 IE 70 200 1 5 2015 140 REM00K4075 IE 75 130 REM00K2070 IE 70 2 2 2022 35 90 REMO00K4035 IE 35 180 4 0 2037 REM00K4075 IE 75 50 REMO0K6035 IE 35 100 T 5 5 2055 Built in 16 75 REM00K9017 IE 17 150 2 REMO00K4035 IE 35 7 5 2075 55 REM01K9017 IE 17
151. 0 43 00 A4007 0 7 AX RC27000030 DE 3 0 27 00 A4015 1 5 AX RC14000047 DE 47 14 00 A4022 2 2 AX RC10100069 DE 6 9 10 10 A4037 4 0 AX RC06400116 DE 11 6 6 40 A4055 5 5 AX RC04410167 DE 16 7 4 41 A4075 7 5 AX RC03350219 DE 21 9 3 35 400V A4110 11 0 AX RC02330307 DE 30 7 2 33 A4150 15 0 AX RC01750430 DE 43 0 1 75 A4185 A4220 18 5 to 22 AX RC01200644 DE 64 4 1 20 A4300 30 AX RC00920797 DE 79 7 0 92 A4370 37 AX RC00741042 DE 104 2 0 74 A4450 45 AX RC00611236 DE 123 6 0 61 A4550 55 AX RC00501529 DE 152 9 0 50 7 21 7 3 Options EMC Filter AX FIROOOO RE Dimensional Drawing Footprint Dimensions Book Type Dimensions mh ii H drive mounts L o output Y flexes Dimensions i Voltage Inverter model Model oan L Ww H X Y M Filter type RX A2004 RX A2007 RX A2015 AX FIR2018 RE 305 125 45 290 110 M5 2 0 RX A2022 Footprint RX A2037 RX A2055 RX A2075 AX FIR2053 RE 312 212 56 296 110 M6 2 5 w 3x200 V RX A2110 xe RX A2150 2 RX A2185 AX FIR2110 RE 8 0 h RX A2220 O RX A2300 AX FIR2145 RE 455 110 240 414 80 Book type 8 6 v RX A2370 o AX FIR3250 RE 13 5 RX A2450 n RX A2550 AX FIR3320 RE 13 2 RX A4004 RX A4007 RX A4015 AX FIR3010 RE 305 125 45 290 110 M5 1 9 RX A4022 RX A4040 RX A4055 Footprint RX A4075 AX FIR3030 RE 312
152. 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 4 72 function b091 Stop selection se a dae 00 No 4 68 01 Free run stop F 00 Always ON b092 Cooling fan control 01 ON during RUN 01 No Regenerative braking 00 Disabled b095 function operation 01 Enabled Disabled during stop 00 No 4 72 selection 02 Enabled Enabled during stop Regenerative braking 330 to 380 360 pose function ON level 660 to 760 720 N y 00 Disabled b098 Thermistor selection 01 PTC enabled 00 No 02 NTC enabled 4 73 b099 Thermistor error level 0 to 9999 3000 No Q 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 18 gt x D 5 2 z Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Citne No Function name Monitor or data range setting during Unit Page operation b100 Free V f frequency 1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 0 No Hz b101 Free V f voltage 1 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b102 Free V f frequency 2 0 to Free V f frequency 3 0 No Hz b103 Free V f voltage 2 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b104 Free V f frequency 3 0 to Free V f frequency 4 0 No Hz D b105 Free V f voltage 3 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V F b106 Free V f frequency 4 0 to Free V f frequency 5 0 No Hz Eos b107 Free V f voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b108 Free V f frequency 5 0 to Free V f frequency 6 0 No Hz
153. 0 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a time required for the output current to b121 0 00 s release reach the rate of the release current after reaching the release frequency 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a mechanical delay time from when the b122 7 3 0 00 s acceleration release signal is output until the brake is released 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a mechanical delay time from when the b123 0 00 s stopping release signal is turned off until the brake is closed 0 00 to 5 00 Brake wait time for Set a wait time longer than the time from b124 5 when the release signal is released until the 0 00 s confirmation brake outputs the release completion signal to the Inverter 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz b125 Brake release frequency Set a frequency to output the brake release 0 00 Hz signal l 0 x Rated current to 2 0 x Rated current b126 Brake release current Set an output current that allows the brake to Rated current be released 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 b127 Brake input frequency Set a frequency to close the brake during 0 00 Hz stop f Related functions C001 to C008 C021 to C025 1 Set a brake release frequency higher than the starting frequency b082 2 If the set current is too low sufficient torque may not be provided when the brake is released In any of the following cases the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal BER Brake error E36 e Th
154. 00 BOK_ Brake confirmation 0000000000002000 USP_ Power recovery restart prevention 0000200000000000 ORT Orientation 0000000000004000 CS Commercial switching 0000400000000000 LAC LAD cancel 0000000000008000 SFT Soft lock 0000800000000000 PCLR Position deviation clear 0000000000010000 AT Analog input switching 0001000000000000 STAT Pulse train position command permission 0000000000020000 SET3 3rd control 0002000000000000 7 0000000000040000 RS Reset 0004000000000000 ADD Set frequency addition 0000000000080000 7 0008000000000000 F TM Forced terminal 0000000000100000 STA 3 wire start 0010000000000000 ATR_ Torque reference input permission 0000000000200000 STP_ 3 wire stop 0020000000000000 KHC Integrated power clear 0000000000400000 F R _ 3 wire forward reverse 0040000000000000 SON_ Servo ON 0000000000800000 PID PID enabled disabled 0080000000000000 FOC_ Preliminary excitation 0000000001000000 PIDC PID integral reset 0100000000000000 MI1 Not used 0000000002000000 7 0200000000000000 MI2 Not used 0000000004000000 CAS Control gain switching 0400000000000000 MI3 Not used 0000000008000000 UP Remote operation accelerated 0800000000000000 MI4 Not used 0000000010000000 DWN Remote operation decelerated 1000000000000000 MI5 Not used 0000000020000000 UDC Remote operation data clear 2000000000000000 MI6 Not used 0000000040000000 7 4000000000000000 MI7 Not used 000
155. 0000080000000 OPE Forced operator 8000000000000000 MI8 Not used 4 145 4 4 Communication Function Data hexadecimal and description of multi function terminals corresponding to 12 commands For details refer to Multi function Input Terminal Function Data hex Description Data hex Description 0000000000000001 0000000100000000 0000000000000002 AHD Analog command on hold 0000000200000000 0000000000000004 CP1 Position command selection 1 0000000400000000 0000000000000008 CP2 Position command selection 2 0000000800000000 0000000000000010 CP3 Position command selection 3 0000001000000000 0000000000000020 ORL Zero return limit signal 0000002000000000 0000000000000040 ORG Zero return startup signal 0000004000000000 0000000000000080 FOT Forward driving stop 0000008000000000 0000000000000100 ROT Reverse driving stop 0000010000000000 0000000000000200 SPD Speed Position switching 0000020000000000 0000000000000400 PCNT Pulse counter 0000040000000000 0000000000000800 PCC Pulse counter clear 0000080000000000 0000000000001000 0000100000000000 0000000000002000 0000200000000000 0000000000004000 0000400000000000 0000000000008000 0000800000000000 0000000000010000 0001000000000000 0000000000020000
156. 00026 DE 2 6 11 50 0 75 AX RAO07600042 DE 4 2 7 60 1 5 AX RAO04100075 DE 7 5 4 10 2 2 AX RAO03000105 DE 10 5 3 00 200 V class 3 7 AX RAO01830160 DE 16 0 1 83 5 5 AX RAO01150220 DE 22 0 1 15 7 5 AX RAO00950320 DE 32 0 0 95 11 AX RAO00630430 DE 43 0 0 63 15 AX RAO00490640 DE 64 0 0 49 0 4 to 1 5 AX RAO16300038 DE 3 8 16 30 2 2 AX RAO11800053 DE 5 3 11 80 4 0 AX RAO07300080 DE 8 0 7 30 400 V clas 5 5 AX RAO046001 10 DE 11 0 4 60 7 5 AX RAO03600160 DE 16 0 3 60 11 AX RAO02500220 DE 22 0 2 50 15 0 AX RAO02000320 DE 32 0 2 00 Input AC Reactor AX RAINDOOOOOD DE Dimensional Drawing bl wn x D o O D e 5 a 7 24 Specifications 7 3 Options Dimensions Weight Voltage Reference Kg A B1 B2 C1 C2 D E F AX RAI02800100 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAI00880200 DE AX RAI00350335 DE 190 5 5 200V AX RAI00180670 DE 85 55 180 140 AX RAI00091000 DE 205 6 6 5 AX RAI00071550 DE 105 205 85 11 7 AX RAI00042300 DE 240 130 210 200 75 16 0 AX RAI07700050 DE 70 52 1 78 AX RAI03500100 DE 120 120 80 5 5 2 35 80 62 AX RAI01300170 DE 2 5 400V AX RAI00740335 DE 190 5 5 85 55 AX RAI00360500 DE 180 140 6 5 205 6 AX RAI00290780 DE 105 85 11 7 AX RAI00191150 DE 240 110 275 200 75 16 0 Specifications Voltage late a
157. 01 Position command side REF of Ne z selection P020 Electronic gear ratio 0 to 9999 4 No B Jata numerator f 4 125 po21 Electronic gear ratio Io 14 gogo 1 No denominator Position control 0 00 to 99 99 page feedforward gain 100 0 to 655 3 299 Ne 4 120 4 124 P023 Position loop gain pa a 0 50 No rad s 4 125 100 0 4 129 4 131 P024 Position bias amount 204 2048 999 to 2048 0 Yes 4 124 Secondary resistance compensation 00 Disabled fines enable disable 01 Enabled oe No pale 2 selection 2 Gk S poze Overspeed error 0 0 to 150 0 135 0 No 56 detection level Speed deviation error 0 00 to 99 99 POZY detection level 100 0 to 120 0 von No He 4 120 pog E Sor grar ane 1 to 9999 de No numerator 4 128 pozas ae rag 1 to 9999 1 No denominator Acceleration 00 Digital Operator P031 deceleration time 01 Option 1 00 No 4 8 input type 02 Option 2 F 00 Digital Operator P032 EA ENS ara o 01 Option 1 o Nol l ee P put typ 02 Option 2 00 Terminal O Torque reference 01 Terminal Ol POS3 input selection 02 Terminal O2 o9 No _ 03 Digital Operator Torque reference 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 5 4 122 POSA setting 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW D5 NS a Polarity selection at T P035 torque reference via 00 Signed 00 No 02 01 Depends on the RUN direction 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of m
158. 01 to P131 Select the code you want to no display Among all codes Note that P100 to P131 cannot be used 4 53 4 2 Function Mode Windividual Display of Functions If a specific function is not selected its relevant parameter is not displayed e For details on the display requirements refer to the following table No Display requirements Parameters displayed when the requirements are met 4 A001 01 A005 A006 A011 to A016 A101 A102 A111 to A114 C081 to C083 C121 to C123 2 A001 10 A141 to A143 3 A002 01 03 04 05 b087 4 A017 01 faa d027 P100 to P131 Note that P100 to P131 cannot be 5 A041 01 A046 A047 6 A044 00 01 A041 A042 A043 7 A044 03 04 05 H002 H005 H050 8 A044 04 H060 H061 9 Gee E a Spo H020 to H024 10 Ares z a T Saang H030 to H034 11 Either of A044 or A244 03 04 05 d008 to d010 d012 b040 to b046 H001 H070 to H073 12 Either of A044 or A244 02 b100 to b113 13 A051 01 02 A052 A056 to A058 14 A051 01 02 A053 to A055 A059 d004 A005 A006 A011 to A016 A072 to A078 15 A071 01 02 A101 A102 A111 to A114 C044 C052 C053 C081 to C083 C121 to C123 16 A076 10 A141 to A143 17 A094 01 02 A095 A096 18 A097 01 02 03 04 A131 19 A097 01 02 03 04 A132 20 Any of b012 b212 and b312 02 b015 to b020 21 b021 01 02
159. 02 01 e Set RUN command selection A002 to 01 control circuit terminal block 4 86 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode e The following operations become possible when 20 STA 21 STP and 22 F R are allocated to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Allocating the STP terminal disables the FW and RV terminals Below are the outputs via terminal operation STA STP ON OFF ON OFF F R Output frequency Control Gain Switching Function e This function provides two types of gain and time constant settings for the speed control system proportional integral compensation You can switch over these settings when sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 03 Sensorless vector A044 A244 V f characteristics selection 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 05 Sensor vector C001 to C008 Multi function inputs 25 CAS control gain switching _ 1 to 8 selection H005 H205 Speed response 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 80 00 1 590 H050 H250 PI proportional gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 H051 H251 PI integral gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 H052 H252 P proportional gain 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 H070 For PI proportional gain 9 to 999 9 1000 100 0 switching H071 For PI integral gain switching 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0
160. 02 P062 Multi step position command 2 03 P063 Multi step position command 3 04 P064 Multi step position command 4 05 P065 Multi step position command 5 06 PO66 Multi step position command 6 07 P067 Multi step position command 7 Servo ON Function This function brings the Inverter into speed servo lock status via an input terminal when 05 sensor vector control is selected in V f characteristics selection A044 Allocate 54 SON to the desired multi function input The Inverter does not accept the RUN command unless the SON terminal is turned on when SON is allocated If the SON terminal is turned off during operation the Inverter goes into free run status When the SON terminal is turned on again the Inverter restarts according to the setting of free run stop se lection b088 This function cannot be simultaneously used with the preliminary excitation function 55 FOC If FOC and SON are both allocated to multi function input terminals priority is given to FOC and SON is disabled SON ON ON FWIRV ON ON Does not operate because the SON Output terminal is OFF frequency lt lt lt gt Restarts according to b088 Speed servo lock status Related functions A044 C001 to C008 4 137 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Pulse Train Frequency Input This function allows you to use a pulse train input to the SAP SAN terminals as frequency reference or PID
161. 03 b022 b023 22 b024 01 02 03 b025 b026 23 b050 01 b051 to b054 24 b095 01 02 b090 b096 25 b098 01 02 b099 C085 26 b120 01 b121 to b127 27 P An to C008 05 and A028 to A035 28 Any of C001 to C008 06 A038 A039 29 Any of C001 to C008 07 A053 to A055 A059 30 Any of C001 to C008 08 A292 A293 A294 6212 b213 H203 H204 H206 31 fare to C008 08 and A246 A247 32 Any of C001 to C008 08 and A241 A242 A243 A244 00 01 4 54 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode No Display requirements Parameters displayed when the requirements are met Any of C001 to C008 08 and 33 A244 03 04 H202 H205 H250 H251 H252 Any of C001 to C008 08 and 34 A244 04 H260 H261 Any of C001 to C008 08 2 A244 03 04 and H202 00 heave heed Any of C001 to C008 08 38 A244 03 04 and H202 01 02 teense need Any of C001 to C008 08 and 37 A094 01 02 A295 A296 38 Any of C001 to C008 11 b088 F302 F303 A303 A304 A320 A342 A343 A392 A393 b312 39 Any of C001 to C008 17 b313 H306 40 Any of C001 to C008 18 C102 41 Any of C001 to C008 27 28 29 C101 42 Any of C021 to C026 03 C040 C041 43 Any of C021 to C026 26 C040 C111 44 Any of C021 to C026 02 06 C042 C043 45 Any of C021 to C026 07 C055 to C058 46 Any of C021 to C026 21 C063 47 Any of C021 to C026
162. 067 A068 3 41 In this case the base frequency is rewritten when correcting parameters Change the data to a correct value if a warning occurs Otherwise the motor may burn out depending on the value 2 Checks even if the frequency reference selection A001 is set other than to the Digital Operator 02 3 The jump frequency is rewritten into the value of the subtraction of the jump width lower limit from the jump frequency 5 9 5 2 Warning Function Warning display Target code Condition Base code 091 291 Frequency upper limit A061 A261 gt 092 292 Frequency lower limit A062 A262 gt 095 295 Output irequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 A020 a Free Vif frequency 7 A220 b112 096 Multi step speed reference 1 to 15 A021 to A035 gt Free V f frequencies 1 to 6 S b100 b102 b104 b106 b108 b110 Free V f frequencies 2 to 6 E Free V f frequency 1 b102 b104 b106 b108 b110 b100 Free V f frequency 1 b100 gt Free V f frequency 2 Free V f frequencies 3 to 6 b104 b106 b108 b110 lt b102 Free V f frequencies 1 2 b100 b102 gt Free V f frequency 3 119 Free V f frequencies 4 to 6 b106 b108 b110 lt b104 Free V f frequencies 1 to 3 b100 b102 b104 gt Free V f frequency 4 Free V f frequencies 5 6 b108 b110 lt b106 Free V f frequencies 1 to 4 b100 b102 b104 b106 gt Free V f frequency 5 Free V f frequency 6 b110 lt b108 Free V f frequenci
163. 1 to 400 Hz Frequency precision Digital command 0 01 of the max frequency Analog command 0 2 of the max frequency 25 C 10 C Frequency resolution Digital setting 0 01 Hz Analog setting Max frequency 4000 Terminal O 12 bits 0 to 10 V Terminal O2 12 bits 10 to 10 V Terminal Ol 12 bits O to 20 mA Voltage Frequency characteristics V f optionally changeable at base frequencies of 30 to 400 Hz V f braking constant torque reduction torque sensor less vector control sensor less vector control at 0 Hz Speed fluctuation 0 5 under sensor less vector control or sensor less vector control at 0 Hz Overload current rating 150 60 s 200 3 s Acceleration Deceleration time 0 01 to 3600 0 s line curve selection Starting torque 200 0 3 Hz under sensor less vector control or sensor less vector control at 0 Hz 150 Torque at 0 Hz under sensor less vector control at 0 Hz when a motor size one rank lower than specified is connected DC injection braking Operates when the starting frequency is lower than that in deceleration via the STOP command when the frequency reference is lower than the operation frequency or via an external input braking power time and frequency are variable Standard Digital Operator Setting via A 4 keys External signal Specifications 0 to 10 V DC 10 to 10 V DC Input impedance 10
164. 185 10 cc 00231662 DE 196 123 25 5 00192015 DE 2 188 109 34 0 00162500 DE 240 198 200 228 119 12 38 0 00133057 DE 228 149 42 0 43000020 DE 96 1 22 27000030 DE 84 113 105 101 66 5 7 5 2 1 60 14000047 DE 10100069 DE 116 1 95 06400116 DE 1 108 135 133 120 82 6 5 9 5 3 70 04410167 DE 136 9 5 5 20 120 152 135 94 7 cc 03350219 DE 146 6 00 400V a M 02330307 DE 160 11 4 150 177 160 115 7 2 ______ 01750430 DE 182 6 14 3 01200644 DE 161 88 17 0 195 162 5 185 10 se 00920797 DE 196 123 25 5 00741042 DE 2 188 109 2 34 0 00611236 DE 240 198 200 228 119 12 38 0 00501529 DE 228 149 42 0 7 20 suole oads o c fe od 2 O D Q 7 3 Options Specifications Voltage inverter Type ere aE ay Reference Current value A Inductance mH A2004 0 4 AX RC10700032 DE 3 2 10 70 A2007 0 7 AX RC06750061 DE 6 1 6 75 A2015 1 5 AX RC03510093 DE 9 3 3 51 A2022 2 2 AX RC02510138 DE 13 8 2 51 A2037 3 7 AX RC01600223 DE 22 3 1 60 A2055 5 5 AX RC01110309 DE 30 9 1 11 A2075 7 5 AX RC00840437 DE 43 7 0 84 200V A2110 11 0 AX RC00590614 DE 61 4 0 59 A2150 15 0 AX RC00440859 DE 85 9 0 44 A2185 A2220 18 5 to 22 AX RC00301275 DE 127 5 0 30 A2300 30 AX RC00231662 DE 166 2 0 23 A2370 37 AX RC00192015 DE 201 5 0 19 A2450 45 AX RC00162500 DE 250 0 0 16 A2550 55 AX RC00133057 DE 305 7 0 13 A4004 0 4 AX RC43000020 DE 2
165. 19 32 ang PF Communication with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 01 Data Transmission data Decimal ASCII 6 bytes 7 code Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D To set 5 Hz for station 01 STX j01 01 000500 BCC CR ASCII conversion 02 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 30 30 30 35 0D 4 4 Communication Function Note 1 Data is a value obtained by mulplying the set value by 100 Example 5 Hz 500 000500 ASCII conversion 30 30 30 35 30 30 Note 2 To use the data as PID control feedback data set 1 in the MSB of the data Example 5 500 100500 ASCII conversion 31 30 30 35 30 30 Response frame Normal response Refer to page 4 155 Error response Refer to page 4 155 lt Command 02 gt Sets multi function input terminal status Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01to 32 and EF Communication val all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 02 Data Transmission data 16 bytes i Exclusive OR from station No to data BCC Block check code 2 bytes Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D
166. 212 50 296 189 M6 2 2 RX A4110 RX A4150 3x400 V RX A4185 AX FIR3053 RE 451 252 60 435 229 M6 4 5 RX A4220 RX A4300 AX FIR3064 RE 598 310 70 578 265 M8 7 0 RX A4370 AX FIR3100 RE 8 0 RX A4450 455 110 240 414 80 AX FIR3130 RE 8 6 RX A4550 RX B4750 Book type AX FIR3250 RE 13 0 RX B4900 386 260 135 240 235 RX B411K AX FIR3320 RE 13 2 RX B413K 7 22 7 3 Options Output AC Reactor AX RAOQOOOOOOOOD DE Dimensional Drawing ct Dimensions Weight Reference Kg A B2 C2 D E F AX RAO11500026 DE 120 70 120 80 52 5 5 1 78 AX RAO07600042 DE 120 70 120 80 52 5 5 1 78 AX RAO04100075 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAO03000105 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 2 AX RAO01830180 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 2 AX RAO01150220 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 8 AX RAO00950320 DE 180 85 205 140 55 6 6 5 we AX RAO00630430 DE 180 95 205 140 65 6 9 1 D AX RAO00490640 DE 180 95 205 140 65 6 9 1 D AX RAO16300038 DE 120 70 120 80 52 5 5 1 78 AX RAO11800053 DE 120 80 120 80 52 5 5 2 35 AX RAO07300080 DE 120 80 120 80 62 5 5 2 35 AX RAO04600110 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 AX RAO03600160 DE 180 85 205 140 55 6 6 5 AX RAO02500220 DE 180 95 205 140 55 6 9 1 AX RAO02000320 DE 180 105 205 140 85 6 11 7 7 23 7 3 Options Specifications Voltage eee rh Reference SE value Dee 0 4 AX RAO115
167. 3 00 OI L O O2 Not reversible O O2 Reversible O 01 O L Ol O2 Not reversible Ol O2 Reversible Ol Ol included in operands O O2 Not reversible O O2 Reversible O 10 O included in operands Ol O2 Not reversible Ol O2 Reversible Ol operation result Ol and O are the O2 Reversible operands e To select RS485 for PID feedback transfer data as described below 4 32 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode lt ASCIl C078 00 gt Transfer data using command 01 To transfer feedback data set the most significant byte of frequency data to 1 Example To send 5 Hz Transmission data is set value x 100 and expressed in 6 bytes Set the most significant byte to 1 ASCII conversion Note With ASCII data the set value is frequency Hz lt ModBus RTU C078 01 gt Write data in holding register address 0006h 100 10000 000500 100500 31 30 30 35 30 30 Register No Function name Function code R W onir ceia eme seting Data resolution parameters 0006h PID feedback R W O to 10000 0 01 Note You can read and write data However you can read data only when ModBus RTU is selected for the PID feedback Data cannot be read under other settings lf 03 pulse train input is set for PID feedback A076 the Inverter obtains a percent conversion result 100 at max frequency as a feedback value relative to the inp
168. 3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward driving stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear NO no allocation 01 18 12 02 03 04 05 06 1 When the emergency shutoff function is enabled SW1 ON C001 and C003 are forced to change to 18 RS and 64 EMR respectively You cannot intentionally set 64 If SW1 is turned on and then off C003 is set to no no allocation 4 80 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode The functions switchable via the SET SET3 terminal are F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 A003 A203 A303 A004 A204 A304 A020 A220 A320 A041 A241 A042 A242 A342 A043 A243 A343 A044 A244 A344 A046 A246 A047 A247 A061 A261 A062 A262 A092 A292 A392 A093 A293 A393 A094 A294 A095 A295 A096 A296 b012 b212 b312 b013 b213 b313 H002 H202 H003 H203 H004 H204 HO005 H205 H006 H206 H306 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H030 H230 H031 H231 H032 H232 H033 H233 H034 H234 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 HO060 H260 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2
169. 3 0 0 69 8 96 128 Motor current A 109 150 200 Ratio to the rated current of the Inverter e The frequency characteristics are integrated with the above b012 b212 b312 set values A general purpose motor requires reduced load current because the lower the output frequency is the lower the cooling capability of its self cooling fan e The reduced torque characteristics are designed to fit the heat radiation of a general purpose motor Multiplied by the time limit characteristics set in b012 b212 b312 for each frequency Torque x1 0 x0 8 x0 6 0 5 0 6 4 47 Constant Torque Characteristics Torque 16 50 20 60 Inverter output frequency Hz Base frequency Example RX A2150 Rated current 64 A b012 64 A Base frequency 60 Hz Output frequency 20 Hz Trip time s 60 3 0 0 55 8 76 8 102 4 Motor current A 87 2 120 160 Ratio to the rated current of the Inverter Do not skip this setting when using a constant torque motor 025 5 60 Inverter output frequency Hz Example RX A2150 Rated current 64 A b012 64 A Output frequency 2 5 Hz Output current value A b020 b018 b016 O b015 b017 b019 A004 A204 A304 Max frequency Hz 4 2 Function Mode Free Setting To protect the motor according to load you can freely set the electronic thermal characteristics Below is the setting range Output current Torque value A x1 0 b02
170. 4 01 Power supply RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Example 10 b004 02 Power supply RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Inverter is stopped 3 ieee OFF Undervoltage ON Fs OFF Inverter is stopped ON f L OF Inverter is running Power supply RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Power supply RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Power supply RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Note 1 You can allocate the momentary power interruption signal IP 08 and the undervoltage signal UV 09 to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 selection C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Note 2 If power interruption is retained for 1 second or longer refer to the reset description Reset page 4 85 Restarting Procedure Frequency matching restart This method restarts the Inverter by detecting frequency and rotation direction based on the motor s residual voltage Active Frequency Matching restart The Inverter starts output at the frequency set in starting frequency selection b030 and searches for a point where frequency and voltage are balanced to restart the Inverter while holding current at the Active Frequency Matching restart l
171. 4 125 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used 1 It is recommended that position control feedfoward gain adjustment should be started with P022 2 00 To reduce the position deviation between the main and sub motors increase the feedforward gain If motor hunting occurs reduce the feedforward gain 2 It is recommended that position loop gain adjustment should be started with P023 2 00 To increase positioning accuracy and holding power increase the position loop gain If an increased position loop gain causes hunting reduce the position loop gain 3 Make sure that the N D setting is within the range of 1 50 lt N D lt 20 N Electronic gear ratio numerator P020 D Electronic gear ratio denominator P021 Example Synchronous Operation Master Inverter Slave Inverter AP BP 0 SAP SBP AN BN SAN SBN EG5 EG5 EAP EBP O EAP EBP O EAN EBN EAN EBN For the Inverter master Inverter on the main motor side you can select either the speed control or pulse train position control mode For the Inverter slave Inverter on the sub motor side you need to select the pulse train position control mode Configuration Example Main motor Number of encoder pulses 1024 eSub motor Number of encoder pulses 3000 Main motor rom Sub motor rpm 2 1 For operation under the above conditions set the following data in the slave Inverter Pulse train mode selection P013 00 pulse with 90 phase difference
172. 5 4 152 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 153 lt Command 07 gt Writes data to a specified setting item e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command Parameter Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 t932 and PF Gommunicaton with all stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 07 Parameter Parameter No for data 4 bytes 1 Parameter data Data Decimal ASCII code 8 bytes 2 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 1 Allowable parameter ranges are shown below From F002 A001 b001 C001 H001 and P001 For F001 use command 01 2 Refer to command 06 e Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 155 Negative response Refer to page 4 155 lt Command 08 gt Initializes each set value Initialization conforms to the setting of initialization selection b084 If b084 is 00 the trip data is cleared e Transmission frame Frame format STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 10 32 and Ee Communicauon with al
173. 5 06 07 08 09 10 Motor capacity kW 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Motor capacity kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 Motor capacity kW 90 110 132 150 160 lt Holding Register Number List 3rd Setting gt Register Function name pungton R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code F302 3103h HIGH R W 3rd acceleration time 1 ane 1 to 360000 0 01 s 3104h LOW R W 4 209 4 4 Communication Function Pegisi Function name paneton R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code F303 3105h HIGH R W 3rd deceleration time 1 T 1 to 360000 0 01 s 3106h LOW R W 3107h to Not used 3202h lt Holding Register Number List Function Mode 3rd Setting gt Regier Function name paneton R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 3203h 3rd base frequency A303 R W 30 to 3rd max frequency 1 Hz 3204h 3rd maximum frequency A304 R W 30 to 400 1 Hz nN 3205h to 3215h Not used a a 3216h reed R W 9 3rd multi step speed HIGH 0 Starting frequency to 3rd max 0 01 Hz n reference 0 A320 frequency 3217h LOW R W 3218h to 323Bh Not used 323Ch 3rd manual torque boost A342 RW 0to 200 0 1 voltage 323Dh 3rd manual torque boost A343 RW 0to 500 0 1 frequency 323Eh 3rd vit charact
174. 5 kw RX A4055 7 5 kw RX A4075 11 kw RX A4110 15 kw RX A4150 18 5 kW RX A4185 22 kW RX A4220 30 kW RX A4300 37 kW RX A4370 45 kw RX A4450 55 kW RX A4550 75 kW RX B4750 90 kw RX B4900 Ene 110 kw RX B411K 132 kW RX B413K 1 1 Functions International Standards Models EC Directives and UL cUL Standards The RX Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL cUL standard requirements for worldwide use Classification Applicable standard EC Directives EMC Directive EN61800 3 2004 Low voltage Directive EN61800 5 1 2003 UL cUL Standards UL508C Human Environment friendly High performance General purpose Inverters Suitable for Various Advanced Applications MHigh Performance High Starting Torque With the vector control and auto tuning functions the RX Series has achieved high starting torque in excess of 200 at 0 3 Hz Trip Suppression This Inverter features two trip suppression functions Overcurrent trip suppression function to suppress overcurrent trip during acceleration and Overvoltage suppression function during deceleration to suppress overvoltage trip during deceleration Therefore the RX Series provides tough operational capabilities regardless of the severe time setting of acceleration and deceleration Various Applications Sensor less Vector Control at 0 Hz The RX Series provides sensor less vector control which is useful for up down applications It can provide a high torque of 1
175. 50 even at a speed reference of 0 Hz 150 torque is available when the Inverter capacity is increased by one rank This function contributes to simplification of control programs and extension of the service life of the brake Emergency Shutoff Function By switching the dedicated switch SW1 this function enables you to change the multi function input input 3 to the emergency shutoff input You can directly turn off a motor control power module without operating the software This function simplifies construction of safety applications Built in Braking Circuit up to 22 kW The Inverter models with 22 kW or lower capacity incorporate a braking transistor enabling space saving configuration for applications that need rapid acceleration and stop Restart Speed Search Function For a free running motor e g a fan motor this function checks the direction of rotation and frequency enabling smooth restart of the motor High torque Multi operation The RX Series enables balanced torque control for the whole system in proportion to multiple motor loads Deceleration Stop During Power Failure During a power failure or momentary power interruption the RX Series can decelerate and stop a motor by using the motor braking energy 1 2 M IAI9AQ Overview 1 1 Functions Human Environment friendly Features More Simplified Parameter Settings and View Only parameters that have been changed from the default settings can be vie
176. 5h LOW R W 1656h to Not used 1665h 1666h to Not used 1685h 1686h to Not used 2102h 4 205 4 4 Communication Function Data on H003 motor capacity selection is the following code data Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Motor capacity kW 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Motor capacity kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 Motor capacity kW 90 110 132 150 160 lt Holding Register Number List 2nd Setting gt Rede Function name pangion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution Eg No code F202 2103h HIGH R W 2nd acceleration time 1 1 to 360000 0 01 s TI F202 c 2104h LOW R W z F203 2105h R W ie HIGH 5 2nd deceleration time 1 a 1 to 360000 0 01 s r 2106h LOW R W 2107h to Not used 2202h lt Holding Register Number List Function Mode 2nd Setting gt Reefer Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 2203h 2nd base frequency A203 R W 30 to 2nd max frequency 1 Hz 2204h 2nd max frequency A204 R W 30 to 400 1 Hz 2205h to Not used 2215h 2216h Fez R W 2nd multi step speed HIGH 0 Starting frequency to 2nd max 0 01 Hz reference 0 A220 frequency 2217h LOW R W 2218h to Not us
177. 6 JG to the desired multi function input Jogging Frequency JG w Il Output frequency i i i A038 N e Setting a high jogging frequency causes the Inverter to easily trip Adjust the set value of jogging frequency A038 to prevent the Inverter from tripping 4 18 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Functio n Mode BJogging Stop Selection Note To perform the jogging operation turn on the JG terminal before the FW or RV terminal Do the same if the RUN command source is set to the Digital Operator Example 1 gl l FW T F Output NN frequency Example 2 we Fw Deceleration Normal 7i operation Jogging operation Oo Output frequency Free running Accelerates according to the b088 setting With jogging stop selection A039 set to 00 01 or With A039 set to 03 04 or 05 jogging functions even 02 jogging does not function if the FW signal is turned if the FW signal is turned on first However if the JG signal on first Torque B oost is turned off before the FW signal the motor coasts to a free running stop Compensates for the voltage drop caused by the primary resistance of the motor or by wiring to suppress torque reduction at a low speed range e To select the automatic torque boost for A041 A241 set motor capacity selection HO03 H203 and motor pole number selection H004 H204 according to your motor
178. 7 Pulse train frequency 5 00 Addition A B w A143 Operator selection 01 Subtraction A B 00 No 02 Multiplication A x B Frequency addition 0 00 to 99 99 A145 amount 100 0 to 400 0 BOP Ne Hg Ered en vad iti n 00 Add A145 value to output frequency 4 41 A146 roguency 01 Subtract A145 value from output 00 No direction frequency 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 28 Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default aS Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation Slaag Pee Ue ale 9 46 60 25 No 5 during acceleration g asi nese ola eee o 25 No D during acceleration Q 4 39 S a152 EL S curve ratio 1 10 4o50 25 No during deceleration 2 7 rae 7 S asg EENT E lS oB 25 No during deceleration 00 Alarm 01 0 Hz start t 02 Frequency matching start g poo Relny eelgeuon 03 Trip after frequency matching 99 No _ deceleration stop z a 4 42 04 Active Frequency Matching restart 5 Allowable momentary 2 b002 power interruption 0 3 to 25 0 1 0 No s 5 time b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 4 85 5 Momentary power 00 Disabled gt b004 interruption o1 Enabled 00 No o S undervoltage trip 02 Disabled during stop and deceler
179. 7 4 3 1 Multi functi Example Terminals 12 11 ON d006 sabuencnict B Fp BBB Terminals AL2 15 14 13 OFF 4 2 g 15 14 13 g 1 0 00 to 99 99 Output frequency 100 0 to 999 9 d007 monitor 1000 to 9999 Yes 4 2 after conversion 1000 to 3996 10000 to 39960 Output frequency x Conversion factor of b086 Real frequenc 7400 101190 d008 a y 99 9 to 0 00 to 99 99 Hz 43 100 0 to 400 0 doog Torque reference 200 to 200 4 3 monitor Torque bias d010 A 200 to 200 4 3 monitor do12 OVtput torque 200 to 200 4 3 monitor do13 OVtput voltage 0 to 600 vV 4 3 monitor d014 Input power monitor 0 0 to 999 9 kW 4 4 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter f Default CHEUNG Function name Monitor or data range s during Unit Page No setting 3 operation 0 0 to 999 9 d015 Power ON time 1000 to 9999 4 4 monitor 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 0 to 9999 d016 Total RUN time 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 h 4 4 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 F 0 to 9999 d017 a ume 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 i h 4 4 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 doig Fin temperature 020 to 200 0 s g ag monitor doig Motor temperature 020 to 200 0 oC 45 monitor Life assessment fi ii ff i f ON 1 Capacitor
180. 75 kw 15 100 15 100 1 5 kW 15 100 15 100 2 2 kW 15 100 15 100 3 7 kW 15 100 15 100 5 5 kW 15 100 15 100 7 5 kW 15 100 15 100 4 65 4 2 Function Mode Voltage 200 V class 400 V class Capacity Max fc kHz Derating at fc 15 kHz Max fc kHz E if Sy cane ee 11 kW 12 90 41 4 max 15 100 15 kW 12 95 60 8 A max 14 95 30 4 A max 18 5 kW 10 90 68 4 A max 10 90 34 2 A max 22 kW 7 70 66 5 A max 6 75 36 0 A max 30 kW 5 80 96 8 A max 10 75 43 5 A max 37 kW 10 75 108 7 A max 8 80 60 0 A max 45 kw 5 70 127 4 A max 75 68 2 A max 55 kW 5 70 154 A max 60 67 2 A max 75 kW 85 126 7 A max 110 kW 70 151 9 A max 9 6 6 90 kW 4 75 132 0 A max 6 3 132 kW 60 156 0 A max 200 V class 22 kW 18 5 kW 400 V elass go kW 75kW 45kW aad 30 KW 15 kW V4 l RNS SE E 90 18 5 kW Oo Oo 5 85 S 80 30 KW 37 kKW g 75 37kW 3 70 3 coo KW 2 G5 e eefa ee canes Coen 2 j 6 860 6 55 kW 55 052 4 6 8 10 12 1415 052 4 6 8 10 12 1415 Carrier frequency kHz Carrier frequency KHz lf the above maximum rated carrier frequency and the derating value at 15 kHz are exceeded the Inverter may be damaged and or the service life may be shortened Parameter Initialization You can initialize the rewritten set values and reset to the fa
181. A242 A342 A043 A243 A343 Base frequency 100 lf you raise the set value of the manual torque boost be careful about motor overexcitation Otherwise the motor may burn out eIn manual torque boost frequency A043 A243 A343 set a ratio based on the base frequency as 100 4 20 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Automatic Torque Boost lf the automatic torque boost is selected in the torque boost selection A041 A241 01 it operates to adjust the output frequency and voltage automatically depending on the load level In actual control the automatic torque boost is used along with the manual torque boost e To select the automatic torque boost set motor capacity selection HO03 H203 and motor pole number selection H004 H204 correctly according to your motor e To avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration set the AVR selection to Always ON A081 00 e If the automatic torque boost cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust each item as shown in the following table Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment item Gradually increase the voltage setting of the manual torque boost A042 A242 Insufficient torque at low Gradually increase the slip compensation gain of the automatic speed torque boost nee Motor does notrun at low Gradually increase the voltage compensation gain of the automatic A046 A246 speed torque boost Reduc
182. Cat No 1560 E2 03 X Customised to your machine Model RX 200 V Class Three Phase Input 0 4 to 55 kW 400 V Class Three Phase Input 0 4 to 132 kW USER S MANUAL Introduction Introduction Thank you for choosing the general purpose Inverter RX Series This User s Manual hereinafter called this manual describes the parameter setting methods required for installation wiring and operation of the RX model as well as troubleshooting and inspection methods This manual should be delivered to the actual end user of the product After reading this manual keep it handy for future reference This manual describes the specifications and functions of the product as well as the relations between them You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible with the product Intended readers This manual is intended for Those with knowledge of the workings of electricity qualified electric engineers or the equivalent and also in charge of e Introducing the control equipment e Designing the control system e Installing and or connecting the control equipment e Field management Read and Understand this Manual Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are f
183. D 1 R L1 Conduction S L2 PD 1 No conduction R 1 U T1 D2 PD 1 S L2 Conduction 2 wae Z pa TS PD No conduction O 5 PD 1 T L3 Conduction T W E g R L1 N Conduction S D4 O N R L1 No conduction S L2 N Conduction a Oe ee 5 N S L2 No conduction N Regenerative braking circuit kej T L3 N Conduction 3 D6 O N T L3 No conduction A U T1 P No conduction gt TR1 o P U T1 Conduction 5 V T2 P No conduction Q TR2 P V T2 Conduction a x W T3 P No conduction ITR3 oO P W T3 Conduction gt D f5 5 U T1 N Conduction 5 2 TR4 Q N U T1 No conduction D V T2 N Conduction TR5 N V T2 No conduction WI T3 N Conduction TR6 N W T3 No conduction 3 RB P No conduction 2 P RB Conduction S TR7 RB N No conduction z gt N RB No conduction a 6 8 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Measurement Methods of I O Voltage Current and Electric Power Below is a general measurement device for input output voltages current and electric power Power supply oe Measurement point Measurement device Note Measurement value reference Power supply Between R S S T and T Moving iron voltmeter All 200 V class 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz voltage n a effective 400 v class 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz EN 9 Er Es Et PE Rectifier voltmeter values i Power
184. Default setting Unit pay 00 Disabled A051 a pr 01 Enabled 00 lt 02 Frequency control A052 set value A052 DC injection braking 0 0 to 400 0 5 Hz frequency A053 De injection braking g 0 0 s delay time 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 50 A054 DC injection braking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 40 A055 DC injection braking time 0 0 to 60 0 0 5 S A056 DC injection braking 00 Edge operation 01 method selection 01 Level operation E A057 Startup DC injection 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 0 9 A o braking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 0 A058 startup DE injection 9 016 60 0 0 0 s braking time rere DC injection braking 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 tig carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 Related functions C001 to C008 4 24 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode HDC Injection Braking Carrier Frequency You can set a DC injection braking carrier frequency in A059 Note that setting a 5 kHz or higher frequency automatically reduces the braking power Refer to the following figure DC injection braking power limit Max braking power oe w AOON OO N 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 DC injection braking carrier frequency DC Injection Braking Power Limit WExternal DC Injection Braking Allocate 07 DB to any of multi function inputs C001 to C008 DC injection braking can be applied by turning on off the DB terminal regardless of DC injection braking selection A051 e Set a braking power le
185. Disconnect the externally connected power supply wires R L1 S L2 T L3 the motor connection wires U T1 V T2 W T3 and the regenerative braking resistance P RB Prepare a tester Usable range is 1 Q measurement resistance Checking method e The quality can be judged by measuring the conduction state of Inverter main circuit terminal blocks R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 RB P and N while alternating the tester polarity Note 1 Before checking measure the voltage between P and N at DC voltage range in advance and confirm that the smoothing capacitor is sufficiently discharged 6 7 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Note 2 A nearly infinite value is shown in a no conduction state However the value may not be infinite if the momentary conduction occurs through the influence of the smoothing capacitor The value shown ranges from a few to a few dozen Q in a conduction state The Inverter or converter is in good shape if the values from various parameters are nearly equal though they are not consistent depending on the types of elements or testers Note 3 The regenerative braking circuit is provided for Inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or lower Tester polarity Bee oulelment PD 1 P RB A red black Value _ Gonvenerunit O O O2 nei Menerunit o a Di R L1 PD 1 No conduction P
186. E signal turns on When 02 APR2 or 03 HAPR is selected in P012 the Inverter performs absolute position con trol with reference to the absolute position from its origin Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 ASR speed control mode V2 control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode P012 selection 02 APR2 absolute position control mode 00 03 HAPR high resolution absolute position control mode P011 Encoder pulses 128 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 1024 Pulse Number of encoder pulses P023 Position loop gain 00 to 99 99 100 0 Position loop gain 0 50 rad s Speed deviation error 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 120 0 poet detection level DSE signal output level 1 20 Hz H004 Motor pole number 5 4 6 8 10 Select the number of motor poles 4 Pole selection Multi function inputs 47 PCLR position deviation clear C001 to C008 np 48 STAT pulse train position command input 1 to 8 selection aul permission Multi function output C021 to C025 terminals 11 to 15 selection 22 DSE excessive speed deviation m Relay output AL2 coze AL1 function selection Os Related functions A001 P013 4 120 suoljoun Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Sensor Vector Control Speed Control To use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 to 05 V2 and V2 control mode selec tion P012 to 00
187. External trip Emergency shutoff trip CT error Communication error Option error etc Ambient Storage g temperature 10 C to 50 C 20 C to 65 C 20 to 90 RH with no condensation G Humidity 2 2 RX AM1004 to A0220 at Vibration 5 9 m s 0 6G 10 to 55 Hz RX AQ1300 to A0550 B4750 to B413K S 2 94 m s 0 3G 10 to 55 Hz Q O Location At a maximum altitude of 1 000 m indoors without corrosive gases or dust 2 Feedback option Sensor vector control 2 6 Digital input option 4 digit BCD 16 bit binary Other options Braking resistor AC reactor DC reactor Digital Operator cables Noise filter Braking unit etc Complies with the test method specified in JIS C0040 1999 Note Insulation distance complies with UL CE standards 7 5 7 2 Dimensional Drawing 7 2 Dimensional Drawing MRX A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4040 l ION IAM g of A o Inne OE gt 7 6 Specifications 7 2 Dimensional Drawing MRX A2055 A2075 A2110 24 5 A4055 A4075 A4110 210 189 2 67
188. Free setting electronic b017 RIW 0to400 1 Hz thermal frequency 2 4313h Fee setting electronic b018 R W 0 to Rated current 0 1 A thermal current 2 4314h Tee setting electronic b019 RIW 0to400 1 Hz thermal frequency 3 1315h Free setting electronic b020 R W 0 to Rated current 0 1 A thermal current 3 0 Disabled 1 Enabled during acceleration constant speed 1316h Overload limit selection b021 R W 2 Enabled during constant speed 3 Enabled during acceleration constant speed accelerated during regeneration 200 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 5 1317h Overload limit level b022 R W 200 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 1318h Overload limit parameter b023 R W 10 to 3000 0 01 s 4 186 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function egite Function name Bubeton R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 Disabled 1 Enabled during acceleration constant speed 1319h Overload limit selection 2 b024 R W 2 Enabled during constant speed 3 Enabled during acceleration constant speed accelerated during regenera tion a 200 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 131Ah Overload limit level 2 b025 R W 200 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 131Bh Overload limit parameter 2 b026 R W 10 to 3000 0 01 s 131Ch Overcurrent suppression b027 R W ne Disabled function 1 Enabled Active Frequency Match 200 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 131Dh ing restar
189. H222 Motor parameter L 0 00 to 655 3 Dependson Mei a motor capacity H023 H223 Motor parameter lo 0 00 to 655 3 Dependson the i a motor capacity H024 H224 Motor parameter J 0 001 to 9999 2 Depends an Meili ko motor capacity Ho30 H230 Motor parameter R1 9 000 to 65 53 Depends onthe I i auto tuning data motor capacity H031 H231 Motor parameter R2 0 000 to 65 53 Depends on the Q auto tuning data motor capacity H032 H232 Motor parameter L 00 to 655 3 Perens PNG ane auto tuning data motor capacity H033 H233 Motor parameter lo 0 00 to 655 3 Depends on the A auto tuning data motor capacity H034 H234 Motor parameter J 9 001 to 9999 Depends onthe l ean auto tuning data motor capacity 1 For 1st control A044 all items 00 to 05 are selectable However for 2nd control A244 and 3rd control A344 the selectable range is 00 to 04 and 00 to 01 respectively 2 Convert moment of inertia J into motor shaft data The larger the J value the faster the response resulting in a steep torque rise the smaller the J value the slower the response resulting in a gradual torque rise After setting the J value adjust the response speed in speed response H005 H205 4 113 4 2 Function Mode Arbitrary Motor Parameter e For arbitrary settings of motor parameters the function codes vary depending on the setting of 1st 2nd control and on the set value of the motor parameter selection
190. H224 H034 startup startup During violerhunting Reduce the speed response H005 H205 deceleration Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 Reduce motor parameter lo gradually down to set Immediately Overcurrent or parameter x 0 8 H023 H223 H033 after overvoltage protection is deceleration activated Set AVR selection A081 to 00 always ON or 01 A081 always OFF Low frequency Rotation is not constant Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 operation A001 A044 A244 F001 b040 b041 to b044 HO02 H202 H003 H203 Belated tuhcti ns H004 H204 H005 H205 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 H060 H260 H061 H261 4 115 4 2 Function Mode Note 1 Make sure that the carrier frequency b083 is not lower than 2 1 kHz If the carrier frequency is at 2 1 Hz or lower the Inverter does not operate normally Note 2 Set a torque limit value b041 to b044 while keeping the value a calculated with the following formula at 200 or lower Otherwise the motor may burn out a Torque limit set value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example If the Inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit set value for a 200 calculated with the above formula is as follows Torque limit set value b041 to b044 a x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106
191. Inverter Functions as a reset key if RESET an Inverter error occurs Mode key Switches between the monitor mode d0O1D the basic C function mode FOOD and the extended function mode A000 b000 COOO HOOD J Enter key Enters the set value To change the set value be sure to press the Enter key Increment key Changes the mode A N Also increases the set value of each function 3 8 Operation e 3 4 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Operator Name Function Decrement key Changes the mode Also decreases the set value of each function VY Display System and Key Sequence of Each Code e This section explains the examples of typical operation Basic display Complete display and the extended function mode U as a special operation This operation can be performed when other display modes are selected The display indicates the setting of b038 when the power is turned on For details refer to Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON page 4 56 When b038 01 factory default 4c for output frequency monitor d001 is displayed Press the Mode key to display 777 3 1 Note The Digital Operator display varies depending on the settings of display selection b037 ini tial screen selection b038 and user parameter automatic setting function selection b039 For details refer to Display Selection page 4 53
192. Inverter in the VC special VP or free V F setting control mode calculate the total capacity of the motors and select the closest value in the motor capacity selection When automatic torque boost is used improper setting of this parameter may result in torque reduction or motor hunting e The motor parameters for sensorless vector control O Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control can be selected from the following three types Motor parameter of a standard motor Motor parameter measured by offline auto tuning Arbitrarily set motor parameter For 3rd control motor parameters specified for 1st control are used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Constant torque characteristics VC 01 Special reduced torque characteristics A044 A244 Vif characteristics APPa VET A344 salocton 02 V f free setting 00 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 1 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 1 05 Sensor vector control V2 1 ee ae 00 Standard motor parameter H002 H202 pare 01 Auto tuning parameter 00 selection 02 Online auto tuning parameter H003 H203 Motor capacity 0 2 to 160 0 Factory default kW selection Hoo4 H204 Motor pole number 24 6 8710 4 Pole selection H020 H220 Motor parameter R1 0 000 to 65 53 Dependsonthe o motor capacity H021 H221 Motor parameter R2 0 000 to 65 53 opens nine ty motor capacity H022
193. J t i 219 k coe co co Extended function mode B Fe Extended function mode C or 3 8 J z La L Extended function mode H Ec Extended function mode P H T T H i g g t fs 8 Key sequence and display system of extended function mode U See the next page DI gt 3 13 3 6 Parameter Transition E Display System and Key Sequence of Extended Function Mode U The extended function mode U is the parameter to optionally register or automatically record other extended function codes and differs in operation from other extended function modes Operation and sequence of code display Monitor Function modes Operation and sequence of code display Extended function mode U Operation and sequence of code display Displaying another mode from extended function mode U Operation and sequence of monitor data display Monitor Function Extende
194. LL LT LN LN 1 Pulse train input SBP l SBN Forward Reverse command Detected pulses Reverse Forward Time 4 124 suoi un4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Mode 2 Forward pulse train Reverse pulse train Forward pulse train input SBP l j l j l SBN LS sr Reverse pulse train input Detected pulses Forward Reverse Time Electronic Gear Function This function allows you to set a gain relative to position command or position feedback and to change the main sub motor rotation ratio particularly for synchronous operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit P019 Electronic gear setting 00 Position feedback side FB 00 _ position selection 01 Position command side REF P020 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 4 _ numerator P021 Electronic gear ratio 1 to 9999 4 denominator Position control P022 0 00 to 655 3 0 00 feedforward gain 1 P023 Position loop gain 2 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 0 50 rad s Note Below are the block diagrams of the electronic gear function First order lag filter Position control feedforward gain Speed command P019 00 FB Position command Electronic gear Position feedback First order lag filter Position control feedforward gain P019 01 REF Position command Speed command Position feedback
195. Mode lt Group F Basic Function Parameters gt Output Frequency Setting Monitor e Set the Inverter output frequency e With frequency reference selection A001 set to 02 you can set the output frequency with F001 For other methods refer to the A001 section in Frequency Reference Selection page 4 10 Eg If A001 is set other than to 02 F001 functions as the frequency reference monitor lf a frequency is set in F001 the same value is automatically set in multi step speed reference 0 A020 To set the 2nd 3rd control use the 2nd multi step speed reference 0 A220 3rd multi step speed reference 0 A320 or use F001 with the SET SET3 terminal turned on To set using the SET SETS3 terminal allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input 5 When this monitor is used to display a target value of the PID function the monitor value is Q displayed as a percentage 100 Max frequency gt Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 7 F001 Output frequency a setting monitor A020 Multi step speed reference 0 0 0 Starting frequency to Hz 2nd multi step 1st 2nd 3rd max frequency A220 6 0 speed reference 0 A320 3rd multi step speed reference 0 Related functions A001 A020 A220 A320 C001 to C008 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Acceleration Deceleration Time
196. N RUN command LED indicator ON e Data LED indicator frequency ON e Data display Displays the set value in d001 e If an error occurs the error code is displayed on the data display In this case refer to Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations and make the necessary changes to remedy Parameter Initialization Initialize the parameters y STOP e Set parameter No b084 to 02 and press the key while holding down the and X keys simultaneously Parameter Settings Set the parameters required for a test run y e Set the motor capacity selection H003 and the motor pole number selection H004 No load Operation Start the no load motor via the Digital Operator e Display parameter No F001 set the output frequency using the A key and the x key and press the key Then press the key to rotate the motor Actual Load Operation Connect the mechanical system and operate via the Digital Operator y e If there are no difficulties with the no load operation connect the mechanical system to the motor and operate via the Digital Operator Operation Refer to Chapter 4 Functions and set the necessary parameters uonesado e Operation e 3 3 Test Run Operation 3 3 Test Run Operation Power On Checkpoints Before Turning On the Power e Make sure tha
197. O window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 When C062 is used to select the alarm code output the multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 are forcibly changed to ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 Acn Alarm code output respectively 00 01 03 07 40 05 No po uoiesado 4 93 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 40 Operation e Analog monitor 3 7 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C027 FM selection 00 01 Output frequency Output current 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 Output torque Digital output frequency Output voltage Input voltage Thermal load rate LAD frequency Digital current monitor Motor temperature Fin temperature Not used 00 No 4 107 4 116 C028 AM selection 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 11 Output frequency Output current Output torque Output voltage Input voltage Thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature Fin temperature Output torque lt signed gt 13 Not used 00 No C029 AMI selection 00 01 Output frequency Output current 02 04 05 06 07 09 10 14 Output torque Ou
198. Overload limit parameter 1 0 s 0 1 to 30 00 b026 Overload limit parameter 2 1 0 s Oven adiwarnina sianal 00 Enabled during acceleration C040 S tbit ki 9 deceleration constant speed 01 P 01 Enabled only during constant speed C041 Overload warning level 0 0 Does not operate Rated current 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current A C111 Overload warning level 2 75 to 132 kW Rated current Outputs OL and OL2 signals when reaching the overload warning level Related functions C001 to C008 C021 to C025 C026 Overload Limit 4 49 e The Inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation in order to lower output frequency automatically according to the overload limit parameter once the motor current reaches the overload limit e This function prevents an overcurrent trip caused by excessive moment of inertia during acceleration or caused by rapid load fluctuations during constant speed operation e You can set two types of overload limit functions in b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 e To switch between b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 allocate 39 OLR to a multi function input and then turn it on off e The overload limit level sets a current value for this function to work e The overload limit parameter sets a time of deceleration from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz When this function operates the acceler
199. Position range i i 0 to 268435456 When APR2 is selected ple abo oveaien 0 to 1073741823 When HAPR is selected easiest a forward Position range s 268435456 to 0 When APR2 is selected pons ee 1073741823 to 0 When HAPR is selected EORR 4 131 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Multi step position command 0 P060 01 Multi step position command 1 P061 02 Multi step position command 2 P062 A 03 Multi step position command 3 P063 ii Teaching selection 04 Multi step position command 4 P064 9 _ 05 Multi step position command 5 P065 06 Multi step position command 6 P066 07 Multi step position command 7 P067 Multi step C169 speed position 0 to 200 x 10 ms 0 ms determination time do29 Position command _ 4973741823 to 1073741823 monitor d030 Current position _ 4973741823 to 1073741823 monitor 45 ORT orientation 54 SON servo ON 66 CP1 position command selection 1 67 CP2 position command selection 2 Multi function inputs 68 CP3 position command selection 3 COAT io Cae 1 to 8 selection 69 ORL zero return limit signal a 70 ORG zero return startup signal 71 FOT forward driving stop 72 ROT reverse driving stop 73 SPD speed position switching C102 Reset selection 03 Does not initialize internal data during reset 0 Ab
200. Press the Increment Decrement key to scroll through codes in the code display and to increase decrease the number in the data display Press either key until you see the desired code or data For fast forwarding press and hold either key Press the Mode key in the code display to display its monitor value to Pe lo i I Q as 74 C Monitor display O j or J p A Press the Mode Enter key in the monitor display to return to its code display PR mr lt Note By factory default appears at power on z Ad Press the Mode key in this status to display g O 0 i za y cma Iid Function Extended Function Mode A Press the Mode key in the code display to display its data y Data display 1 2 To upper limit Data setting a i a rau lo L A y Vv bg Press the Increment Decrement key to increase decrease the mms HOU number A Set the desired number Press the Enter key in the data display to fix the data and to return to the code display C Press the Mode key in the data display to return to its code display without changing the data LOM I Ca iJi t
201. R to any of the multi function inputs While the ATR terminal is turned on the torque reference input is enabled In torque reference input selection P033 you can select one of the three analog inputs or the input via the Digital Operator The torque control speed depends on the balance between torque and load To prevent the Inverter from running out of control set a speed limit value in P039 forward or P040 reverse Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Input via terminal O P033 Torque reference input 01 Input via terminal Ol 00 o selection 02 Input via terminal O2 03 Input via the Digital Operator 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P034 Torque reference setting 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Torque reference when P033 03 P035 Polarity selection at 00 As per sign 00 i torque reference via O2 01 Depends on the RUN direction P039 Speed limit value in 4 09 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 Hz torque control forward P040 Speed limit valuein 4 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 Hz torque control reverse 4 122 suoiun4 1 to 8 selection 4 Related functions d009 d010 d012 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled P036 Torque bias mode 01 Set via the Digital Operator 00 02 Set via terminal O2 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P037 Torque bias value 180 to 180
202. RUN command Turning on the RUN command starts automatic operation in the following sequence Vv Vv v Vv bl 7v 1 1st AC excitation Motor does not run 2 2nd AC excitation Motor does not run 3 1st DC excitation Motor does not run 4 V f operation Motor accelerates up to 80 of the base frequency 5 SLV operation Motor accelerates up to x of the base frequency 6 2nd DC excitation Motor does not run 7 The auto tuning result is displayed Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 When auto tuning without motor rotation is selected H001 01 steps 4 and 5 are not performed The rotation frequency in step 5 is defined as follows T is whichever larger value of acceleration time or deceleration time in step 4 When T lt 0 lt 50s x 40 When 50s lt T lt 100s x 20 When 100s lt T x 10 The auto tuning result is displayed as follows lormal end Abnormal end If auto tuning abnormally ends perform it again Press the STOP RESET key to clear the display If a trip occurs during auto tuning the auto tuning processing is forced to stop No error message appears Trip display is given higher priority After removing the cause of a trip perform the auto tuning again If the auto tuning is interrupted by STOP command input by pressing the STOP key or by turning off the RUN c
203. RX A2150 A2185 A2220 A4150 A4185 A4220 2 07 250 229 24 5 80 7 R o QO amp 8 Boe oO N V L 229 4 Y 5 ol i i rel i ET 244 7 8 suoljeoyioeds 7 2 Dimensional Drawing MRX A2300 A4300 265 2 10 45 80_ y A 79 510 540 368 a gt AUANIANOADIANIAA MANMAN DIANOAN UAN 00 LULU 34 e TT TTT i lt 10 265 y 310 Specifications O00000 195 O e o oO a i y G 7 9 7 2 Dimensional Drawing MRX A2370 A2450 A4370 A4450 A4550 2 12 300 V 79 520 550 277 TT 7 gummi 300 390 suoljeoyioeds 250
204. S Holds 00 NO Emergency no Holds 01 NC mergency i shutoff setting setting shutoff no setting Disabled while SW1 while SW1 function allocation while SW1 3 5 is ON is ON Reset is ON 2 11 1 With the terminal with input terminal selection 18 RS NO NC selection is fixed to 00 NO 2 When C003 is 64 EMR C013 is fixed to 01 NC 3 If 18 RS has been allocated to a multi function input terminal except for 3 other than terminal 1 before switch SW1 is set to ON the input terminal selection for the relevant terminal will be automatically changed to no no allocation by setting SW1 to ON This is done in order to prevent duplicated allocation of this function Then even if SW1 is reset to OFF the initial allocation cannot be restored The User should Re allocate the terminal function Example When the multi function input terminal 2 C002 is 18 RS setting SW1 to ON changes the C002 setting to no no allocation 18 RS will be allocated to the multi function input terminal 1 C001 Then even if SW1 is reset to OFF the multi function input terminal 2 C002 setting is no no allocation and the multi function input terminal 1 C001 setting is 18 RS J 4 Input terminal selection 64 EMR cannot be selected with the Digital Operator When slide switch SW1 is set to ON this function will be automatically allocated 2 2 Wiring 5
205. STEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Read and Understand this Manual Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed
206. Set an acceleration deceleration time for the motor For a slow transition set to a large value and for a fast transition set to a small one Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit F002 Acceleration time 1 F202 2nd acceleration time 1 F302 3rd acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 30 00 s F003 Deceleration time 1 F203 2nd deceleration time 1 F303 3rd deceleration time 1 Acceleration deceleration on Input na the Digital Operator P031 ime inputtyne 01 Input via option 1 00 put typ 02 Input via option 2 Related functions A004 A204 A304 P031 C001 to C008 To switch to 2nd 3rd acceleration time 1 or 2nd 3rd deceleration time 1 allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 8 Functions 4 2 Function Mode e The set time here indicates the acceleration deceleration time from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency Output frequency Max frequency OOO A004 A204 A304 Output frequency set value Actual Actual acceleration deceleration time time F002 F202 F302 F003 F203 F303 lt lt gt s 1 When the LAD cancel LAC function is selected in the multi function input selection and the signal is turned on the acceleration deceleration time is ignored and the output frequency instantaneously follows the reference frequency e To switch between the 1st 2nd 3rd acceleration times or between the 1st 2nd 3rd decelera
207. T3 and Start Stop P N in the range 6 3 Cycle 10 of tester x 19 Check that there is o Capacity no liquid leakage No faults meter Smoothing Check that the Reference of capacitor safety valve has Visual inspection the replacement not come out and O period 10 years that there are no pa bulges Check that there is ee abnormal O Acoustic inspection No faults sound during Relay operation Check that there is no rough surface Visual inspection No faults on the contact 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 4 Ss ueUDa UIeI pue uons dsuj Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection Inspection Inspection period Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Check the balance Measure the voltage Pa ae of output voltage between Inverter N elass levels between O main circuit terminals AV max i phases in single U T1 V T2 and 400 V slags Control Inverter run W T3 8 V max Digital circuit Op
208. TR Torque command input permission Torque control 4 122 53 KHC Integrated power clear Integrated power 4 4 54 SON Servo ON Servo ON function 4 137 4 78 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode hee Data Function name Reference item Page 55 FOC Preliminary excitation Preliminary excitation function 4 117 56 Not used 57 Not used 58 Not used 59 Not used 60 Not used 61 Not used 62 Not used 63 Not used 65 AHD Analog command held Analog command held 4 91 C001 to i C008 66 CP1 Position command selection 1 67 CP2 Position command selection 2 4 133 68 CP3 Position command selection 3 69 ORL Zero return limit signal Absolute position control mode 70 ORG Zero return startup signal 71 FOT Forward driving stop 4 136 72 ROT Reverse driving stop 73 SPD Speed Position switching 4 134 74 PCNT Pulse counter Multi function pulse counter 4 92 75 PCC Pulse counter clear no NO No allocation eYou can select NO or NC contact input for each multi function input terminal Peremeier Function name Deew Unit No setting 00 NO contact C011 to Multi function input 01 NC contact an C018 operation selection e You can set NO and NC contact inputs a individually for multi function input terminals 1 to 8 and the FW terminal NO contact ON with the contact closed OFF with the cont
209. The D celeration ease Is there any rapid deceleration 4 8 current exceeding CU Increase the deceleration time 4 37 the specified level shuts off the output Is there any rapid acceleration Overcurrent anc an eirer Increase the acceleration time trip appears Acceleration ET Ha the motor shaft been locked 4 8 This protection Check the motor and wires 4 37 f ncti n detectsan Is the torque boost too high overcurrent through Lower the torque boost the AC CT current detector The protection circuit Is the DC injection braking too high is activated at Lower the injection breaking approximately 220 others Is there any error on CT oe of the Inverter rated Replace or repair the CT output current and a trip occurs Is the load too large Reduce the loading factor Is the thermal level correct Monitors the Inverter output current Adjust the thermal level to an appropriate and shuts off the output displaying level Overload an error if the built in electronic Note The electronic thermal function is set to trip thermal function detects overload aS work easily at 5 Hz or lower If a large 4 46 1 against the motor load inertial moment is applied the Trips depending on the electronic overload protect function works when thermal function settings the motor starts accelerating and the load prevents it from accelerating In this case increase the torque boost or take other measures for adjustment Is there any rapid de
210. Use the ED that is equivalent to or lower than the value shown 7 18 Specifications 7 3 Options 7 19 3 Table above just contain typical recommended values that could work correctly in a wide range of applications But special precaution and selection should be done when very large braking torque or continous regeneration is required for example cranes 5 The specified conditions contain restrictions Make sure there are not any issues Calculated based on using a standard 4 pole motor The simplified selection table above cannot be used in cases where a 10 ED is exceeded DC Reactor AX RCOOOOOOOD DE Dimensional Drawing 7 3 Options Figure 1 Figure 2 seis O O i oes c gt O 9 Za Z F j a p Yeli Reference Dimensions oltage i g AX RC 8 A B Cc D E F G H Kg 10700032 DE 96 1 22 06750061 DE 84 113 105 101 66 5 7 5 2 1 60 03510093 DE 02510138 DE 116 1 95 01600223 DE 1 108 135 124 120 82 6 5 9 5 3 20 01110309 DE 136 9 5 5 20 120 152 135 94 00840437 DE 146 6 00 200V 7 a 00590614 DE 160 11 4 150 177 160 115 2 ecc 00440859 DE 182 6 14 3 00301275 DE 161 88 17 0 195 162 5
211. a O a 3 8 Key Saee e e e ee aeaee 3 11 Parameter Transition cccccceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 3 12 N WARNING Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated CAUTION Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn Operation e Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded case circuit breaker MCCB that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load A A A A A gt Safety Information Operation a
212. act open C019 FW terminal operation NC contact ON with the contact open OFF 00 E selection with the contact closed A terminal with reset RS setting functions as NO contact only Related functions C001 to C008 4 79 2nd 3rd Control Function 4 2 Function Mode eYou can switch between three motors to control the Inverter by allocating 08 SET 17 SET3 to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 and then turning on off the SET SET3 terminal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C001 Multi function input 1 selection 1 C002 Multi function input 2 selection C003 Multi function input 3 selection 1 C004 Multi function input 4 selection C005 Multi function input 5 selection C006 Multi function input 6 selection C007 Multi function input 7 selection C008 Multi function input 8 selection 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 4T 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 no RV reverse CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG j
213. age between Has the drives internel charge circuit P and N drops to approximately thyristor been damaged 175 V DC for 200 V class and 345 Check the thyristor V DC for 400 V class Shuts off the output if an error occurs in the CT current detector CT error built into the Inverter Trips if the CT E 1923 The Inverter has a fault Repair Replace output is approximately 0 6 V or more when the power is turned on Shuts off the output and displays an error if the internal CPU has worked Is there any large electrical noise source erroneously or abnormally CPU error F around 4 Note If an abnormal value is read EIn gt F et Countermeasures against noise from EEPROM it may become a CPU error depending on the case The Inverter has a fault Repair Replace 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal suoieiado adueUDd UIeEW Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Displey em Reference Name Description Digital Check point and remedy ade Operator pag If an error occurs in the external equipment or devices the Inverter Has any error occurred in the external External receives an input s
214. age falls below the b131 level the Inverter starts deceleration again Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled 01 Enabled DC voltage constant control example 1 02 Enabled with acceleration example 2 Overvoltage protection b130 function selection during deceleration 00 suoi un4 b131 A ras 200 V class 330 to 390 380 760 V ane 400 V class 660 to 780 deceleration Overvoltage protection 0 10 to 30 90 b132 ge p Set the acceleration rate applied when this 1 00 S parameter a function is enabled Overvoltage protection 0 0010 23 b133 o es pi settin Proportional gain for DC voltage constant 0 50 prop 9 I control b130 01 only Ove ivoltage protection 0 000 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 b134 integral ri eatin Integral time for DC voltage constant control 0 060 Ss g 9 6130 01 only Example 1 When b130 01 Example 2 When b130 02 Main circuit DC voltage V Main circuit DC voltage V Overvoltage Overvoltage protection level b131 protection level b131 Output frequency Hz Time s Output frequency Hz Time s DC voltage kept constant Accelerates according to b132 Time s Time s Note 1 With this function enabled the actual deceleration time may be longer than the set value Particularly with b130 02 if b131 is set too low the Inverter may not decelerate Note 2 Even if this function is enabled
215. ameter J 1 to 9999000 2 151Eh H1024 R W igm LOW 4 200 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regjia Function name puneton R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 151Fh to Not used 1523h 1524h 0S0 R W Motor parameter R1 HIGH 0 001 A 1 to 65530 auto tuning data H030 Q 1525h LOW R W 1526h F991 R W Motor parameter R2 HIGH 0 001 1 to 65530 auto tuning data H031 Q 1527h LOW R W 1528h Hosa R W Motor parameter L HIGH 0 01 1 to 65530 auto tuning data H032 mH 1529h LOW R W 152Ah ice R W Motor parameter lo 4 to 65530 0 01 A auto tuning data H033 152Bh LOW R W 152Ch Host R W Motor parameter J HIGH 0 001 A 1 to 9999000 2 auto tuning data H034 kgm 152Dh LOW R W 152Eh to Not used 153Ch 153Dh PI proportional gain H050 R W O to 10000 0 1 153Eh Pl integral gain H051 R W Oto 10000 0 1 153Fh P proportional gain H052 R W O to 1000 0 01 1540h to Not used 1546h 1547h Limitat 0 Hz H060 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 1548h BoOst amount at SLV H061 RW 0to 50 1 startup 0 Hz 1549h to Not used 1550h 1551h FOr P proportional gain H070 R W 0 to 10000 0 1 switching For Pl integral gain 1552h are H071 R W Oto 10000 0 1 switching isean oF proparionakgaln H072 RW 0 to 1000 0 01 switching 1554h Gain
216. ameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit V2 control mode 02 APR2 absolute position control P012 03 HAPR high resolution absolute position 00 selection control P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 0 50 rad s PO60 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 command 0 to Position range setting forward side P061 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 command 1 to Position range setting forward side P062 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 _ command 2 to Position range setting forward side P063 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 command 3 to Position range setting forward side P064 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 _ command 4 to Position range setting forward side P065 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 _ command 5 to Position range setting forward side PO66 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 command 6 to Position range setting forward side P067 Multi step position Position range setting reverse side 0 command 7 to Position range setting forward side 00 Low P068 Zero return mode 01 Hi1 00 02 Hi2 P069 Zero return direction 00 Forward side 00 selection 01 Reverse side P070 Low speed Ze 5 00 t0 10 00 0 00 Hz return frequency P071 High speed zero 9 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 Hz return frequency
217. application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SY
218. aracteristics 01 Constant torque characteristics 02 Free setting 00 No 4 46 b015 Electronic Thermal Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 b017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 b019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 0 to 400 No Hz b016 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 b018 Free setting electronic thermal current 2 b020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 0 0 to Rated current 0 0 No 4 46 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 30 po uoiesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter i Default Cinge Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation 00 Disabled 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed Overload limit operation b021 selecti n 02 Enabled in constant speed operation 01 No 03 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation Accelerates during regeneration 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 N 0 4 to 55 kW x b022 l Ovetload limitlevel 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated No A 75 to 132 kW current poe e 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s parameter 4 49 S 00 Disabled E 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed S T operation A b024 Overload limi 02 Enabled
219. arameter 00 Standard motor parameter 00 4 109 selection 01 Auto tuning parameter No 4111 2nd motor 02 Auto tuning parameter 4 113 5 H202 parameter selection online auto tuning enabled 00 D z E H003 Motor capacity Factory 5 selection default 2 0 20 to 160 0 No kW g H203 2nd motor capacity Factory 4 19 5 selection default 4 109 o 4 113 Motor pole number ns selection 4 4 116 2 4 6 8 10 No Pole H204 2nd motor pole 4 number selection H005 Speed response 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 80 00 Te i WI ne AES H205 2nd speed response 10 000 to 80 000 1 590 4 90 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 47 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Canis Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation H006 Stabilization 100 parameter H206 2nd stabilization 0 to 255 100 Yes an 4 118 parameter H306 3rd stabilization 100 parameter Depends H020 Motor parameter R1 onite motor capacity 0 001 to 9 999 No Q 10 00 to 65 53 Depends H220 2nd motor on the parameter R1 motor capacity Depends H021 Motor parameter R2 ong motor capacity 0 001 to 9 999 No Q 4 113 10 00 to 65 53 Depends 2nd motor on the 2 H221 parameter R2 motor g capacity of Depends 2 H022 Motor parameter L ets z motor 8 0 01 to 99 99 NY a as
220. ard wan me aa a error mounted on option port 2 to mounds o i Check that the mounting is correct E18 Has the incoming power supply voltage Shows the waiting status after the dropped Power recovery Is there a contact failure for MCCB and or incoming Inverter voltage decreases Undervoltage Mg and shuts off eee z standby This error also appears durin Replace MCCB Mg Pp 1ng Is the voltage between P and N momentary power interruption normal Check the voltage between P and N Has the remote cable plug been inserted properly __ Appears if an error occurs between Check the remote cable inserted Communications s ni the Digital Operator and the correctly Inverter Has the Digital Operator been inserted properly Check the Digital Operator contact Appears in the restart standby Retry status when the momentary power standby interruption trip retry functions are 2000 enabled Power 5 shutoff Appears when the power is shut off 73 Appears if the limited RUN RUN command is received while the command a Ee A AS T a rotation direction is limited to one is limited direction with b035 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal 5 5 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshootin
221. arning level 2 C111 R W 0 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 1474h to Not used 147Ch 147Dh O zero adjustment C121 R W 0 to 65530 1 147Eh_ Ol zero adjustment C122 R W 0 to 65530 1 147Fh O2 zero adjustment C123 R W 0 to 65530 1 1480h to Not used 1485h 1486h Output 11 ON delay C130 R W 0 1 s 1487h Output 11 OFF delay C131 R W 0 1 s 1488h Output 12 ON delay C132 R W 0 1 s 1489h Output 12 OFF delay C133 R W 0 1 s 148Ah Output 13 ON delay C134 R W 0 1 s 148Bh Output 13 OFF delay C135 R W 0 1 s 0 to 1000 o 148Ch Output 14 ON delay C136 R W 0 1 s 148Dh Output 14 OFF delay C137 R W 0 1 s 148Eh Output 15 ON delay C138 R W 0 1 s 148Fh Output 15 OFF delay C139 R W 0 1 s 1490h Relay output ON delay C140 R W 0 1 s 1491h Relay output OFF delay C141 R W 0 1 s Logic output signal 1 Same as C021 to C026 1492h selection 1 ets RAY except LOG1 to 6 _ Logic output signal 1 Same as C021 to C026 1493h selection 2 aie ae except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 1 BEAN aoa Ne tae C144 RW 1 0R P 2 XOR 4 198 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regjia Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code Logic output signal 2 Same as C021 to C026 1495h selection 1 C145 RAY except LOG1 to 6 _ Logic output signal 2 Same as C021 to C026 1496h se
222. as the position command Position command CP3 CP2 CP1 Multi step position 0 0 0 0 Multi step position 1 0 0 1 Multi step position 2 0 1 0 Multi step position 3 0 1 1 Multi step position 4 1 0 0 Multi step position 5 1 0 1 Multi step position 6 1 1 0 Multi step position 7 1 1 1 When you input a multi step position command you can set the wait time until the terminal input is determined This prevents the transition status from being applied before it is determined 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used You can adjust the determination time in multi step speed position determination time C169 If no input is made during the time set in C169 the data is determined after the set time elapses Note that the longer the determination time the slower the input response Without determination With determination time C169 time C169 7 3 ad Position command 4 3 CP1 CP2 CP3 Determination time C169 nT c gt O e gt n Speed Position Switching Function SPD Allocate 73 SPD to one of the multi function inputs While the SPD terminal is turned on the current position counter is retained at 0 Therefore if the SPD terminal is turned off during operation the Inverter shifts to the position control mode Speed Position switching At this time if the position command is 0 the Inverter immediately stops Hunting may occur de
223. ation S during stop selection stop 4 42 O Ss Momentary power 00 16 times b005 interruption retry time 01 No limit 00 No selection Input phase loss 00 Disabled b006 protection selection 01 Enabled of No _ 46 E Frequency matching 4 42 2 b007 lower limit frequency 9 00 10 99 99 0 00 No Hz 4 68 g 100 0 to 400 0 a setting 4 85 E 00 Trip 2 01 0 Hz start 3 02 Frequency matching start Z b008 Trip retry selection 03 Trip after frequency matching 00 No 4 42 deceleration stop g 04 Active Frequency Matching restart O 2 Undervoltage retry 00 16 times a b009 time selection 01 No limit pe No m c g Overvoltage 2 b010 overcurrent retry time 1 to 3 3 No Time 442 selection b011 Trip retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No S 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 29 3 7 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page b012 Electronic thermal level b212 2nd electronic thermal level b312 3rd electronic thermal level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated current Rated current No b013 Electronic thermal characteristics selection b213 2nd electronic thermal characteristics selection b313 3rd electronic thermal characteristics selection 00 Reduced torque ch
224. ation time becomes longer than the set time e If sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method V f characteristics refer to Control Method V f Characteristics page 4 21 and 03 is selected for b021 b024 the frequency increases when a current exceeding the overload limit level flows during regenerative operation lf overload limit parameter b023 b026 is set too short an overvoltage trip may occur because of regenerative energy from the motor caused by automatic deceleration of this function even during acceleration e Make the following adjustments if this function operates before the frequency reaches the target value during acceleration Increase the acceleration time Refer to Acceleration Deceleration Time page 4 8 Increase the torque boost Refer to Torque Boost page 4 19 Increase the overload limit level b022 b025 4 2 Function Mode Overload limit level LL Q A b022 b025 i Decelerates according to the set overload limit parameter Output current Max frequency A004 A204 A304 Target frequency LS Inverter output frequency b023 b026 SE Overload Warning lf the applied load is large the Inverter can output an overload warning signal before an overload trip occurs This helps prevent mechanical damage due to an overload in the carrier machine or an operation line stop due to ove
225. ays ON A081 AVR selection 01 Always OFF 02 02 OFF during deceleration A082 AVR voltage selection 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 200 400 o 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 Related functions d004 A001 A005 With A081 AVR selection set whether to enable or disable this function e Note that the Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage eTo avoid a possible overcurrent trip during deceleration set the AVR selection to Always ON A081 00 Parameter No Data Description Note 00 Always ON Enabled during acceleration constant speed and deceleration 01 Always OFF Disabled during acceleration constant speed and deceleration ane Disabled only during deceleration in order to reduce the energy OFF during i Pot 02 regenerated to the Inverter by increasing the motor loss This will deceleration j i avoid a possible trip due to regeneration during deceleration 4 35 4 2 Function Mode Automatic Energy saving Operation Function e This function automatically minimizes the Inverter output power during constant speed operation and is suitable for load with reduced torque characteristics e g fan pump Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Normal operation A085 RUN mode selection 01 Energy saving operation 00 02 Automatic operation A086 Energy saving response 0 to 100 50 accuracy adjustment
226. b109 Free V f voltage 5 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b110 Free V f frequency 6 0 to Free V f frequency 7 0 No Hz b111 Free V f voltage 6 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b112 Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 0 No Hz b113 Free V f voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 19 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Cienges Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting Operation Brake control 00 Disabled p120 selection 01 Enabled 00 No x p121 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s release p122 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s acceleration p123 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s stopping a 4 75 p124 Brake wait time for 5 99 to 5 00 0 00 No s confirmation Brake release 0 00 to 99 99 b125 frequency 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No He 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated b126 Brake release curren 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current No _ o Brake input 0 00 to 99 99 2 b127 sequency 100 0 to 400 0 0 007 able Hz 2 O It ean in 00 Disabled b130 i 01 DC voltage kept constant 00 No selection during d 02 Acceleration enabled deceleration ore AA DA 200 V class 330 to 390 380 g y Po 400 V class 660 to 780 760 during deceleration p132 Overve
227. below 5 of each level this function will be reset Carrier frequency reduction starting level Recovery level Reduced carrier frequency kHz Less than 60 of the rated current 15 0 60 55 of the rated current 12 0 72 67 of the rated current 9 0 84 79 of the rated current 6 0 96 91 of the rated current 3 0 4 71 Carrier frequency 15 0 kHz 12 0 KHZ Pov 9 0 kHz eenesenesesensnssensesnesensenserenees 6 0 kHz Hehedreeearrtesinenaarbererscesenensttae 3 0 kHz peesesbasedecrsestivcscestaaevessaseseee 60 72 50 aN Moo Output current 84 96 e The carrier frequency reduction rate is 2 kHz per second e The upper limit of carrier frequency variable with this function conforms to the set value of carrier frequency b083 and the lower limit is 3 kHz Note When b083 is 3 kHz or lower this function is disabled regardless of the b089 setting 4 2 Function Mode Regenerative Braking Function e This function applies to the Inverter models with a built in regenerative braking circuit RX A2220 A4220 or lower models With the built in regenerative braking circuit this function allows an external braking resistor to consume the motor s regeneration energy as heat This function is useful for a system in which the motor works as a generator when it is rapidly decelerated eTo use this function configure the following settings Parameter No
228. bles the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which if short circuited might cause damage to itself or other property Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring 2 1 2 1 Installation Safety Information Winstallation and Storage Do not store or use the product in the following places Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to exposure to combustibles eLocations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Locations subject to shock or vibration MTransporting Installation and Wiring Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction Do not hold by the front cover and terminal block cover but hold by the fins during transportation Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input output terminals Doing so may result in damage to the produ
229. c D m Q A A A D A Z Q oO 2 1 Installation 2 1 Installation N WARNING Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Be sure to ground the unit Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire 200 V class type D grounding 400 V class type C grounding CAUTION Do not connect resistors to the terminals PD 1 P N directly Doing so might result in a small scale fire heat generation or damage to the unit Install a stop motion device to ensure safety Not doing so might result in a minor injury A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor regenerative braking unit In case of a braking resistor install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Configure a sequence that ena
230. cause the Inverter to trip or may cause damage to the capacitor or surge absorber If the cable length exceeds 20 m particularly with 400 V class a surge voltage may be generated at the motor terminal due to stray capacitance or inductance of the cable causing the motor to burn out To connect several motors provide a thermal relay for each The RC value of each thermal relay should be 1 1 times of the motor rated current The relay may trip easily depending on the cable length In this case connect an AC reactor to the Inverter output Design MDC Reactor Connection Terminal PD 1 P e This terminal is used to connect the optional DC reactor for power factor improvement By factory default a short circuit bar has been connected between the terminals PD 1 and P Before connecting the DC reactor remove this short circuit bar e The length of the DC reactor connection cable should be 5 m or less If the DC reactor is not used do not remove the short circuit bar If you remove the short circuit bar without connecting the DC reactor no power is supplied to the Inverter main circuit disabling operation External Braking Resistor Connection Terminal P RB Regenerative Braking Unit Connection Terminal P N The Inverters with 22 kW or lower capacity incorporate a regenerative braking circuit To improve braking capability mount the optional external braking resistor to this terminal Do not mount a resistor whose re
231. celeration Increase the deceleration time Braking Shuts off the output and displays an ls the operation ycle frequent resistor error if the usage rate of Decrease the numer of operation Cycles 4 8 f F ead ETES Is the usage rate setting of the regenerative overload regenerative braking circuit exceeds EY 4 72 braking function low trip the b090 set value Set to an appropriate level Note Pay attention to the allowable power of the resistor 5 1 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Disple em Reference Name Description Digital Points to check and remedy ais Operator pag Extremely high DC voltage between P and N may result in failure This function therefore shuts off the output and displays an error if the DC Is there any rapid deceleration voltage between P and N exceeds Increase the deceleration time the specified level because of Is there any ground fault Overvoltage A tri regenerative energy from the motor OE Check the output wires and motor P or increase of the incoming voltage Has the motor been rotated driven from the during operation load side Trips when the DC voltage between Reduce regenerative energy P and N reaches approximately 400 V DC for 200 V class and 800 V DC for 400 V class Shuts off the output and displays an ee large electrical noise source error if an error occurs in the built in y F A EEPROM gt Countermeas
232. change 00 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 22 e uoiesado Operation po 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee N Function name Monitor or data range r during Unit Page O setting operation Multi step speed 00 Binary 16 step selection with 4 terminals A09 selection 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 terminals 00 N zi 416 A020 Mult Sloe speed 0 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz reference 0 A220 2nd multi step 0 0 Starting frequency to 2nd Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz 4 8 speed reference 0 4 16 A320 3rd multi step speed 0 0 Starting frequency to 3rd Max frequency 6 00 Yes Hz reference 0 A021 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 1 A022 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 2 A023 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 3 A024 Multi step speed 0 00 D reference 4 c 5 z 2 a025 Multi step speed 0 00 n reference 5 nol A026 Multi step speed 0 00 Q reference 6 a oO i 2 A027 Multi step speed 0 00 5 reference 7 i ao28 Multi step speed 0 0 Starting frequency to Max frequency 0 00 Yes Hz 4 16 reference 8 A029 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 9 A030 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 10 A031 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 11 A032 Multi step speed 0 00 reference 12 A033 Multi step speed
233. changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed x F when terminal SFT is ON QO RS jas 3 D031 PSONE lockK Selection 02 Data other than b031 cannot be changed oi No aa 03 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 14 gt x D 5 2 x Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default CHES Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation RUN time Power ON 0 to 9999 0 to 99990 bos time setting 1000 to 6553 10000 to 655300 o No h oe o R tati ndire tion 00 Forward and Reverse are enabled b035 limit selection 01 Only Forward is enabled 00 No 4 52 fe 02 Only Reverse is enabled Reduced voltage 0 Reduced voltage startup time small to gt a startup selection 255 Reduced voltage startup time large 6 No F33 00 Complete display 01 Individual display of functions b037 Display selection 02 User setting 04 No 4 53 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display 00 Screen when the Enter key was pressed o last Initial screen 01 C08 b038 Zaledtion 02 d002 01 No
234. charge resistor separately mounted Braking Minimum connection 50 50 35 35 35 16 10 10 7 5 7 5 5 resistance Q Specifications Class 3 phase 200 V Model name RX A2300 A2370 A2450 A2550 Max applicable kW 30 37 45 55 motor 4P Rated output 200V 41 9 50 2 63 0 76 2 capacity kVA 240v 50 2 60 2 75 6 91 4 3 phase 3 wire 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 3 phase 200 to 240 V Cannot Rated output voltage exceed that of incoming voltage Rated output current A 121 145 182 220 Rated input voltage Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 22 30 30 43 Regenerative Regenerative braking unit braking separately mounted Braking Minimum connection resistance Q 7 1 Standard Specification List MThree phase 400 V Class Class 3 phase 400 V Model name RX A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 A4185 A4220 Max applicable kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 motor 4P Rated output 400 V 1 0 1 7 2 5 3 6 6 2 9 7 13 1 17 3 22 1 26 3 33 2 capacity kVA ggov 1 2 20 31 43 74 11 6 15 8 20 7 266 31 5 39 9 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wi
235. ching SET3 3rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operator SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 OLR overload limit switching TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK Brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal block ATR torque command input permission KHC integrated power clear SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 CP2 position command selection 2 CP3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward drivi
236. ching start l i i i i t0 gs e U yi _ ES Alarm Output for Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage During Stop Use b004 to select whether to enable an alarm output in case of momentary power interruption or undervoltage An alarm output continues while Inverter control power supply remains Alarm output for momentary power interruption undervoltage during stop Standard examples 5 to 7 suoljoun Operation where DC P N is supplied to control power supply terminal Ro To examples 8 to10 Example 5 b004 00 Power supply Inverter is stopped Inverter is running Power supply RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Alarm Signal during momentary Signal during momentary power interruption IP power interruption IP Example 6 b004 01 Inverter is stopped Power supply Power supply RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Alarm Signal during momentary Signal during momentary power interruption IP power interruption IP Example 7 b004 02 Inverter is stopped ON Power supply OFF l J Power supply RUN command RUN command Inverter output Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary a a Signal during momentary ON power interruption IP power interruption IP Alarm 4 44 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Example 8 b004 00 Power supply RUN command Inverter output Alarm Signal during momentary power interruption IP Example 9 b00
237. ck 3 3 The RUN command frequency reference sources can be selected individually from the Digital Operator as well as the control circuit terminal block 3 2 Test Run Procedure 3 2 Test Run Procedure Item Description Relerence page Installation and Mounting Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions 2 1 e Make sure that the installation conditions are met y Wiring and Connection Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices 2 6 Select peripheral devices that meet the specifications and wire correctly y Power On Check the following before turning on the power e Make sure that an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power input terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 are wired correctly e RX A20 3 phase 200 to 240 V AC e RX A40 3 phase 380 to 480 V AC e Make sure that the motor output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor correctly e Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly and that all control terminals are turned off e Set the motor to no load status i e not connected to the mechanical system e After checking the above turn on the power y Display Status Check Make sure that there are no faults in the Inverter Y When the power is turned on normally the display shows RUN LED indicator ON ALARM LED indicator OFF POWER LED indicator O
238. ck Check Code Calculation Method Transmission Frame Structure Example To set 5 Hz using command 01 frequency reference setting When the target station No is 01 STX Station No Command 4 157 ASCII code gt 0x 02 gt 01 Ox 30 31 gt 01 Ox 30 31 gt 000500 0x 3030 30 35 30 30 gt 05 Ox 30 35 gt 0x 00 To determine BCC the Inverter performs ASCII conversion from the station No to data and calcu lates a result of the exclusive OR Xor per byte For the above transmission frame BCC is calculated as follows 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 30 30 L Xor D yo _ 31 Xor 00 Xor id Xor o Xor X Xor Xor i Xor 05 e685 This value is BCC Appendix ASCII Code Conversion Table Text data ASCII code Text data ASCII code STX 2 A 41 ACK 6 B 42 CR 0D C 43 NAK 15 D 44 0 30 E 45 1 31 F 46 2 32 H 48 3 33 P 50 4 34 b 62 5 35 6 36 7 37 8 38 9 39 4 4 Communication Function ModBus RTU Method Follow the procedures below in regards to communication between the external controller and the Inverter a U External controller Inverter 3 Communication error timeout C077 Operates according to communication error selection C076 when reception times out Wait time silent interval C078 1 Frame to be sen
239. co co L 3 14 Operation e 3 6 Parameter Transition E Direct Code Specification and Selection e The codes can be specified or selected by directly entering each digit of the codes or data as well as by scrolling the codes of the monitor basic function and extended function modes e Below is an example where monitor mode code d001 is changed to extended function code A029 1 Display the monitor mode code d001 is displayed a 5 omron OQPOWER RX INVERTER O ALARM Ode oYJw O RUNO LJ a I a rc cr PRGO STOP RESET RUN C2 cD RY Press A and X simultaneously 1 2 Change the extended function mode p S e d of the 4th digit on the left starts to blink omron QPOWER RX INVERTER O ALARM aa Oz mr 1 ov kw preo af it Wt oal TN O RUNO RUN SIME B Press X 2 times A001 is displayed r gt 3 e A blinks omron OPOWER Press the Enter key to fix the blinking digit RX INVERTER O ALARM ae 3 OHz RUNO Dam j ov peo MIJI I oal T O STOP RESET I H Press A is entere
240. command is activated the rotation direction is judged as being normal Related functions A044 A001 A076 A141 A142 4 119 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used V2 Control Mode Selection Select a control method in V2 control mode selection P012 When 00 ASR is selected in P012 speed control mode is enabled Select a frequency reference in frequency reference selection A001 When 01 APR is selected in P012 the Inverter enables position control by generating frequency reference based on the position command pulse input from the pulse train position command input terminal and on the position feedback detected by the encoder Select any of the three pulse train position command input modes in pulse train mode selection P013 To perform pulse train position control allocate 48 STAT to any of the multi function input termi nals While the STAT terminal is tuned on pulse train position command input is accepted Position deviation can be cleared through external input Allocate 47 PCLR to any of the multi function input terminals Tuning on and then off the PCLR terminal can clear position deviation data Allocate 22 DSE to any of the multi function output terminals to enable excessive speed devia tion signal output Set a deviation level in speed deviation error detection level P027 When the deviation between real frequency and reference frequency exceeds the P027 set value the DS
241. command you want to set 2 Move the workpiece e Input the RUN command with the ORT terminal turned on At this time the speed command and acceleration deceleration time conform to the currently selected parameters ORT terminal RUN command Output frequency Depends on the speed command selected Position If the Inverter control circuit Ro To is turned on teaching is enabled The current position counter operates even if the workpiece is moved by an external device Teaching is therefore enabled even while the Inverter is stopped Note Make sure that the power supplies R L1 S L2 T L3 for the Inverter power circuit are shut off or that the Inverter s outputs U T1 V T2 W T3 are disconnected from the motor Not doing so may result in injury and or damage to the equipment 3 When the target position is reached press the Enter key on the Digital Operator Press the key on the data display screen the PRG LED indicator is lit 4 136 suoi un4 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used 4 The current position is set to the area corresponding to the position command source set in teaching selection P074 However the P074 setting is not stored After the power is shut off or after reset this parameter is indicated as 00 x00 P074 set values Position commands to be set 00 P060 Multi step position command 0 01 P061 Multi step position command 1
242. crements of 1 hour 1000 to 9999 Displays in increments of 10 hours 100 to 999 Displays in increments of 1000 hours Fin Temperature Monitor d018 Displays the temperature of the fin inside the Inverter Display 020 to 200 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 C 4 4 suoljoun Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode Motor Temperature Monitor d019 e Displays the temperature of the thermistor connected between the control circuit terminals TH and PLC Set thermistor selection b098 to 02 NTC enabled Display 0 0 to 200 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 C Note When b098 01 PTC enabled the motor temperature monitor is disabled Life Assessment Monitor d022 The LED lighting position indicates a life assessment result The following two items can be monitored 1 Main circuit board capacitor service life 2 Cooling fan rpm reduction D Cp IO f Life assessment fli i fli i Normal 4 4 ar al i Note 1 The capacitor service life is calculated every 10 minutes If the Inverter is turned on off frequently within this interval the capacitor service life cannot be correctly diagnosed Note 2 While the cooling fan is stopped with b092 set to 01 the cooling fan rpm is judged as being normal Pulse Counter Monitor d028 You can monitor a total pulse count of multi function input function pulse counter 74 PCNT Position Command Monitor Absolute Position Control Mode
243. crew terminal torque kw model W PD 1 mm3 ii see tell size emma Nem Earth leakage P N Enel RE mm breaker ELB 0 4 RX A4004 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 1 2 5A max 1 8 0 75 RX A4007 1 25 1 25 1 25 M4 1 25 4 1 2 5A max 1 8 1 5 RX A4015 2 2 2 M4 2 4 1 2 10 A max 1 8 2 2 RX A4022 2 2 2 M4 2 4 1 2 10 A max 1 8 3 7 RX A4037 2 2 2 M4 2 4 12 15A max 1 8 5 5 RX A4055 3 5 3 5 3 5 M5 R2 5 2A 30 A 4 0 max 7 5 RX A4075 3 5 3 5 3 5 M5 3 5 5 as 30A 4 0 max 11 RX A4110 5 5 5 5 5 5 M6 R5 5 6 13 50 A 4 4 max 15 RX A4150 8 8 8 M6 8 6 12 60 A 2 4 9 max amp 4 5 S 18 5 RX A4185 14 14 14 M6 14 6 60A A 4 9 max Q 4 5 22 RX A4220 14 14 14 M6 14 6 75A 4 9 max 30 RX A4300 22 22 M6 22 6 49 100 A 4 9 max 7 Saf 4 8 1 37 RX A4370 38 22 M8 38 8 20 0 max 100 A 3 _ 4 7 8 1 45 RX A4450 38 22 M8 38 8 20 0 max 150A 55 RX A4550 60 30 M8 R60 8 a 175A 20 0 max 100 4 20 0 75 RX B4750 38 x 2 38 M10 100 10 22 0 max 225 A 100 4 20 0 90 RX B4900 38 x 2 38 M10 100 10 22 0 max 225 A RX 150 4 20 0 119 B411K 38 x 2 po _ M10 dong 35 0 max cha RX 80 4 20 0 132 B413K 80 x 2 M10 80 10 35 0 max 350 A 1 When the cable is connected without using the crimp terminal bare wires use the square washer included with the product Note The cable size is based on the HIV cable 75 C heat resistance 2 19 2
244. ct Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body Do not connect any load other than a three phase inductive motor to the U V and W output terminals Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations Not doing so may result in damage to the product Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong magnetic fields Locations close to power lines Precautions for Use Hilnstallation Install the Inverter vertically on the wall Install the Inverter on a nonflammable wall surface material like metal a 4 Position for installing a screw Main Circuit Power Supply e Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter matches the AC power supply voltage w D ca 5 Design 2 1 Installation Hlnstallation Environment Increased ambient temperatures will shorten the life of the Inverter Keep the Inverter away from heating elements such as a braking resistor DC reactor etc If the Inverter is installed in an enclosure keep the ambient temperature within the range of the specifications taking dimensions and ventilation into consideration ans ale ds 7 Save enough space to prevent the upper 4 i and lower wiring ducts from blocking l i cooling airflow i l
245. ct at AL1 No 4 94 S Multi function output 01 NC contact at AL2 NO contact at AL1 C034 terminal 14 contact 5 selection Multi function output C035 terminal 15 contact selection Relay output AL2 C036 AL1 contact 01 selection Light load signal 00 Enabled during acceleration deceleration C038 A t sa constant speed 01 No P 01 Enabled only during constant speed 4 104 C039 Light load detection 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A level 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current Oveoad warmin 00 Enabled during acceleration deceleration C040 sianal output ou constant speed 01 No 9 P 01 Enabled only during constant speed 5 0 0 Does not operate 4 49 P Overoadwamin 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Rated m co41 joe 9 0 4 to 55 kW eal Ne A 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current 5 75 to 132 kW 5 Arrival frequency 0 00 to 99 99 EL 2 ree during acceleration 100 0 to 400 0 9 09 No Hz iog xe 7 7 Z Arrival frequency 0 00 to 99 99 S 0043 during deceleration 100 0 to 400 0 eat a e gt oO co44 PID deviation 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 No 4 31 excessive level Arrival frequency 0 00 to 99 99 945 during acceleration 2 100 0 to 400 0 om No Hz gees Arrival frequency 0 00 to 99 99 ag during deceleration 2 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No hz C052 PID FB upper limit 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 No 4 31 C053 PID FB lower limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No
246. ction input 5 0 NO contact at AL2 NC contact at AL1 140Fh j P C015 R W 1 NC contact at AL2AL2 NO contact at operation selection AL1 1410h Multi function input 6 C016 R W _ operation selection 1411h Multi function input 7 C017 R W o operation selection 1412h Multi function input 8 C018 R W operation selection 1413h FW terminal operation C019 R W _ selection 1414h Not used 4 193 4 4 Communication Function Register No Function name Function code R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution 1415h Multi function output terminal 11 selection C021 R W 1416h Multi function output terminal 12 selection C022 R W 1417h Multi function output terminal 13 selection C023 R W 1418h Multi function output terminal 14 selection C024 R W 1419h Multi function output terminal 15 selection C025 R W 141Ah Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection C026 R W ONOnRWNAO RUN signal during RUN FA1 constant speed arrival signal FA2 over set frequency arrival signal OL overload warning OD excessive PID deviation AL alarm output FA3 set frequency only arrival signal OTQ overtorque IP signal during momentary power interruption 9 UV signal during undervoltage 10 11 12 13 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
247. ctions 4 2 Function Mode Forced Operator Function e This function forcibly enables operation via the Digital Operator by turning on off the multi function terminal if the frequency reference RUN command sources are not set to the Digital Operator Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Prioritizes the command from the Digital Operator A020 34 OPE Forced operator A220 set values over the A001 and A002 settings OFF Operates according to the A001 and A002 settings Available input terminals C001 to C008 Related codes A001 A002 4 89 e If the Forced Operator function is selected in the multi function input selection the Inverter is operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source selected in A001 and A002 when the input signal is OFF When the signal is ON the Inverter is forced to operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the Digital Operator lf you switch on off this function during operation the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter output Before resuming operation turn off the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again 4 2 Function Mode P PI Switching Function e This function allows you to switch the control compensation method for the speed control system between proportional integral compensation and proportional compensation when sensorless vector control O Hz
248. ctory default You can clear trip data You cannot clear the P100 to P131 set values RUN time or power ON time Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Clears the trip monitor BP on 01 Initializes data poga Ie Zenon Selecta 02 Clears the trip monitor and initializes og 5 data Initialization parameter b085 5 selection 00 Do not change 00 4 66 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Blnitialization Method 1 Press the STOP RESET key with the Mode and Decrement keys pressed simultaneously After setting the above parameter use the following method to initialize O POWER Release the STOP RESET key when the display BX INVERTER ALARMI blinks The display changes as shown below e Release the Mode and Decrement keys 2 Initializing 3 Initialization completes when d001 appears on the MRON O POWER RX INVERTER O ALARM monitor Check that the data is initialized OMRON er Ali Note You cannot initialize analog input adjustments C081 C082 C083 C121 C122 and C123 as well as 4 67 thermistor adjustment C085 4 2 Function Mode STOP Key Selection When control circuit terminal block is selected for the RUN command you can set whether the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator is used to activate the STOP command and trip reset operation e This setting is enabled when any item other
249. curs during operation the Inverter decelerates while keeping the main circuit DC voltage at the value set in momentary power interruption non stop target voltage OV LADSTOP level b052 e This function is started when the following conditions are all satisfied e b050 02 or 03 e The Inverter is running This function is disabled during trip undervoltage stop e The control power supply is momentarily interrupted or the main circuit DC voltage falls below the momentary power interruption non stop function starting voltage b051 e This function is enabled when the above starting conditions are satisfied even if the J51 connector cable is disconnected from terminals Ro and To and is connected from main terminal P to Ro and from N and To or even if the control power supply is separated from the main circuit power supply e If the time of momentary power interruption is short the Inverter can continue to run without shutting off the output However if undervoltage occurs because of momentary power interruption the Inverter immediately shuts off the output and stops operating this function The subsequent power recovery depends on the setting of retry selection b001 With b050 03 the Inverter can be restored to normal operation if a momentary power interruption occurs and incoming voltage recovers before the output is shut off Note that the Inverter may decelerate to a stop depending on the b051 setting Below are the details
250. curve 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 27 3 7 Parameter List Parameter r s Default Ciega No Function name Monitor or data range Zin during Unit Page g operation A101 Ol start frequency 0 00 to 99 99 0 00 No Hz E A102 Olend frequency 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No Hz wn A103 Ol start ratio 0 to Ol end ratio 20 No 4 14 2 a A104 Ol end ratio Ol start ratio to 100 100 No gt A105 Ol start selection 00 Use Ol start frequency A101 00 No g 01 0 Hz g A111 O2 start frequency 400 to 100 0 00 No Hz g 99 9 to 0 00 to 99 99 g A112 O2 end frequency 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No Hz 9 5 A113 O2 start ratio 100 to O2 end ratio 100 No v n s 2 o k 4 15 gt gt O c oO a A114 O2 end ratio O2 start ratio to 100 100 No T E g x lt M 5 A131 Acceleration curve 02 No o w parameter 5 o D Q 01 small curve to 10 large curve 4 38 S 4132 Deceleration curve 02 No ne parameter Q Q O lt 00 Digital Operator F001 Operation frequency 01 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster o A141 A 02 No input A setting Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 02 Input O 03 Input Ol S O iani 04 RS485 communication S a142 Sees re 05 Option 1 03 No 4 Q INPULE Selig 06 Option 2 a 0
251. d Continued to the next page 3 15 3 6 Parameter Transition 3 Change the 3rd digit of the extended function code ee POWER RX INVERTER O ALARM ou OHz RNO SIT a OV eo PEA LI I oa FS O O STOP RUN RESET co aA ly fo hs Y o HH rss 4 Change the 2nd digit of the extended function code p 0 is entered POWER RX INVERTER OALARM 4 OHz RUNO Im a OV peo PELL I on TV O STOP RUN RESET A 2 lt b Press A 2 times RX INVERTER POWER O ALARM 22 aA RY Press J 2 A021 is displayed Continued to the next page e 0 of the 3rd digit blinks e Press the Enter key to fix 0 of the 3rd digit as you need not change it po uonesado e 0 of the 2nd digit blinks e 2 of the 2nd digit blinks 3 16 Operation e 3 6 Parameter Transitio n 5 Change the 1st digit of the extended function code omron RX INVERTER POWER OALARM _ Y e 1 of the 1st digit blinks or A029 is displayed C2 A XYI Press A 8 times
252. d 41 Torque limit switching 1 42 Torque limit switching 2 4 59 4 2 Function Mode Momentary Power Interruption Non stop Function After the power is shut off during operation this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while keeping the voltage below the overvoltage level You can select from three modes in momentary power interruption non stop selection b050 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled Selection of non sto 91 Enabled P 02 DC voltage constant control without b050 function at momentary recovery 00 powem interruption 03 DC voltage constant control with recovery Starting voltage of non stop b051 function at momentary 0 0 to 1000 220 440 V power interruption 4 Stop deceleration level of b052 non stop function at 0 0 to 1000 360 720 V momentary power interruption 1 4 Deceleration time of non b053 stop function at momentary 0 01 to 3600 1 00 S power interruption 3 Deceleration starting width b054 of non stop functionat 00 to 10 00 0 00 Hz momentary power interruption 3 Proportional gain setting of 0 00 to 2 55 non stop function at Proportional gain for DC voltage constant b055 0 20 momentary power control interruption b050 02 03 only 0 000 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Integral time Se une or non Integral time for DC voltage constant b056 stop function at momentary 9 9 0 100 s power interruption
253. d E69 E iii Note Check the DIP switch settings on the PG board for any abnormal operation Function List of the DIP Switches on the PG Board 3G3AX PG01 DIP switch Switch No Description ON Disconnection detection enabled when the encoder A B phase is not i connected OFF Disconnection detection disabled when the encoder A B phase is not connected SWENC ON Disconnection detection enabled when the encoder Z phase is not 5 connected OFF Disconnection detection disabled when the encoder Z phase is not connected ON With the termination resistor between SAP and SAN 150 Q 1 OFF Without the termination resistor between SAP and SAN SWR 5 ON With the termination resistor between SBP and SBN 150 Q OFF Without the termination resistor between SBP and SBN Protection function display when the digital command board 3G3AX DI01 is mounted Name Description Display on Digital Operator 3G3AX D101 error Shuts off the output and displays an error if a timeout occurs in communication between the Inverter and digital command board m IMTI imt 2 mF Note Input mode is determined by the combination of DIP and rotary switches Check the settings of the DIP and rotary switches on the digital command board for any abnormal operation 5 6 suoieiado adueUDd UIeEW Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Trouble
254. d function modes 1 The setting displayed varies depending on the parameter 2 To change the data be sure to press the Enter key x 1 2 Data display ames A v IIIJ I Extended wz function a mode A x o A y CO or J A y O A x Ii t x A y fs Extended c function y mode B z hH a5 Press the Enter key to reflect the set value in each A Xj parameter T m m Note that no data can be eid fixed in parameter U A X Extended pa I function I mode C A v L a T s ae or J IJ Extended function mode U A 1D A x 5 A fos oe b ca 1 A A yvy Press the Enter key to enter the selected code Pressing the Enter key in parameter U does not return ot lt _ lt I ie Extended function mode H Extended function mode P Factory default Monitor mode Function mode E M
255. d RV are simultaneously turned on the Inverter stops Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output o terminal selection 41 FR starting contact signal Relay output AL2 AL1 Zz function selection 05 Forward command Reverse command Starting contact signal FR Fin Overheat Warning e This function monitors the Inverter s internal fin temperature and outputs a signal when the temperature exceeds the fin overheat warning level C064 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output o terminal selection Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 42 OHF cooling fin overheat warning C026 05 Fin overheat warning 0 to 200 Set a temperature to output the C064 A i level overheat warning signal 120 C 4 103 4 2 Function Mode Light Load Detection Signal e This signal is output when output current falls below the light load detection level C039 eIn light load signal output mode C038 you can set whether this output is enabled in any operation mode or only in constant speed operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output o terminal selection 43 LOC light load detection signal Relay output AL2 AL1 C026 i 05 function selection 00 Enabled in ope
256. d Reversible 00 OFF O L terminal Enabled With AT Example 1 i Not allocated to a a ON OI L terminal Enabled reversible multi function OFF O L terminal Enabled input 01 ON O2 L terminal Disabled Reversible 00 OFF O L terminal Enabled Example 2 ON OFL terminal Enabled 02 Reversible OFF O L terminal Enabled 01 ON O2 L terminal Disabled 00 O2 L terminal Disabled Reversible 01 o __ Addition of the O L and Enabled Not With AT NOT OI L terminals reversible allocated to a multi function 2 ene tee Enabled Reversible input OI L terminals 03 Addition of the O L and Disabled Not OI L terminals reversible Example 1 Not reversible Example 2 Reversible Main frequency reference Ol or O terminal Main frequency reference Olor O terminal O Auxiliary Auxiliary frequency frequency reference reference O2terminal O2 terminal fol fo2 fo2 fol fo2 fol H fo fo2 Real frequency reference Real frequency reference 4 13 4 2 Function Mode External Frequency Voltage Current Adjustment External analog input frequency reference O L terminal 0 to 10 V voltage input OI L terminal 4 to 20 mA current input O2 L terminal 10 to 10 V voltage input Also set an output frequency for the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator Adjusting the O2 L and OI L Terminals Parameter No Function name Data a Unit ADTT O OI start freque
257. d can be used to exchange tools for the machine tool main spindle or others During positioning the Z pulse one rotation position signal is used as the reference signal Input Z pulse between EZP and EZN Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 128 to 9999 1000 to 6553 P011 Encoder pulses 10000 to 65530 1024 Pulse P014 Orientation stop position 0 to 4095 0 P015 Orientation speed setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 120 0 5 00 Hz 00 Forward side P016 Orientation direction setting 00 01 Reverse side P017 Position ready range setting 9 to 9999 5 Pulse 1000 10000 Position ready delay time POIS setting 0 00 to 9 99 0 00 s P023 Position loop gain 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 0 50 rad s Multi function inputs C001 to C008 1 to 8 selection 45 ORT orientation C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal _ o selection 23 POK position ready Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection C026 05 4 129 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used RUN commands wav TON Output frequency 2 1 Orientation speed setting P015 3 Position ready range setting P017 A Z pulse i POK signal Fojo i Position ready delay time setting P018 Speed control Position control lt lt _ _ 1 When the RUN command is turned on with the ORT terminal turned on the Inverter accelerates to the orientation sp
258. d control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 35 3 7 Parameter List Parameter A s Default Ciega No Function name Monitor or data range setting during Unit Page operation b100 Free V f frequency 1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 0 No Hz b101 Free V f voltage 1 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b102 Free V f frequency 2 0 to Free V f frequency 3 0 No Hz b103 Free V f voltage 2 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b104 Free V f frequency 3 0 to Free V f frequency 4 0 No Hz D b105 Free V f voltage 3 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V F b106 Free V f frequency 4 0 to Free V f frequency 5 0 No Hz ja b107 Free V f voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V 5 b108 Free V f frequency 5 0 to Free V f frequency 6 0 No Hz b109 Free V f voltage 5 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b110 Free V f frequency 6 0 to Free V f frequency 7 0 No Hz b111 Free V f voltage 6 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V b112 Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 0 No Hz b113 Free V f voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 0 0 No V 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 36 po uoiesado Operation po 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee N Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page O setting operation Brake control 00 Disabled 9120
259. d operator OPE Multi step speed setting bit 1 SF1 Multi step speed setting bit 2 SF2 Multi step speed setting bit 3 SF3 Multi step speed setting bit 4 SF4 Multi step speed setting bit 5 SF5 Multi step speed setting bit 6 SF6 Multi step speed setting bit 7 SF7 Overload limit switching OLR Torque limit enabled TL Torque limit switching 1 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 2 TRQ2 P PI switching PPI Brake confirmation BOK Orientation ORT LAD cancel LAC Position deviation clear PCLR Pulse train position command input permission STAT Frequency addition function ADD Forced terminal block F TM Torque reference input permission ATR Integrated power clear KHC Servo ON SON Preliminary excitation FOC Analog command on hold AHD Position command selection 1 CP Position command selection 2 CP2 Position command selection 3 CP3 Zero return limit signal ORL Zero return startup signal ORG Forward driving stop FOT Reverse driving stop ROT Speed Position switching SPD Pulse counter PCNT Pulse counter clear PCC No allocation no Thermistor input terminal 1 terminal Positive Negative temperature coefficient of resistance element switchable Output Multi function output 5 open collector output terminals NO NC switchable sink source logic switchable 1 relay SPDT contact output terminal NO NC switchable Terminal function 6 functions can be selected from a
260. d ratio O2 start ratio to 100 100 No z g A131 Acceleration curve 02 No o D parameter Q 01 small curve to 10 large curve 4 38 7 A132 Deceleration curve 02 No _ lt parameter 00 Digital Operator F001 Operation frequency 01 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster A141 02 No input A setting Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 02 Input O 03 Input Ol of 2 04 RS485 communication S A142 Operation frequency 05 Option 1 03 No _ 4 41 S input B setting 06 Option 2 D 07 Pulse train frequency 5 00 Addition A B w A143 Operator selection 01 Subtraction A B 00 No amp 02 Multiplication A x B Frequency addition 0 00 to 99 99 A145 amount 100 0 to 400 0 9 00 No hiz Fre uenev additiori 00 Add A145 value to output frequency 4 41 A146 requency 01 Subtract A145 value from output 00 No direction frequency 5 aiso e ene hostess 25 No 5 during acceleration 2 8 Aiea EkS curve ratio 2 0 to 50 25 No D during acceleration Q 4 39 S naga Eo eave ratio 1 0 to 50 25 No during deceleration 2 D hee S aqs3 ee ave ratio 2 0 to 50 25 No during deceleration 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 11 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ees Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operat
261. d029 You can monitor a position command in absolute position control mode Note This monitor is enabled only when V2 control mode selection P012 is set to 02 or 03 in sensor vector control mode Current Position Monitor Absolute Position Control Mode d030 You can monitor the current position in absolute position control mode Note This monitor is enabled only when V2 control mode selection P012 is set to 02 or 03 in sensor vector control mode Fault Frequency Monitor d080 Displays the number of times the Inverter has tripped Display 0 to 9999 Displays in increments of 1 time 1000 to 6553 Displays in increments of 10 times 4 5 4 1 Monitor Mode Fault Monitors 1 to 6 d081 to d086 Displays the details of the last six trips The most recent trip is displayed on trip monitor 1 1 Factor Displays any of E01 to E79 2 Output frequency Hz at the time of tripping 3 Output current A at the time of tripping 4 Main circuit DC voltage V at the time of tripping 5 Total RUN time h before the trip 6 Total power ON time h before the trip Refer to Error Code List page 5 1 Trip Monitor Display Sequence 1 Trip factor 2 Trip frequency 3 Trip current 4 Trip main circuit 5 Total RUN time 6 Power ON time DC voltage dO9 ero tele gt sacg e gt wages yoae e gt isje iaje A T T T T T I
262. de Brake Control Function e This function allows the Inverter to control the external brake of equipment including an elevating system When brake control selection b120 is set to 01 enabled the Inverter operates as follows 1 At RUN command input the Inverter starts output and accelerates to the release frequency 2 After the release frequency is reached the Inverter outputs the brake release signal BRK after the brake release establishment wait time b121 elapses However if the Inverter s output current is less than the current value set in release current b126 the Inverter does not output the brake release signal In this case the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal BER 3 If the brake confirmation signal BOK is allocated to a multi function input when 44 is set in any of C001 to C008 the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal for the period set in brake confirmation wait time b124 without accelerating after the brake release signal is output If the brake confirmation signal does not turn on within the period set in b124 the Inverter outputs the brake error signal BER resulting in trip If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi function input brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled and the Inverter performs processing 4 after the brake release signal is output 4 After the brake confirmation signal is input or after the brake release signal is output i
263. disconnection detection 28 OlDc analog Ol disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 05 b060 O b063 Ol Window comparator O OI O2 upper limit level b066 02 Set an upper limit level Setting range 0 to 100 Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set an upper limit level Setting range 100 to 100 Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 100 b061 O b064 Ol Window comparator O OI 02 lower limit level b067 02 Set a lower limit level Setting range 0 to 100 Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level Setting range 100 to 100 Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 100 4 63 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b062 O Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower TTF i limit levels b065 01 window comparator Setting range 0 to 10 0 _ 0 01 02 hysteresis width ee a eg Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit b068 O2 level x 2 b070 O 0 to 100 no ignored Set an analog input application value used for WCO WCOI b071 Ol Analog operation level at WCO2 ODc OIDc O2Dc output no O OI 02 disconnection 100 to 100 no ignored Set an analog input b072
264. e All Basic function mode 4 Extended function mode 2 parameters 4 parameters e Other parameters than those mentioned above are not displayed To display all parameters select Complete display b037 00 lt Parameters to be Displayed and Arrangement gt uoiesado NO Display code Item 1 d001 to d104 Monitor display 2 F001 Output frequency setting monitor 3 F002 Acceleration time 1 4 F003 Deceleration time 1 5 F004 Operator rotation direction selection 6 A001 Frequency reference selection 7 A002 RUN command selection 8 A003 Base frequency 9 A004 Maximum frequency 10 A005 O OI selection 11 A020 Multi step speed reference 0 12 A021 Multi step speed reference 1 13 A022 Multi step speed reference 2 14 A023 Multi step speed reference 3 15 A044 V f characteristics selection 16 A045 Output voltage gain 17 A085 RUN mode selection 18 b001 Retry selection 19 b002 Allowable momentary power interruption time 20 b008 Trip retry selection 21 b011 Trip retry wait time 22 b037 Display selection 23 b083 Carrier frequency 24 b084 Initialization selection 25 b130 Overvoltage protection function during deceleration 26 b131 Overvoltage protection level during deceleration 27 C021 Multi function output terminal 11 selection 28 C022 Multi function output terminal 12 selection 29 C036 Relay output AL2 AL1 contact selection If the
265. e E EN z DC injection braking 0 00 to 99 99 4 24 6 A052 frequency 100 0 to 400 0 020 Ne Hz T ee O aos3 PC injection braking 00 to 5 0 0 0 No s Q delay time A054 DC injection braking 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 40 No aos5 PC injection braking 00 to 60 0 0 5 No s gt time g A056 DC injection braking 09 Edge operation 01 No 4 24 5 method selection 01 Level operation O 5 Startup DC injection 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 5 S nee braking power 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW E Ne se O Vali age A pose Startup DC injection 9 9 to 60 0 0 0 No s braking time A059 DC injection braking 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 No kHz carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 No kHz A061 Frequency upper limit 0 00 Frequency lower limit to Max frequency 0 00 3 2nd frequency 0 00 2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd Max No Hz A261 NH 0 00 Ko upper limit frequency l A062 Frequency lower limit et frequency to Frequency upper 0 00 4 28 s p No Hz 3 A262 2nd frequency lower 0 00 Starting frequency to 2nd frequency 0 00 a limit upper limit gt 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 25 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Greige Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No settin
266. e low frequency Effective value of fundamental wave VAC 300 V 200 V class Note 3 General purpose Vac 1 1 x Voc 600 V 400 V class testers are not applicable because of noise in many cases Measurement Method of Output Voltage 5 a oO D Q 5 i 5 a D 5 or 5 D 5 O D 6 10 Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List ceeeeeee 7 1 7 2 Dimensional Drawing cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 6 T I Options ae sks So ys sceewececden ice sscwracssevacevsvevtecs steers 7 14 7 1 Standard Specification List 7 1 Standard Specification List MThree phase 200 V Class Class 3 phase 200 V Model name RX A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 A2185 A2220 Max applicable kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 motor 4P Rated output 20V 1 0 17 25 36 57 83 11 0 159 221 263 32 9 capacity kVA 240v 1 2 20 3 1 43 68 99 133 19 1 266 31 5 39 4 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 phase 200 to 240 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage Rated output current A 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 5 16 5 24 32 46 64 76 95 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 6 6 6 14 14 14 sai Built in braking resistor circuit dis
267. e lt _ s 4 26 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode a Edge operation b Level operation ii During stop example 5 a A ey eae Free running Te A053 A052 S e A088 Output frequency ii During stop example 5 b FW Free running Output frequency i A053 A052 lt gt lt A055 iii During stop example 6 a FW ll _f Output frequency A055 A052 lt gt iii During stop example 6 b FW Output frequency fs A055 A052 lt _ gt 4 27 4 2 Function Mode Winternal DC Injection Braking Operates Only at the Set Frequency A051 02 DC injection braking can be applied when the output frequency becomes lower than the DC injection braking frequency A052 e Neither 2 external nor 3 internal DC injection braking is available while this function is selected Operates only when the RUN command is turned on DC injection braking starts when both the reference and current frequencies become lower than A052 Example 7 a When the reference frequency exceeds the A052 set value by 2 Hz or more DC injection braking is released and the output returns to normal Example 7 a e If the reference frequency is 0 when the operation starts with analog input the initial operation is DC injection braking because both the reference and current frequencies are 0 Example 7 b e If the RUN command is turned on
268. e boost 123ch_ Manual torque boost A042 R W 0 to 200 0 1 voltage 123Dh Manual torque boost A043 R W 0 to 500 0 1 frequency 0 VC 1 Special VP 123Eh Vif characteristics A044 R W 2 Free V f a selection 3 Sensorless vector 4 0 Hz sensorless vector 5 Sensor vector 123Fh Output voltage gain A045 R W 20 to 100 1 Automatic torque boost 1240h voltage compensation A046 R W 0 to 255 1 gain 1241h Automatic torque boost A047 RW 0 to 255 1 slip compensation gain 1242h to Not used 1244h PORRI 0 Disabled 1245h oo planing A051 R W 1 Enabled 2 Operates only at the set frequency 1246h PC injection braking A052 R W 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz frequency 1247h i braking delay A053 RW 0to 50 0 1 s DC injection braking 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW 3 12AON power AA BAN 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 1 1249h DC injection braking time A055 R W O to 600 0 1 s 124Ah DC injection braking A056 R W 0 Edge operation _ method selection 1 Level operation Startup DC injection 0 to 100 0 4 to 55 kW A 124Bh braking power AOSI RAN 0 to 80 75 to 132 kW 1 4 181 4 4 Communication Function Pegi Function name Funeden R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 124ch_ Startup DC injection A058 R W 0to 600 0 1 s braking time DC injection braking 5 to 150 0 4 to 55 kW 1240 carrier frequency
269. e from receiving query to the response by the Inverter is the total of the silent interval 3 5 character length and C078 communication wait time setting lf sending another query to the Inverter after receiving the response be sure to provide the silent interval length 3 5 characters at the minimum lt Normal Response gt e If the query is the loop back function code 08h the Inverter sends back a response of the same content as the query e If the query is the function code to be written into the holding register or coil 05h 06h OFh 10h the Inverter sends back the query as it is in response lf the query is the function code to be read from the holding register or coil 01h 03h the Inverter makes the slave address and function code the same as the query and attaches the read data to the query 4 160 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Abnormal Response gt Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 If an error aside from a communication error is found in the query content the Inverter returns exception responses without performing any operation e To determine the cause of an error check the function code of the response The function code of the exception response is the value of the query function code to which 80h is added e Check the details of the error with the exception code Exception code Code Descriptio
270. e g motor rpm d007 display Output frequency d001 x Frequency conversion coefficient b086 b086 0 1 to 99 9 Can be set in increments of 0 1 Example To display 4 pole motor rpm Motor rpm N min 120 x f Hz P pole f Hz x 30 As such when b086 30 0 a motor rpm of 1800 60 x 30 0 is displayed Display 0 00 to 99 99 Displays in increments of 0 01 100 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 100 to 9999 Displays in increments of 1 1000 to 3996 Displays in increments of 10 Note When the frequency reference is set using the Digital Operator the output frequency can be changed with the Increment Decrement key during operation only The frequency setting changed with this monitor will be reflected in frequency reference F001 Pressing the Enter key overwrites the currently selected frequency reference The data storage accuracy depends on each frequency reference 4 2 suoljoun Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode Real Frequency Monitor d008 When a motor with an encoder is connected to a load and the PG board 3G3AX PG01 is used this monitor displays the real frequency of the motor regardless of the control method Display In forward rotation 0 00 to 99 99 Displays in increments of 0 01 Hz 100 0 to 400 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 Hz In reverse rotation 0 0 to 99 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 Hz 100 to 400 _ Displays in increments of 1 Hz Note
271. e output current is lower than the release current after the brake release establishment wait time b121 elapses When the brake confirmation BOK signal is used the brake confirmation signal does not turn on within the brake confirmation wait time b124 during acceleration or does not turn off within the brake confirmation wait time b124 during deceleration or the brake confirmation signal turns off although the brake release signal is output 4 75 4 2 Function Mode Overvoltage Protection Function During Deceleration e This function helps avoid an overvoltage trip due to regenerative energy from the motor during deceleration You can set whether to enable or disable this function with overvoltage protection function selection during deceleration b130 lf overvoltage protection function selection b130 is set to 01 enabled DC voltage constant control the Inverter automatically decelerates while keeping the main circuit DC voltage rise due to deceleration start at the overvoltage protection function level setting b131 lf overvoltage protection function selection b130 is set to 02 enabled with acceleration the main circuit DC voltage increases because of deceleration start When the main circuit DC voltage exceeds the overvoltage protection function level setting 6131 the Inverter starts acceleration according to the setting of overvoltage protection parameter b132 After that when the main circuit Eg DC volt
272. e sure to press the Mode key 3 17 3 7 Parameter List Monitor Mode d 3 7 Parameter List e The default setting displays d001 at power on To select the optional display change the setting in b038 Changes Pees Function name Monitor or data range Parl during Unit Page No setting operation door utputfrequency 4 9 to 400 0 Yes Hz 4 1 monitor Output current 0 0 to 999 9 002 monitor 1000 to 9999 E _ A A s F Forward d003 Rotation direction o Stop AA monitor r Reverse 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 doo4 PID feedback value 1000 to 9999 4 1 monitor 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 Enabled when the PID function is selected FW Multi function input h ga Example Terminals FW 7 2 1 ON 2 goys monitor f j f H Terminals 8 6 5 4 3 OFF i 6 5 4 3 2 1 Multi function fi i G2 mi i fi 1 Example Terminals 12 11 ON d006 output monitor ni ji i j t j fi i Terminals AL2 15 14 13 OFF 4 2 AL2 15 14 13 12 11 0 00 to 99 99 Output frequency 100 0 to 999 9 d007 monitor 1000 to 9999 Yes 4 2 after conversion 1000 to 3996 10000 to 39960 Output frequency x Conversion factor of b086 Actual frequenc 400 t0100 d008 tor quency 99 9 to 0 00 to 99 99 Hz 43 100 0 to 400 0 doog TOrque reference 200 to 200
273. e the cooling fan is in operation the cooling fan stops temporarily and restarts automatically after power recovery 4 72 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode External Thermistor TH e This function enables thermal protection of the external equipment e g motor if its internal thermistor is connected to the Inverter Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b098 Thermistor selection 00 Disabled 01 Enabled Positive temperature coefficient resistance element PTC 02 Enabled Negative temperature coefficient resistance element NTC 00 b099 Thermistor error level 0 to 9999 Set a temperature resistance value to trip the Inverter according to the specifications of your thermistor 3000 C085 Thermistor adjustment 0 0 to 1000 Used for gain adjustment Factory default Note If thermistor selection b098 is set to 01 without connecting an external thermistor the Inverter trips Connect an external thermistor between control terminals TH and PLC e Set the following functions according to the specifications of your thermistor When this function is used keep the cable length between the motor and Inverter within 20 m Since the current flowing through the thermistor is weak you must take measures to prevent noise due to motor current For example place the thermistor cable away from the motor cable 4 73 4 2 Function Mo
274. e the set value of the carrier frequency b083 Rotation speed lowers Gradually increase the slip compensation gain of the automatic f P A047 A247 when load is applied torque boost Rotation speed increases Gradually reduce the slip compensation gain of the automatic torque A047 A247 when load is applied boost Gradually reduce the voltage compensation gain of the automatic A046 A246 torque boost Overcurrent trip occurs F when load is applied AA reduce the slip compensation gain of the automatic torque A047 A247 Gradually reduce the voltage setting of the manual torque boost A042 A242 Control Method V f Characteristics You can set V f characteristics output voltage output frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit a 00 Constant torque characteristics VC A044 Vif characteristics 01 Special reduced torque selection characteristics Special VP 02 Free V f characteristics x pas Only A044 A244 can be set A244 2nd nA a 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 00 Only A044 A244 can be set 1 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 3rd V f characteristics Only A044 A244 can be set 2 A344 s l ction 05 Sensor vector control V2 Only A044 can be set Related functions A046 A246 A047 A247 A082 H003 H203 H004 H204 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 4 Refer to Sensorless Vector Contr
275. eciate confirmation of the final EMC conformity for the whole machine or equipment on your own Wiring the Power Supply Keep the ground cable as short as possible Keep the cable between the Inverter and the noise filter as short as possible Connecting a Motor to the Inverter When connecting a motor to the Inverter be sure to use shield braided cables Keep the cables as short as possible Low voltage Directive The RX models have conformed to the EMC directive EN61800 5 1 by performing the machine in stallation and wiring as shown below The RX models are an open type device Be sure to install it inside the control panel e The power supply and voltage SELV with reinforced or double insulation should be used for wiring to the control circuit terminals e To satisfy requirements of the LVD low voltage directive the Inverter must be protected with a molded case circuit breaker MCCB in case a short circuiting accident occurs Be sure to install a molded case circuit breaker MCCB on the power supply side of the Inverter Use one molded case circuit breaker MCCB per Inverter e Use the crimp type terminal with an insulation sleeve to connect to the main circuit terminals 2 23 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 Operation Method cssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 3 Test Run Procedure mn a 3 4 Test Run Op ration ieee 3 5 Part Names and Descriptions of the Digital Oper
276. ected Check the connector 1 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power 2 The reset operation via the Digital Operator is not accepted Be sure to reset via the RS terminal 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Displey em Reference Name Description Digital Check point and remedy page Operator Prevents Inverter damage due to Is there any input power supply phase input phase loss when the input loss Input open phase loss protection selection is _ Check the input wiring o phase trip enabled b006 01 and trips Eci Is there a contact failure for MCCB and or Trips when the phase loss time is Mg approximately 1 s or more Replace MCCB Mg Is there any large electrical noise source around Trips when the gate array cannot Countermeasures against electrical Main circuit confirm IGBT ON OFF because of a noise main element failure a load short Has the main element IGBT been error ay Eosi 4 circuit or an erroneous operation ZE Jin damaged resulting from radiated electrical Is there any output short circuit noise Check the IGBT The Inverter has a failure Repair Replace Shuts ffthe inverter output to Is there any output short circuit Check protect the main element when a the output wires momentary overcurrent I
277. ected in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which if short circuited might cause damage to itself or other property Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded case circuit breaker MCCB that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load OOPS OPE Do not dismantle repair or modify this product Doing so may result in an injury Precautions for Safe Use Precautions for Safe Use Winstallation and Storage Do not store or use the product in the following places Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to exposure to combustibles Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure t
278. ed 4 190 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function egite Function name Buneton R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 Disabled 1365h Thermistor selection b098 R W 1 PTC enabled 2 NTC enabled 1366h Thermistor error level b099 R W 0 to 9999 1 Q 1367h Free V f frequency 1 b100 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1368h Free V f voltage 1 b101 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 1369h Free V f frequency 2 b102 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 136Ah_ Free V f voltage 2 b103 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 136Bh Free V f frequency 3 b104 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 136Ch_ Free V f voltage 3 b105 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 136Dh Free V f frequency 4 b106 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 136Eh Free V f voltage 4 b107 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 136Fh Free V f frequency 5 b108 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1370h Free V f voltage 5 b109 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 1371h Free V f frequency 6 b110 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1372h Free V f voltage 6 b111 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 1373h Free V f frequency 7 b112 R W 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1374h Free V f voltage 7 b113 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V 1375h to Not used 137Ah 137Bh Brake control selection b120 pw 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 137Ch Brake wait time for release b121 R W 0 to 500 0 01 s 437Dh Brake wait
279. ed Feet mode 2 12 200 0 4 to 55 w es b043 q 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No reverse power Kor 4 59 f no Torque limit disabled running Torque limit 4 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW b044 Four quadrant mode 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 150 No forward regeneration no Torque limit disabled Torque LADSTOP 00 Disabled b045 selection 01 Enabled 90 Ne roe ee 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 32 po uoiesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default a Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation Reverse rotation 00 Disabled b046 prevention selection 01 Enabled og No EF A99 Selection of non stop 00 Disabled function at 01 Enabled deceleration stop Roe momentary power 02 Enabled without recovery oe No m interruption 03 Enabled with recovery Starting voltage of non stop function at 0 0 to 999 9 220 DOSI momentary power 1000 440 No interruption Stop deceleration level of non stop s 0 0 to 999 9 360 b052 function at 1000 720 No V momentary power interruption 2 Deceleration time of 4 60 non stop NOR at 9 0110 99 99 6 b053 momentan dower 100 0 to 999 9 1 00 No s ZAP 1000 to 3600 interruption Deceleration starting width of non stop b054 function at 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 No Hz momentary
280. ed 223Ah 223Bh 2nd torque boost selection A241 rw Manual torque boost 1 Automatic torque boost 223ch 209 manual torque boost A242 R W 0 to 200 0 1 voltage 223Dh 209 manual torque boost A243 RIW 0 to 500 0 1 frequency 0 VC ol hs 1 Special VP DOEn aoe ae ens A244 RW 2 Free Vif pe selection 3 Sensorless vector 4 0 Hz sensorless vector 223Fh_ Not used 4 206 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regjia Function name Funcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 2nd automatic torque 2240h boost voltage A246 R W O to 255 1 compensation gain 2nd automatic torque 2241h boost slip compensation A247 R W 0 to 255 1 gain 2242h to Not used 224Eh 224Fh aa R W ar HIGH 0 2nd frequency lower limit to 2nd frequency upper limit 0 01 Hz A261 a 2nd max frequency 2250h LOW 2251h naoz R W a4 HIGH 0 Starting frequency to 2nd frequency lower limit ate 0 01 Hz A262 SN 2nd frequency upper limit 2252h LOW 2253h to Not used 226Eh A292 226Fh HIGH R W 2nd acceleration time 2 1 to 360000 0 01 s A292 2270h LOW R W A293 2271h HIGH R W 2nd deceleration time 2 T 1 to 360000 0 01 s 2272h LOW R W 0 Switched via terminal 2CH 2nd 2 step acceleration 1 Switched by setting 2213h deceleration selection A234 RAN 2 Switched at forward reverse E
281. ed Depending on the selected signal chattering may occur In such a case use this function to hold or delay the signal e Set the parameters for individual output terminals multi function output terminals 11 to 15 and the relay output terminal six terminals in total For the output terminals and the corresponding a parameters refer to the table below S Function code Item Data Default setting Unit rA C130 C132 C134 C136 0 0 to 100 0 C138 C140 Output ON delay Set an ON delay time 0 0 7 C131 C133 C135 C137 0 0 to 100 0 C139 C141 Output OFF delay Set an OFF delay time pi S Input Terminal Response Time eYou can set a sampling time individually for multi function input terminals 1 to 8 as well as the FW terminal This helps remove chattering or other noise lf the terminal input becomes unstable because of chattering increase the set value The larger the data value is the slower the response time A setting range of 0 to 200 is available which corresponds to approx 2 to 400 ms Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C160 to C167 Input terminal response time C168 FW terminal response time 0 to 200 x 2 ms Can be set in increments of 1 ms 4 106 4 2 Function Mode Digital FM Terminal eYou can monitor the output frequency and current using the FM terminal on the control circuit terminal block e The FM terminal provides
282. ed or when the regenerative braking unit is externally installed the motor cannot stop within the specified deceleration time because of braking resistance In this case do not use the automatic optimum acceleration deceleration function Note 9 When using a lower rank motor size than specified for the Inverter enable the overload limit function b021 and set the overload limit level b022 to 1 5 times the rated current of the motor 4 2 step Acceleration Deceleration Function Functions e By setting this function you can change the acceleration deceleration time during acceleration deceleration Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A092 Acceleration time 2 0 01 to 99 99 s A292 2nd acceleration time 2 100 0 to 999 9 15 0 s A392 3rd acceleration time 2 1000 t0 3600 s A093 Deceleration time 2 0 01 to 99 99 s A293 2nd deceleration time 2 100 0 to 999 9 15 0 s A393 3rd deceleration time 2 1000 5t0 3600 s A094 2 step acceleration 00 Switched via multi function input 09 deceleration selection 2CH example 1 01 Switched by setting example 2 00 A294 2nd 2 step acceleration 02 Enabled only when switching forward deceleration selection reverse example 3 A095 2 step acceleration frequency 0 00 to 99 99 0 0 Hz 2nd 2 step acceleration 100 0 to 400 0 A295 frequency A096 2 step deceleration frequency 0 00 to 99 99 00 Hz 2nd 2 step deceleration
283. eed P015 and then performs constant speed operation If the RUN command is turned on during operation the operation speed changes to the orientation speed when the ORT terminal is turned on 2 After the orientation speed is reached the Inverter shifts to the position control mode when the first Z pulse is detected 3 During forward run position control is performed with a target value of Orientation stop position P014 one rotation During reverse run with a target value of Orientation stop position P014 two rotations In this step the higher the position loop gain P023 the shorter the deceleration time regardless of the deceleration time setting 4 After the remaining number of pulses reaches the position ready range setting P017 the Inverter outputs the POK signal after the position ready delay time setting P018 elapses The POK output remains until the ORT signal is turned off After positioning is completed the servo lock status remains until the RUN command is turned off Note 1 Do not set a high frequency for the orientation speed because positioning must be completed within two rotations during deceleration Otherwise overvoltage protection may cause a trip Note 2 Orientation stop position is defined as 4096 0 to 4095 divisions of one forward rotation from the reference point The number of divisions is fixed to 4096 regardless of the encoder s number of pulses The reference point i
284. eeeeeeeeeeeeaees 5 1 5 2 Warning FUNCION saer e ceded a EREE EEEE 5 9 Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaaeaaes 6 1 Chapter 7 Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List cececceeceeeceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 7 1 7 2 Dimensional DRAWING os sss Sat aes aes aca Sig eas ia cee en 7 6 PaO MODUOIS 22 AEE EEEE E EEEE coe creda ee ee ees 7 14 15 Contents Chapter App Appendix Appendix 1Parameter List Appendix 2Product Life Curve va oicocds ctssevergsteete severe Reeeseeste eee Appendix 3Life Alarm Output Index 16 Chapter 1 Overview Mapa UHINGELOIN S aos ececees e e cece eect eat ceeeee eestor eeeeze 1 1 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts 1 4 Overview 1 1 Functions 1 1 Functions RX Inverter Models Rated voltage 3 phase 200 V AC 3 phase 400 V AC Enclosure rating Max applicable motor capacity Model 0 4 kw RX A2004 0 75 kW RX A2007 1 5 kW RX A2015 2 2 kW RX A2022 3 7 kW RX A2037 5 5 kw RX A2055 7 5 kW RX A2075 11 kW RX A2110 15 kw RX A2150 18 5 kW RX A2185 22 kW RX A2220 30 kW RX A2300 37 kW RX A2370 45 kw RX A2450 55 kW RX A2550 IP20 0 4 kw RX A4004 0 75 kW RX A4007 1 5 kW RX A4015 2 2 kW RX A4022 4 0 kw RX A4040 5
285. ees 4 4 OT Gy eects ost Satan T eens fbae E wei eee 4 98 internal DC injection braking c ccccce 4 26 4 28 Output current MONItOF ooo eee reel 4 1 output frequency Monitor 4 1 4 2 output frequency setting Monitor c eee 4 8 J output signal delay hold 0ce output signal logic operation JG ruimste be tba hee oon ats eet 4 18 output torque monitor Hay OEIC NP a a rere a jogging operation oo eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeees 4 18 Output voltage gain stacaasesatenegesrciesstenscasesinaetent sree output voltage MONItOT eee eerie overcurrent SUPPreSSiON ccceeeeseteteeeeteeeesaeeeee K overload limit 2 Ace dine kee eke le hake overload Warning eeeeeceeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeetennees KH Ak als aan naa tina E 4 4 ovenordie aaen trem kancausw austin overvoltage protection function during deceleration 4 76 L LAG ithe eee a a vas 4 9 4 40 EAD tet ceri E E A A 4 9 4 78 life assessment MOnItor een 4 5 4 101 light load detection signal c eee 4 104 LOC aeaea oak Wel en A a keel 4 104 EOG THO LOGO aiaeeiiee ade siiras aiat 4 100 M main circuit terMinal ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 7 2 15 Manual torque Doos osen merear ai 4 20 preliminary excitation cece eee 4 117 MAX MUM freqUeNCy ou eee ee eee eee tee teeeeeeeaee 4 12 pulse train frequency input 0 ccceeeeeeeeetees 4 138 MA e a n A T 4 105 momentary power interruption non s
286. efautt YS E F 0 to 9999 Factory g 0122 Ol zero adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 default Yes T lt f 0 to 9999 Factory C123 02 zero adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 defaut YES 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 44 fo uoesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Del No Function name Monitor or data range eshin during Unit Page g operation C130 Output 11 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C131 Output 11 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C132 Output 12 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C133 Output 12 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S C134 Output 13 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S E C135 Output 13 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 S C136 Output 14 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No s 4 106 D C137 Output 14 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 C138 Output 15 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 Cc C139 Output 15 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 z C140 Relay output ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 3 c141 Relay outputOFF 4 6 to 100 0 0 0 delay C142 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 C143 Logic output signal 1 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 Logic output signal 1 90 AND Cid SI eee 01 OR 00
287. egative value parameter x 1 2 runnin io i g Speed change ratio isa Reduce motor parameter R2 gradually down to set H021 H221 H031 positive value parameter x 0 8 P Increase motor parameter R1 gradually up to set H020 H220 H030 ___ Insufficient torque at low parameter x 1 2 Regeneration frequency several Hz t ter duall t t ncrease motor parameter lo gradually up to se H023 H223 H033 parameter x 1 2 During Shock occurs during Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 startup startup During 3 Reduce the speed response H005 H205 Motor hunting deceleration Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 During ee he Set a overload limit level lower than that of the torque DOZI torque limit a y Qunng torg que 6041 to b044 Low frequency Rotation is not constant Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter H024 H224 H034 operation A001 A044 A244 F001 b040 b041 to b044 H002 H202 H003 H203 Related functions H004 H204 H005 H205 H020 H220 H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H050 H250 H051 H251 H052 H252 Note 1 Make sure that the carrier frequency b083 is not lower than 2 1 kHz If the carrier frequency is lower than 2 1 Hz the Inverter does not operate normally Note 2 To use lower rank motor size than the Inverter set a torque limit value b041 to b044 while keeping the value a calculated with the following formula at 200 or lower Otherwise
288. election 06 Thermal load rate OOF eNe e 07 LAD frequency 08 Digital current monitor 09 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 12 Not used 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 04 Output voltage 05 Input voltage C028 AM selection 06 Thermal load rate 00 No 07 LAD frequency 09 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 11 Output torque lt signed gt 13 Not used 4 108 4 116 Analog monitor 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 04 Output voltage 05 Input voltage C029 AMI selection 06 Thermal load rate 00 No 07 LAD frequency 09 Motor temperature 10 Fin temperature 14 Not used Digital current 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Rated C030 monitor reference Current value at the digital current monitor Yes A 4 107 current value output 1440 Hz 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 24 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciengee N Function name Monitor or data range r during Unit Page O setting operation Multi function output C031 terminal 11 contact selection Multi function output C032 terminal 12 contact g selection E S Multi function output C033 terminal 13 contact 00 Q 5 selection 00 NO contact at AL2 NC conta
289. en if free V f voltages 1 to 7 are set to 800 V the Inverter cannot output voltage higher than the input voltage or the value of the motor voltage selection Use thorough caution to verify that the output characteristic setting is proper An improper setting causes overcurrent during acceleration or deceleration or vibration of the motor and or machine Output voltage V y7 4 4 4 4 Select the voltage or motor S voltage available for output Output frequency Hz 4 2 Function Mode Output Voltage Gain e Changes the Inverter output voltage based on the voltage selected in AVR voltage selection A082 as 100 e You can avoid motor hunting by reducing the output voltage gain Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A045 Output voltage gain 20 to 100 100 Related functions A082 AVR voltage selection A082 A045 Base frequency Max frequency A003 A203 A303 A004 A204 A304 DC Injection Braking DC injection braking is applied to the motor depending on the motor load Two methods are available for DC injection braking One is the external method via the multi function input terminal the other is the internal method performed automatically to start stop the motor Even if DC injection braking is used however the motor may not stop depending on the moment of inertia of the motor load Parameter No Function name Data
290. er 1 to 1000 1 No z5 display gain b082 Starting frequency 0 10 to 9 99 0 50 No Hz 4 65 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No kHz Derating enabled 4 65 b083 Carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 4 118 E 3 0 No kHz Derating enabled 00 Clears the trip monitor b084 Initialization selection 01 Initializes data 00 No 02 Clears the trip monitor and initializes data 4 66 b085 Initialization o0 00 No _ parameter selection Do not change pose Frequency __ 4 0 1 to 99 0 10 Yes 42 conversion coefficient 00 Enabled b087 STOP key selection 01 Disabled 00 No 4 68 02 Disabled only during stop 2 Free run stop 00 0 Hz Start b088 selection 01 Frequency matching start 00 No 4 69 02 Active Frequency Matching restart Automatic carrier 00 Disabled b089 eduction 01 Enabled E No A Usage rate of b090 regenerative braking 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 4 72 function b091 Stop selection RE 00 No 468 01 Free run stop 00 Always ON b092 Cooling fan control 01 ON during RUN 01 No Regenerative braking 00 Disabled b095 function operation 01 Enabled Disabled during stop 00 No 4 72 selection 02 Enabled Enabled during stop Regenerative braking 330 to 380 360 pee function ON level 660 to 760 720 Ne v 00 Disabled b098 Thermistor selection 01 PTC enabled 00 No 02 NTC enabled 4 73 b099 Thermistor error level 0 to 9999 3000 No Q 2nd 3r
291. er is turned on with the RUN command Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Does not start the Inverter with the power turned on while the RUN command is input 13 USP USP function Starts the Inverter with the power turned on while the OFF _ RUN command is input Available input terminals C001 to C008 eTo reset a trip perform the reset operation or turn off the RUN command Example 1 e Ifa trip is reset with the RUN command input turned on the Inverter restarts operation immediately after the trip is reset Example 2 lf the RUN command is turned on after the power is turned on the Inverter operates normally Example 3 Allocate 13 USP to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 4 82 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode e The following shows how the power recovery restart prevention function works Example Ss Example a a Example Power Power Power supply supply oo supply BW ey Si USP USP USP RS RS eT SES RS ee Alarm aes Eo Alarm a a Alarm Output Output ns re Output ee Aas frequency frequency frequency Commercial Switching 4 83 eYou can use this function to drive a system with large moment of inertia during acceleration and deceleration by using the Inverter and during constant speed by using a commercial power supply Allocate 14 CS to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 When the CS te
292. er limit level Hysteresis 0 veS amp width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limitl v ls poea ia N din Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes y Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 2 pogs Ol upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 199 ves a 4 93 width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 3 b064 Ol lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis Nes width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limitl vels 9 b065 pal Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes o Ol hysteresis width E a ee ots S Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit O level x 2 Set an upper limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 a bo66 O2 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 109 Tes width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 b pose O2 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis z100 Yes width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limitlevels b068 ozn EELA itr Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes y Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Analog operation 483 b070 level at O 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Analog operation b071 level at Ol 0 to 100 no
293. eration multimeter Protection check Check that there Rectifier circuit PAE eA Short circuit or open Voltmeter p goes the Inverter protection Error is found in display circuits O AE circuit output under the sequence through sequence t e simulated conditions protection operation Check that there Rotates are no abnormal o Rotate manually smoothly vibration or when the power is off No faults Cooling fan Sounds Reference of ae Check that the the replacement y connection parts O Visual inspection period 10 years are secure 23 Fin Check that there ig O Visual inspection No clogging no clogging Check that the Check that the LED indicatorsare O Visual inspection LED indicators Display lit properly are lit properly F Clean with a soft Display Cleaning Q cloth Check that the Check the indicated The specified or A control values Voltmeter Meter indicated value is O values on the panel must be ammeter normal meters satisfied 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 5 6 1 I
294. ercurrent protection to work to trip the Inverter lf 04 OSLV 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 V2 sensor vector control is selected in control method selection A044 this function is disabled ee FW Output frequency b082 Output voltage Carrier Frequency You can change the PWM waveform carrier frequency output from the Inverter Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 5 0 b083 Carrier frequency kHz 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 3 0 e With the carrier frequency set high you can reduce metallic noise from the motor However this increases noise or leakage current from the Inverter e Helps avoid mechanical or motor resonance The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity To raise the carrier frequency fc derate the output current as shown in the following table e Set a derating output current value as electronic thermal level If the existing electronic thermal value is lower than the derating value the above setting is not required For details on the electronic thermal function refer to page 4 46 e To raise the carrier frequency reduce the output current or derate the rated current as shown in the graph below Voltage 200 V class 400 V class S Derating at fc 15 kHz Capacity Max fc kHz Derating at fc 15 kHz Max fc kHz 75 to 132 kW is for 10 kHz 0 4 kw 15 100 15 100 0
295. erdrence 3 ModBus communication 1201h Laney A001 R W 4 Option 1 selection 5 Option 2 6 Pulse train frequency 7 Not used 10 Frequency operation result 1 Terminal 2 Digital Operator F001 1202h RUN command selection A002 R W 3 ModBus communication 4 Option 1 5 Option 2 4 178 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function pegis Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 1203h Base frequency A003 R W 30 to Max frequency 1 Hz 1204h Maximum frequency A004 R W 30 to 400 1 Hz 0 Switches between O OI 1 Switches between O O2 1205h O OI selection A005 R W 2 Switches between O VR 3 Switches between OI VR 4 Switches between O2 VR 0 O2 only A 1 O OI auxiliary speed not reversible 12061 92 selection ADOG RW 2 O OI auxiliary speed reversible Aa 3 O2 disabled 1207h to Not used 120Ah A011 120Bh HIGH O start frequency R W O to 40000 0 01 Hz A011 120Ch LOW A012 120Dh HIGH O end frequency R W O to 40000 0 01 Hz 120Eh A012 LOW 120Fh O start ratio A013 R W O to Oend ratio 1 1210h O end ratio A014 R W O start ratio to 100 1 1211h O start selection A015 pw External start frequency z 1 0 Hz 1 to 30 1212h O O2 Ol sampling A016 R W 31 500 ms filter with a hysteresis of 1 0 1 Hz 1213h Not used 1214h Not used
296. eristics A344 R W VC _ selection 1 VP 323Fh to 326Ch Not used A392 326Dh HIGH R W 3rd acceleration time 2 AAO 1 to 360000 0 01 s 326Eh LOW R W A393 326Fh HIGH R W 3rd deceleration time 2 1 to 360000 0 01 s A393 3270h LOW R W 3271h to 330B Not used 330Ch AEN thermal b312 R W 200 to 1000 0 1 3rd electronic thermal 0 Reduced torque characteristics 330Dh ae b313 R W 1 Constant torque characteristics characteristics selection 2 Free setting 330Eh to 3506h Not used 3507h 3rd stabilization parameter H306 R W O to 255 1 From 3508h Not used 4 210 Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting 5 1 DPA Warning RUNA o iiano 5 9 Maintenance Operations 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Error Code List Bispleyion Reference Name Description Digital Points to check and remedy Operator page If the motor is Is there any rapid load fluctuation restrained or rapidly Eliminate load fluctuation accelerated or Constant Is there any output short circuit decelerated a large speed EG ta Check the output wires E currentflows through Is there any ground fault the Inverter which Check the output wires and motor results in a malfunction
297. erload limit operation b021 selection 02 Enabled in constant speed operation 01 No 03 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation Accelerates during regeneration 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 Rae 0 4 to 55 kW x b022 Overigadilimit level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated No A 75 to 132 kW current piza Cvenead limit 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s parameter 4 49 S 00 Disabled E 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed S AE operation A b024 Overload limit 02 Enabled in constant speed operation 01 No selection 2 i p S 03 Enabled in acceleration constant speed 5 operation Accelerates during 5 regeneration 6 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 P 0 4 to 55 kW x D0257 Overigadilimitlevel 2 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated N i 8 75 to 132 kW current gt ll p26 poveoacilimt 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s O parameter 2 Overcurrent 00 Disabled oes suppression function 01 Enabled E No E 491 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current b028 Active Frequency 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A Matching restart level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current current 75 to 132 kW Active Frequency 4 43 b029 Matching restart 0 10 to 30 00 0 50 No s 4 69 parameter Starting frequency at 00 Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max frequency 00 No Matching restart 02 Set frequency 00 Data other than b031 cannot be
298. es 1 to 5 3 Free V f frequency 6 b100 b102 b104 b106 b108 b110 Free electric thermal Free electric thermal frequencies 2 3 b017 b019 lt frequency 1 b015 Free electric thermal frequency 1 b015 gt Free electric thermal 120 frequency 2 Free electric thermal frequency 3 b019 lt b017 Free electric thermal Free electric thermal frequencies 12 b015 b017 gt frequency 3 b019 1 In this case the base frequency is rewritten when correcting parameters Change the data to a correct value if a warning occurs Otherwise the motor may burn out depending on the value 2 Checks even if the frequency reference selection A001 is set other than to the Digital Operator 02 3 The jump frequency is rewritten into the value of the subtraction of the jump width lower limit from the jump frequency e Warning appears when a target code set data meets the condition shown above in relation to the base code data e Parameters are rewritten into the data of the base code rewritten at start up 5 10 suoljei0do sdueUdj UIeEW 5 2 Warning Function fo suoljei0ado sdueUd UIeEW 5 11 Chapter 6 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance 0s 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance N WARNING Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling
299. evel b028 If the Inverter trips with this method reduce the b028 set value until restart after output is shut off e The Digital Operator displays o o o2 7 FRS I b028 Output current LZ Decelerates according to b029 Inverter output frequency N Frequency selected in b030 Motor rotation speed 003 i 4 45 4 2 Function Mode Input Power Supply Phase Loss Protection Function Selection e This function outputs an alarm when the Inverter s input power supply has phase loss Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Input phase loss protection 00 Disabled p096 selection 01 Enabled oo _ Phase loss may cause the Inverter to fail as follows e The main capacitor ripple current increases resulting in remarkable reduction in the capacitor s service life When load is applied the Inverter s internal converter or thyristor may be damaged Electronic Thermal Function e Causes a trip to protect the motor from overheating Set this according to the motor rated current Provides the most appropriate protection characteristics taking into account the decline of the motor cooling capability at a low speed Outputs an alarm signal before an electronic thermal trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b012 Electronic thermal level b212 2nd electronic thermal level Bee
300. f BOK is not selected the Inverter restarts acceleration up to a set frequency after the period set in acceleration wait time b122 elapses 5 After the RUN command is turned off the Inverter decelerates to the brake release frequency b125 and turns off the brake release signal BRK 6 If the brake confirmation signal BOK is allocated to a multi function input when 44 is set in any of C001 to C008 the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal to be turned off for the period set in brake confirmation wait time b124 without decelerating after the brake release signal is turned off If the brake confirmation signal is not turned off within the period set in b124 the Inverter outputs the brake error signal BER resulting in trip If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi function input brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled and the Inverter performs processing 7 after the brake release signal is turned off 7 After the brake confirmation signal is turned off or after the brake release signal is turned off if BOK is not selected the Inverter restarts deceleration down to 0 Hz after the period set in stop wait time b123 elapses b0125 Brake release b127 Brake input frequency frequency Output frequency ae JOI Nee lt gt b123 Brake wait time RUN command Jal b121 Brake wait time for stopping l for release Brake release signal b122 Acceleration wait time l Brake confirmation
301. f tripping 1 V 0036h Fault monitor 4 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0037h Fault monitor 4 RUN time LOW 0038h Fault monitor 4 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 0039h Fault monitor 4 ON time LOW Note 1 The Inverter s rated current is 1000 Note 2 If the set value is 10000 100 0 sec or more the value in the second decimal place is ignored 4 174 os suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regisiter Function name Fuman R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 003Ah Fault monitor 5 factor Soe Inyerer IMP hactorisl page 4 175 003Bh Fault monitor 5 Inverter status See Inverter IMP FacIOrL ist page 4 175 003Ch Fault monitor 5 frequency HIGH 0 to 40000 9 01 003Dh Fault monitor 5 frequency LOW Hz 003Eh Fault monitor 5 current d085 Fes Output curent value atithetime of 0 1 A tripping 003Fh Fault monitor 5 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 0040h Fault monitor 5 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0041h Fault monitor 5 RUN time LOW 0042h Fault monitor 5 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 0043h Fault monitor 5 ON time LOW 0044h Fault monitor 6 factor SP Inverter Tripskactor List page 4 175 0045
302. factory default the relay output AL2 AL1 250 V AC 2A g contact selection C036 is set at NC contact Resistance 2 z between AL2 AL0 and NO contact between 0 2 A Induction 8 amp j amp ALO Relay output AL1 ALO AL1 ALO Tlel 5 common 250 VAC 1A Dle z Resistance 9 Jg 0 2 A Induction Contact min capacity 100 V AC 10 mA 5 V DC 100 mA Continued to the next page 2 2 Wiring ermine Terminal name Description Specifications symbol TH External thermistor Connect an external thermistor to this terminal Allowable input input Terminal to trip the Inverter when a temperature error voltage range a occurs 0 to 8 V DC al The PLC terminal functions as the common Input circuit el ElS terminal ld lc 3 ae 8V DC S 2l o Recommended thermistor characteristics JOKO lt gjo Allowable rated power 100 mW min TH S Impedance at temperature error 3 KQ Thermistor 1 k Temperature error detection level is adjustable PLC O between 0 and 9999 Q N Q gt Slide Switch SW1 Settings The built in slide switch is used to enable or disable the emergency shutoff function Factory Default Disabled For the location of the slide switch refer to page 2 12 Emergency Shutoff Function Factory Default Disabled e This function is intended to turn off the Inverter output stop switching the main element via only the multi function input terminal of the ha
303. fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock N CAUTION AN Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn Do not dismantle repair or modify this product Doing so may result in an injury Safety Information Maintenance and Inspection Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance inspection or parts replacement Precautions for Use Operation Stop Command e Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal Product Disposal Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product 6 1 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Daily Inspection e Basically check the following during operation The motor operates according to the settings e There are no errors in the installation environment
304. four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Reverse regeneration under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Reverse power running under four quadrant separate setting 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Forward regeneration under four quadrant separate setting b041 Torque limit 1 150 b042 Torque limit 2 150 b043 Torque limit 3 150 b044 Torque limit 4 150 40 Torque limit enabled 41 Torque limit switching 1 42 Torque limit switching 2 Multi function inputs C001 to C008 1 to 8 selection Multi function output terminal selection Related functions A044 A244 C001 to C008 C021 to C025 10 During torque limit 4 57 4 2 Function Mode eYou can select any of the following four torque limit functions from torque limit selection b040 lt Four quadrant separate setting mode gt Sets torque limits 1 to 4 0041 to b044 for four quadrants forward power running regeneration reverse power running and regeneration lt Terminal switching mode gt Switches over torque limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 depending on combinations of torque limit switchings 1 and 2 TRQ1 and TRQ2 allocated to multi function inputs Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes lt Analog input mode gt Sets a torque limit value depending on t
305. function selection input 2 C003 Multi function selection 1 input 3 C004 Multi function selection input 4 C005 Multi function input terminals Multi function selection input 5 C006 Multi function selection input 6 C007 Multi function selection input 7 C008 Multi function selection input 8 RV reverse CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG jogging DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP USP function CS commercial switch SFT soft lock AT analog input switching SET3 3rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operator SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 OLR overload lim
306. g Option Board Protection Function List E6 E7 Protection function list when the PG board 3G3AX PG01 is mounted OP1 appears when the option board is mounted on option port 1 Digital Operator connecter side and OP2 appears when it is mounted on option port 2 control circuit terminal block side Name Description Display on Digital Operator Shuts off the output and displays an error when the encoder wiring Encoder P z z disconnection or connection failure is detected the encoder is ean can disconnection s P P Sots Swe damaged or an encoder except for line driver output is used Shuts off the output and displays an error when the motor rotation Excess speed exceeds the maximum frequency A004 x the overspeed error PRES EIL detection level P026 Shuts off the output and displays an error when the current position Positioning error deviation against the position reference value exceeds 1 000 000 coe Emen pulses during position control ae Shuts off the output and displays an error when the current position Position control h a cet A A rand iri exceeds the setting values of the position limit range specification for EGJ ER ge Mp Forward P072 and Reverse P073 during absolute position control 3G3AX PG01 Shuts off the output and displays an error if a connection mounting ae connection error failure of the PG board is detecte
307. g Operation A063 Jump frequency 1 0 00 Jump frequency A064 width 1 0 50 A065 Jump frequency 2 0 00 53 Jump frequency 0 0 to 400 0 No Hz aose Jump frequency Jump frequency width 0 0 to 10 0 0 50 3 width 2 z A067 Jump frequency 3 0 00 4 30 O a Jump frequency 3 A068 width 3 0 50 O a xe D Acceleration stop 0 00 to 99 99 D A069 frequency 100 0 to 400 0 Dee ee ne D Aoro OoC RISER loo ioeo 0 0 No s 9 time 00 Disabled A071 PID selection 01 Enabled 00 No 02 Reverse output enabled A072 PID P gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 Yes F 0 0 to 999 9 A073 PID I gain 1000 to 3600 1 0 Yes s 0 00 to 99 99 A074 PIDD gain 100 0 0 00 Yes s E A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 No Time c 8 00 OI 4 31 T PID feedback PRO A076 02 RS485 communication 00 No selection 03 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output 00 OFF Deviation Target value Feedback value AO Rovers RID ancien 01 ON Deviation Feedback value Target 90 Ne _ value Aore ee it 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No function D 00 Disabled PID feedforward 01 0 Q Es S 2 ADS selection 02 Ol og Ne ed x 03 O2 00 Always ON A081 AVR selection 01 Always OFF 02 No 02 OFF during deceleration 4 35 A082 AVR voltage 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 200 No v selection 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 400 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi func
308. g contact signal R iON g 9 0 OFF 003Dh OHF fin overheat warning R 1 ON g 0 OFF 1 ON 003Eh LOC low current signal R 0 OFF 003Fh Not used 0040h Not used 0041h Not used 0042h Not used 0043h Not used 0044h Not used 0045h IRDY operation ready R AON P y 0 OFF 0046h FWR forward run signal R ON 9 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 171 4 4 Communication Function Coil No Item R W Description 0047h RVR reverse run signal R 1 ON g 0 OFF 1 ON 0048h MJA fatal fault signal R 0 OFF A 1 Writing 0049h During data write R 0 Normal 1 Error 004Ah CRC error R 0 No error 2 004Bh Overrun error R errar 2 0 No error 1 Error 004Ch Framing error R 0 No error 2 A 1 Error 004Dh Parity error R 0 No error 2 1 Error 004Eh Checksum error R 2 0 No error 004Fh Not used WCO 1 ON oooh window comparator O S 0 OFF WCOI 1 ON one oh window comparator Ol R 0 OFF WCO2 1 ON posh window comparator O2 B
309. gt frequency O Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration Deceleration time 4 time 2 time2 timet oe lt gt lt gt lt lt lt gt gt F002 F202 A092 A093 F003 F203 A292 A293 Acceleration deceleration pattern can be set for each system Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A097 Acceleration pattern selection 00 Line 01 S shape curve 02 U shape curve 00 A098 Deceleration pattern selection 03 Inverted U shape curve 04 EL S shape curve A131 Acceleration curve parameter 01 small curve to i E A132 Deceleration curve parameter 10 large curve 4 38 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A150 EL S curve ratio 1 during acceleration 0 to 50 25 A151 EL S curve ratio 2 during acceleration A152 EL S curve ratio 1 during deceleration 0 to 50 25 A153 EL S curve ratio 2 during deceleration e To select an acceleration or deceleration pattern use A097 or A098 respectively You can set acceleration and deceleration patterns individually lf any item other than Line A097 A098 00 is selected for the acceleration deceleration pattern the acceleration deceleration time is prolonged when this function is used with analog input A001 01 MPattern Selection Select an acceleration deceleration pattern with reference to the following table
310. h Fault monitor 6 Inverter status Seo INVENeP Aub RAGIONI page 4 175 0046h Fault monitor 6 frequency HIGH 0 to 40000 9 01 0047h Fault monitor 6 frequency LOW Hz 0048h Fault monitor 6 current BOG R e pu cuente gthg timegi 0 1 A tripping 0049h Fault monitor 6 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 004Ah Fault monitor 6 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 004Bh Fault monitor 6 RUN time LOW 004Ch Fault monitor 6 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 004Dh Fault monitor 6 ON time LOW 004Eh Warning monitor d090 R Warning code 004Fh to Not used O8FFh 0000 Motor parameter recalculation 0001 Set value storage in EEPROM 0900h EEPROM write W Other Motor parameter recalculation and set value storage in EEPROM 0901h to Not used 1000h Note 1 The Inverter s rated current is 1000 Note 2 If the set value is 10000 100 0 sec or more the value in the second decimal place is ignored Inverter Trip Factor List Trip factor high order factor Trip factor low order Inverter status Name Code Name Code No trip factor During reset 0 4 175 4 4 Communication Function Trip factor high order factor Trip factor low order Inverter status
311. h Pulse train frequency limit P058 R W O to 100 1 163Dh_ Not used 163Eh P060 R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 0 P060 163Fh LOW R W 1640h Bee R W Multi step position 1 command 1 P061 1641h LOW R W 1642h ee R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 2 P062 1643h LOW R W 1644h FOGS R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 3 P063 1645h LOW R W 1646h aon R W Multi step position 1 command 4 P064 1647h LOW R W 4 204 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function Regjia Function name Function R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 1648h BOGS R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 5 P065 1649h LOW R W 164Ah POG R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 6 P066 164Bh LOW R W 164Ch Po67 R W Multi step position HIGH 1 command 7 P067 164Dh LOW R W 164Eh Zero return mode P068 R W 0 Low 1 Hi1 2 Hi2 164Fh Zero return direction Po69 R W 0 FW 1 RV is selection 4650h LOW Speed zero return P070 R W 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz frequency 1651h High speed zero return P071 R W 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz frequency 1652h POTA R W Position range HIGH 0 to 536870912 at P012 2 specification forward P072 0 to 2147483647 at P012 3 1653h LOW R W 1654h ee R W Position range 536870912 to 0 at P012 2 i specification reverse P073 2147483647 to 0 at P012 3 165
312. h 0011h Fault frequency monitor d080 R 0 to 65530 1 time 0012h Fault monitor 1 factor 96e Inverter Tip Factor List page 4 175 0013h Fault monitor 1 Inverter status See Inventer IMP Factor list page 4 175 0014h Fault monitor 1 frequency HIGH 0 to 40000 0 01 0015h Fault monitor 1 frequency LOW Hz 0016h Fault monitor 1 current d081 Ra f Ouiputcurentvalue atthe time of 0 1 A tripping 0017h Fault monitor 1 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 0018h Fault monitor 1 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0019h Fault monitor 1 RUN time LOW 001Ah Fault monitor 1 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 001Bh Fault monitor 1 ON time LOW Note 1 The Inverter s rated current is 1000 Note 2 If the set value is 10000 100 0 sec or more the value in the second decimal place is ignored 4 173 4 4 Communication Function Register Function name EUnet Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 001Ch Fault monitor 2 factor See Inverter Trip Factor List o page 4 175 001Dh Fault monitor 2 Inverter status See lnvenen tng Facer List page 4 175 001Eh Fault monitor 2 frequency HIGH 0 to 40000 0 01 001Fh Fault monitor 2 frequency LOW Hz 0020h Fau
313. he voltage applied to terminal O2 on the control terminal block 0 to 10 V correspond to torque limit values of 0 to 200 Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes lt Option option 1 option 2 mode gt Enabled when an optional 3G3AX DI01 board is used For details refer to the optional board instruction manual lf the torque limit enable function TL is set for a multi function input the torque limit function set in b040 is enabled only when TL is turned on When TL is off the torque limit setting is disabled and the maximum value is defined as the torque limit value Unless the torque limit enable function TL is set for a multi function input the torque limit function set in torque limit selection b040 is always enabled With this function the torque limit value is set with the Inverter s maximum output current as 200 This means output torque varies depending on the combination of motors Note that the torque limit value is not the absolute one When the torque limit signal is selected in the multi function output selection the torque limit signal is turned on when the above torque limit function is activated e The following figure shows torque limits 1 to 4 with 00 four quadrant separate setting selected in torque limit selection b040 Torque Regeneration Power running b042 b041 Reverse RV gt Forward FW Power running Regeneration b043 b044 e The follo
314. his function during operation the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter output Before resuming operation turn off the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again Analog Command Hold Function While the AHD terminal is turned on the Inverter keeps external analog input results on hold Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C001 to C008 Multi function inputs 1 to 8 selection 65 AHD analog command held 4 91 While the AHD terminal is turned on you can use the UP DWN function based on the reference value of the analog signal kept on hold by this function lf UP DWN selection C101 is set to 01 the Inverter can store an UP DWN result e If the power is turned on with the AHD terminal turned on or if the RS terminal is turned on and then off the Inverter employs the data kept on hold immediately before AHD terminal ON l Analog input value Frequency reference 4 a Note1 If the control function is switched via the SET SET3 terminal with the AHD terminal turned on the set frequency is retained To change the control function turn off the AHD terminal once and keep the analog signal on hold again Note 2 If this function is frequently used the internal storage element service life may be shortened 4 2 Function Mode Multi function Pulse Counter PCNT PCC e The Inverter can input pulse trains via a multi f
315. ified level the motor may burn out 4 2 Function Mode Maximum Frequency e Set the maximum value of the output frequency e The value set here is the maximum value e g 10 V in the range from 0 to 10 V of the external analog input frequency reference The maximum Inverter output voltage from base to maximum frequencies is the voltage set in AVR voltage selection A082 e The Inverter cannot output voltage beyond that of the incoming voltage Output voltage A AVR voltage selection T A082 i gt Base frequency Max frequency Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A004 Maximum frequency A204 2nd maximum frequency 30 to 400 50 0 Hz A304 3rd maximum frequency Related functions A003 A203 A303 A081 A082 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on Analog Input O O2 Ol e The Inverter has three types of external analog input terminals O L terminal 0 to 10 V voltage input OI L terminal 4 to 20 mA current input O2 L terminal 10 to 10 V voltage input e Below are the settings for this function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Switches between O OI via terminal AT 01 Switches between O O2 via terminal AT 02 Switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used A005 O Ol selection 03 Switches betwee
316. ignal then the devices when the external trip function is Eor 4 82 trip drives output is shut off Z IC selected Available with the external trip Correct the external device error function selected Appears wher the powa 1S Umag When the USP function was selected did on with the RUN signal input into the you turn on the power with the RUN USP trip Inverter cor h s A 4 82 i Et Fein signal input into the Inverter Cancel the Available with the USP function RUN command and turn on the power selected Protects the Inverter if a ground fault Is there any ground fault Check the between the Inverter output unit and output wires and motor Ground the motor is detected when turning Is there any error in the Inverter itself fault trip on the power 1474 Disconnect the output wires to check 4 This function does not work when Is there any error in the main circuit there is residual voltage in the Check the main circuit Refer to Chapter motor 6 Repair Replace Appears if the incoming voltage continues to be higher than the Is the incoming supply voltage too high r specification value for 100 seconds Incoming while the Inverter is stopped while the Inverter is stopped A overvoltage Be ee 4567 Lower the incoming voltage correct the Trips when the main circuit DC Z lii 3 trip power supply fluctuation Fit an AC voltage reaches approximately 390 reactor to power supply i
317. ignored no No disconnection Analog operation b072 level at O2 100 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 17 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ees Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation b078 Integrated power Cleared with the Enter key after changing to 00 Yes o clear 01 4 4 po7g Mtegrated power 1 to 1000 1 No display gain b082 Starting frequency 0 10 to 9 99 0 50 No Hz 4 65 0 5 to 15 0 0 4 to 55 kW 50 No kHz Derating enabled 4 65 b083 Carrier frequency 0 5 to 10 0 75 to 132 kW 4 118 x gt 3 0 No kHz Derating enabled 00 Clears the trip monitor b084 Initialization selection 01 Initializes data 00 No 02 Clears the trip monitor and initializes data 4 66 b085 Initialization o0 00 No parameter selection Do not change poss Frequency __ 0 1 to 99 0 10 Yes 42 conversion coefficient 00 Enabled b087 STOP key selection 01 Disabled 00 No 4 68 02 Disabled only during stop 2 Free run stop 0070 Piz Start b088 selection 01 Frequency matching start 00 No 4 69 02 Active Frequency Matching restart Automatic carrier 00 Disabled b089 eduction 01 Enabled me Ne z A Usage rate of b090 regenerative braking 0
318. in constant speed operation 01 No selection 2 S 03 Enabled in acceleration constant speed 5 operation Accelerates during 5 regeneration 6 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 1 50 E 0 4 to 55 kW x DOES Overl ad limitIevel2 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current Rated No A 8 75 to 132 kW current z pone 2Yana limit 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s O parameter 2 Overcurrent 00 Disabled poet suppression function 01 Enabled a No _ 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current b028 Active Frequency 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A Matching restart level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current current 75 to 132 kW Active Frequency 4 43 b029 Matching restart 0 10 to 30 00 0 50 No s 4 69 parameter Starting frequency at 00 Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max frequency 00 No Matching restart 02 Set frequency 00 Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed x when terminal SFT is ON S a a G BOSS Sofi l ck selection 02 Data other than b031 cannot be changed 2i Ne ER 03 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008
319. ing power A054 to define the braking power other than at startup e Set the DC injection braking starting frequency in DC injection braking frequency A052 Once DC injection braking delay time A053 is set the Inverter stops output when the frequency reaches the A052 value after the RUN command FW has been turned off During the set time in A053 the motor remains in free run status After the set time in A053 DC injection braking starts e Edge and Level operations for internal DC injection braking work differently when the RUN command switches from STOP to RUN Edge operation Giving priority to DC injection braking time A055 performs DC injection braking for the set time in A055 DC injection braking operates for the set time in A055 when the output frequency reaches the set value in A052 after the RUN command FW is turned off Even if the RUN command is turned on during DC injection braking the latter is effective during the set time in A055 Example 5 a Example 6 a Level operation Giving priority to the RUN command shifts to normal operation ignoring DC injec tion braking time A055 When the RUN command is turned on during DC injection braking returns to normal operation ignoring the set time in A055 Example 5 b Example 6 b a Edge operation b Level operation i During startup example 4 a ii During startup example 4 b FW _ C J as Output frequency Output frequency A057 A057 A058 A058 S
320. injury due to an electric shock or fire 200 V class type D grounding 400 V class type C grounding Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock gt Pe POPE Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated Safety Precautions Z CAUTION Do not connect resistors to the terminals PD 1 P N directly Doing so might result in a small scale fire heat generation or damage to the unit Install a stop motion device to ensure safety Not doing so might result in a minor injury A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor regenerative braking unit In case of a braking resistor install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is det
321. intended parameter is not displayed check the setting of display selection b037 To display all parameters set 00 to b037 3 10 Operation e 3 5 Keys 3 5 Keys Name Description Switches between the command setting and the data setting and between the function mode and the extended function mode With this key you can always change the display as follows Supplemental Information To jump to d001 from any function mode hold down the Mode key for 3 seconds Mode key oo J al 7 a J M 5 LJ S LJ a han _ Note Always press the Enter key to store any changed data A Increment key Changes the set values parameters and commands yw Decrement key RUN RUN key Starts the operation Forward Reverse rotation depends on the F004 setting STOP STOP RESET key Stops the operation Functions as a reset key if an error occurs RESET Enters and stores changed data J Enter key Do not press the Enter key if you don t want to store any changes for example if you change the data inadvertently 3 11 3 6 Parameter Transition 3 6 Parameter Transition Operation and sequence of code display Operation and sequence of monitor data display
322. inversion only 2274h f wee R W 2nd 2 step acceleration 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 2275h Peete A299 R W LOW 2276h f ace R W 2nd 2 step deceleration 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 2277h ee peas R W LOW 2278h to Not used 230Bh 230Ch ae hemia b212 R W 200 to 1000 0 1 2nd electronic thermal 0 Reduction characteristics 230Dh b213 R W 1 Constant torque characteristics characteristics selection 2 Free setting 4 207 4 4 Communication Function Reo Function name Bunion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 230Eh to Not used 2501h 0 Standard 2502h 2nd motor parameter H202 R W 1 Auto tuning data 0 1 selection 2 Auto tuning data with online auto tuning 2503h 20d motor capacity H203 RW selection 0 2P 2nd motor pole number 1AF 2504h P H204 R W 2 6P selection j 3 8P 4 10P H205 2505h HIGH R W 2nd speed response 1 to 80000 0 001 2506h aoe R W LOW Jagg Da Siabilizagn H206 RW 0 to 255 1 parameter 2508h to Not used 2514h H220 2515h HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter R1 ET 1 to 65530 0 001 Q 2516h LOW R W H221 2517h HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter R2 1 to 65530 0 001 O H221 2518h LOW R W H222 2519h HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter L WE 1 to 65530 0 01 mH 251Ah LOW R W H223 251Bh HIGH R W 2nd motor parameter lo n23 1 to 65530 0 01 A
323. ion 00 Alarm 01 0 Hz start e F b001 Retry selection Ge Erequeney matching start 00 No p 03 Trip after frequency matching z deceleration stop 4 42 04 Active Frequency Matching restart 5 Allowable momentary 2 b002 power interruption 0 3 to 25 0 1 0 No s 5 time b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 4 85 a Momentary power 00 Disabled gt b004 interruption 01 Enabled 00 No g undervoltage trip 02 Disabled during stop and deceleration z during stop selection stop 4 42 Ss Momentary power 00 16 times b005 interruption retry time 01 No limit 00 No selection Input phase loss 00 Disabled pous protection selection 01 Enabled oe Ne E S g a k Frequency matching 0 00 to 99 99 4 42 b007 lower limit frequency 0 00 No Hz 4 68 g f 100 0 to 400 0 a setting 4 85 T 00 Trip 2 01 0 Hz start 3 3 j 02 Frequency matching start S BOO TAR rety selectionk Nie Trip after frequency matching me No _ 4 42 deceleration stop g 04 Active Frequency Matching restart O 2 j 7 gt boo9 Undervoltage retry 00 16 times 00 No S time selection 01 No limit c g Overvoltage b010 overcurrent retry time 1 to 3 3 No Time 442 selection b011 Trip retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 1 0 No s 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 12 gt x D 5 2 x Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List
324. ion command 2 bytes 03 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Frame format STX Station No Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Data 104 bytes Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D 4 147 Each monitor value 4 4 Communication Function Monitor item Unit Magnification Data size Description Output frequency Hz x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Output current A x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Rotation direction 8 bytes O Shep Forward 2 Reverse PID feedback monitor x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Multi function input o o 8 bytes See i monitor eye output _ 8 bytes See Z 5 MSB F requenicy conversion x 100 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code monitor LSB Output torque x4 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Output voltage monitor V x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code Power monitor kW x 10 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 00000000 is stored 8 bytes Preliminary data storage area RUN time monitor h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code ON time monitor h x1 8 bytes Decimal ASCII code 4 Multi function input terminal monitor
325. is function applies bias to the torque reference generated by speed control and is useful for ele vating applications e g elevator Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled P036 Torque bias mode 01 Set via the Digital Operator 00 02 Set via terminal O2 1 200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW P037 Torque bias value 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW 0 Enabled when P036 01 P038 Torque bias polarity 00 As per sign 00 _ selection 2 01 Depends on the RUN direction Related functions d010 1 When torque bias is set to the O2 terminal 10 to 10 V is recognized as 200 to 200 2 When 00 As per sign is selected When the polarity of a torque bias signal is the torque increases for forward rotation and when it is the torque increases for reverse rotation regardless of the RUN direction e When 01 Depends on the RUN direction is selected The torque bias signal polarity and torque bias direction vary depending on the RUN command direction Forward command Applies torque in the same direction as the torque bias Reverse command Applies torque in the opposite direction of the torque bias Torque Control Under this function the Inverter can be used in torque control as well as in the speed and pulse train position controls Torque control can be applied to winders and more To run the Inverter in torque control mode allocate 52 AT
326. it switching TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK Brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal block ATR torque command input permission KHC integrated power clear SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 CP2 position command selection 2 CP3 position command selection 3 ORL zero return limit signal ORG zero return startup signal FOT forward driving stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear NO no allocation 01 18 12 1 02 03 04 05 06 No po uoiesado 4 77 4 C001 and C003 are forcibly rewritten into 18 RS and 64 EMR respectively when the emergency shutoff function is enabled SW1 ON 64 cannot be set optionally When SW1 is turned ON once and then OFF C003 has no allocations no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 38 O
327. l Circuit terminal control gain switching control method srpna cooling fan control eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteteeeenaeeees cooling fan speed drop signal 4 102 Current position MONItOL eee ee eeeeeeeenteeeeeetteeeeees 4 5 Index 1 D data comparison display 4 53 4 55 DC injection braking eee eee eee eeeeeeeetees 4 24 DC voltage MOnitor ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseteeseeees 4 6 deceleration time 2 eceeeseceeeeeseneeteeseeeeneneeenes 4 37 CGT aling eters itis ak Sc ee Masa ait digital operator E electronic GEAR ia aeiia nenn a aii 4 125 electronic thermal monitor cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 7 emergency shutoff end FrEQUENCY cceeeeeeeeeeceeeeteeeteeeeeeeaeeeeeeeteaeetea endralaya tetvtors weil eared heen eee extended function mode external analog input ce eeeeeeeeeteeeeesteeeeeeenees external DC injection braking 00 ee 4 25 external therMistOr ccccceeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 4 73 external trip EXT eeecceceseeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeaeeee 4 82 fatal fault signal fault frequency monitor fault MOniItOF ssse4 eis aviv eae i aan fin overheat warning ce eee eeeeeteeeeeeeeees fin temperature MONItOF 0 2 ee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 4 4 FOC eh ie aati tetera aa aa aaa 4 117 forced Operator ee eeceeeseecseeeteeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeteaeens 4 89 forced
328. l I l l l l l l I l l I l I l Mea tis A aes seer _ ee ts cep ee Wot ee ee ee bh ee ee eS Me aes J l I l I l imc E St i se i Deis pet ee eis Se ee tt ee et J Displays _ _ _ _ if there has been no trip Warning Monitor d090 lf the set data is inconsistent with other data a warning code is displayed While this warning remains in effect the PROGRAM LED indicator PRG stays lit until forced to rewrite or correct the data For details on the Warning display refer to 5 2 Warning Function DC Voltage Monitor d102 Displays the DC voltage between P and N of the Inverter During operation the monitor value changes depending on the actual DC voltage of the Inverter Display 0 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 V Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor d103 Displays a regenerative braking load rate When the monitor value comes close to exceeding the value set in usage rate of the regenerative braking function b090 E06 Braking resistor overload protection works to trip the Inverter Display 0 0 to 100 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 4 6 suoljoun Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode Electronic Thermal Monitor d104 Displays an electronic thermal load rate When the monitor value comes close to exceeding 100 E05 Overload protection works to trip the Inverter Display 0 0 to 100 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 4 7 4 2 Function Mode 4 2 Function
329. l O Torque reference 01 Terminal Ol pps input selection 02 Terminal O2 og No _ 03 Digital Operator Torque reference 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 3 4 122 P034 setting 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW pe Nae s Polarity selection at 00 Signed P939 nae reterenc amp via 01 Depends on the RUN direction 00 Ne E 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 34 gt x D 5 2 z Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default aE N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page O setting operation 00 None P036 Torque bias mode 01 Digital Operator 00 No 02 Terminal O2 P037 Torque bias value coe 200 0 4 to 55 kw 0 Yes ae q 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW Torque bias polarity 00 Signed Pose selection 01 Depends on the RUN direction oY No Speed limit value in P039 torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz forward 4 122 Speed limit value in P040 torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz reverse P044 Not used oer 1 00 No so IIheare Do not change 00 Trip 01 Trip after deceleration stop po45 Operation setting at 02 Ignore oa No communications error 03 Free run i 04 Deceleration stop 2 Output assembl a amp poss P y ja 21 No se nh instance No setting 100 In
330. l screen selection b038 R W 2 d002 3 d003 4 d007 5 F001 User parameter automatic 0 Disabled 1329h setting function selection oS RW 1 Enabled 0 Four quadrant separate setting 1 Terminal switching 132Ah Torque limit selection b040 R W 2 Analog Input 3 Option 1 4 Option 2 Torque limit 1 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW A 132Bh Four quadrant mode b041 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 255 no 1 forward power running Torque limit 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 5 132Ch Four quadrant mode b042 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 255 no 1 reversed regeneration Torque limit 3 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 132Dh Four quadrant mode b043 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 255 no 1 reversed power running Torque limit 4 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 5 132Eh Four quadrant mode b044 R W 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW 255 no 1 forward regeneration 132Fh Torque LADSTOP b045 R W o Disabled _ selection 1 Enabled 1330h Reverse rotation i b046 R W a Disabled S prevention selection 1 Enabled 1331h to Not used 1333h 0 Disabled h 1 Deceleration stop Selection or non stop 2 Momentary power interruption non 1334h function at momentary b050 RW lt raed P ns i stop without recovery power interruption 3 Momentary power interruption non stop with recovery Starting voltage of 4335h NOt Sp function at b051 RW 0 to 10000 0 1 V momentary power interruption Starting deceleration level 1336h 9f non stop
331. l stations Command Transmission command 2 bytes 08 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Response frame Positive response Refer to page 4 155 Negative response Refer to page 4 155 lt Command 09 gt Checks if a set value can be stored in EEPROM e Transmission frame Frame format 4 4 Communication Function STX Station No Command BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 09 Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D e Response frame Frame format STX Station No ACK Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data 2 bytes 01 Enabled Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D Negative response Refer to page 4 155 lt Command 0A gt Stores a
332. lae gi Reference current value inductance 0 4 to 1 5 AX RAI02800100 DE 10 0 2 8 2 2 to 3 7 AX RAI00880200 DE 20 0 0 88 5 5 to 7 5 AX RAI00350335 DE 33 5 0 35 3 phase 200V 11 0 to 15 0 AX RAI00180670 DE 67 0 0 18 18 5 to 22 0 AX RAI00091000 DE 100 0 0 09 30 0 to 37 0 AX RAI00071550 DE 155 0 0 07 45 0 to 55 0 AX RAI00042300 DE 230 0 0 04 0 4 to 1 5 AX RAI07700050 DE 5 0 7 7 2 2 to 3 7 AX RAI03500100 DE 10 0 3 5 5 5 to 7 5 AX RAI01300170 DE 17 0 1 3 3 phase 400V 11 0 to 15 0 AX RAI00740335 DE 33 5 0 74 18 5 to 22 0 AX RAI00360500 DE 50 0 0 36 30 0 to 37 0 AX RAI00290780 DE 78 0 0 29 45 0 to 55 0 AX RAI00191150 DE 115 0 0 19 7 25 7 3 Options Chokes AX FEROOOIO RE Dimensional Drawing i X Oo 0 W Y m N O 0 L H Reference D Motor Dimensions Weight diameter KW Kg L W H X Y m AX FER2102 RE 21 lt 2 2 85 22 46 70 5 0 1 AX FER2515 RE 25 lt 15 105 25 62 90 5 0 2 AX FER5045 RE 50 lt 45 150 50 110 125 30 5 0 7 AX FER6055 RE 60 lt 55 200 65 170 180 45 6 1 7 suole oads 7 26 7 3 Options Digital Operator 3G3AX OP 3G3AX OP01 omron SYSDRIVE POWER O 3G3AX OP01 RUN command LED indicator STOP RESET Operation keys 4 FREQ adjuster A Specifications Panel cut dimensions External dimensions Height 55 mm x Width
333. ld be 20 m or less COCR OOOOO 6 DOOOKEHN e To use a relay for the multi function output terminal connect a surge absorbing diode in parallel with the coil e Do not short circuit the analog power supply terminals between H and L and or the interface power supply terminals between P24 and PLC Doing so may result in failure of the Inverter Arrangement of the Control Circuit Terminal Block H 02 AM FM TH FW 8 CM1 5 3 1 14 13 11 AL1 L oO Ol AMI P24 PLC CM1 7 6 4 2 15 CM2 12 ALO AL2 Terminal screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 7 N m 0 8 max Selecting the Input Control Logic By factory default the terminal FW and the multi function input terminal are set to sink logic NPN To change the input control logic to source logic PNP remove the short circuit bar between the terminals P24 and CM1 on the control circuit terminal block and connect it between the terminals CM1 and PLC 2 21 2 2 Wiring E Selecting the Sequence Input Method Sink Source Logic When external power supply is used Remove the short circuit bar from the control terminal block When the Inverter s internal interface power supply is used Sink logic Output unit etc Inverter Inverter Source logic Output unit etc Output unit etc k Inverter Inverter E Selecting the
334. lection 2 GAAB RAN except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 2 OAND AED Nig Stet spi ee Olar RVV R OR _ p 2 XOR Logic output signal 3 Same as C021 to C026 1498h selection 1 wee RAN except LOG1 to 6 T Logic output signal 3 Same as C021 to C026 1499h selection 2 0149 RINN except LOG1 to 6 _ Logic output signal 3 ORAND 1A9AR I A ama Cie RWS IOR ad p 2 XOR Logic output signal 4 Same as C021 to C026 149Bh selection 4 GISI RAY except LOG1 to 6 _ Logic output signal 4 Same as C021 to C026 149Ch selection 2 wee RAY except LOG1 to 6 ae Logic output signal 4 0 AND 1490 ig E aee A en RAW ek o P 2 XOR Logic output signal 5 Same as C021 to C026 149EN selection 1 C154 RW except LOG1 to 6 _ Logic output signal 5 Same as C021 to C026 149Fh Selection 2 C159 RW except LOG1 to 6 Logic output signal 5 0 AND TAON Ii Aia baer 156 RW As _ p 2 XOR Logic output signal 6 Same as C021 to C026 14A1h Selection 1 eiS RAV except LOG1 to 6 _ Logic output signal 6 Same as C021 to C026 14A2h Selection 2 C158 RIY except LOG1 to 6 _ Logic output signal 6 CAND ela lanl Re pit Ae a Cle RAW i OR _ p 2 XOR 14A4h E RES i sha C160 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 14A5h MPU terminal response C161 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 2 14A6h MPU terminal response C162 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 3 44A7h DPU terminal response C163 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 4 q4agh Pet terminal response C164 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 5 q4agh UP
335. ljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Free run Stop Selection e Activating the free run stop FRS function shuts off the Inverter output letting the motor go into free run status Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 0 Hz start example 1 i 01 Frequency matching start example 2 pase bree tun slop selection 02 Active Frequency Matching restart 00 _ example 3 b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 Time before restart 1 0 s b007 Frequency matching lower 0 00 to 400 0 0 00 Hz limit frequency setting Set a frequency matching level b028 Active Frequency 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated Rated current A Matching restart level current Active Frequency b029 Matching restart 0 10 to 30 00 0 50 s parameter Starting frequency at 00 Frequency at interruption b030 Active Frequency 01 Max frequency 00 Matching restart 02 Set frequency e Helps stop the motor using a mechanical brake such as an electromagnetic one Note that an overcurrent trip may occur if the mechanical brake forces the motor to stop during Inverter output Allocate 11 FRS to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Performs a free run stop FRS while the FRS terminal is turned on When the FRS terminal is turned off the motor restarts after the retry wait time b003 elapses However if RUN command selection A002 is set to 02 Digital Operator the Inverter does not restart To resta
336. llage 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s 476 protection parameter Overvoltage p433 Protection 0 00 to 2 55 0 50 Yes proportional gain setting Overvoltage EN 0 000 to 9 999 b134 protection integral 10 000 to 65 53 0 060 Yes s time setting 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 20 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C001 Multi function selection 1 input 1 C002 Multi function selection input 2 C003 Multi function selection 1 input 3 C004 Multi function selection input 4 C005 Multi function input terminals Multi function selection input 5 C006 Multi function selection input 6 C007 Multi function selection input 7 C008 Multi function selection input 8 RV reverse CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 JG jogging DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP USP function CS commercial switch SFT soft lock AT analog input swit
337. lt monitor 2 current d082 Output curent yalue ar the tume ot 0 1 A tripping 0021h Fault monitor 2 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 0022h Fault monitor 2 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 0023h Fault monitor 2 RUN time LOW 0024h Fault monitor 2 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 0025h Fault monitor 2 ON time LOW 0026h Fault monitor 3 factor See Inverter Trip Factor List page 4 175 0027h Fault monitor 3 Inverter status See Inyerer Tp kactor List page 4 175 0028h Fault monitor 3 frequency HIGH 0 to 40000 on 0029h Fault monitor 3 frequency LOW Hz 002Ah Fault monitor 3 current d083 Output cdrrent value atthe time el 0 1 A tripping 002Bh Fault monitor 3 voltage DC input voltage at the time of tripping 1 V 002Ch Fault monitor 3 RUN time HIGH Total RUN time before the trip 1 h 002Dh Fault monitor 3 RUN time LOW 002Eh Fault monitor 3 ON time HIGH Total power ON time before the trip 1 h 002Fh Fault monitor 3 ON time LOW 0030h Fault monitor 4 factor See Inverter Trip Factor List n page 4 175 0031h Fault monitor 4 Inverter status ce Invener TnipiFactor List page 4 175 0032h Fault monitor 4 frequency HIGH 0 01 0 to 40000 i 0033h Fault monitor 4 frequency LOW Hz 0034h Fault monitor 4 current d084 e a gHimne or 0 1 A tripping 0035h Fault monitor 4 voltage DC input voltage at the time o
338. mentary power 02 Enabled without recovery R No _ interruption 03 Enabled with recovery Starting voltage of non stop function at 0 0 to 999 9 220 D994 momentary power 1000 440 No y interruption Stop deceleration level of non stop S 0 0 to 999 9 360 b052 function at 1000 720 No V momentary power interruption 2 Deceleration time of 4 60 non stop inet at 0 0 1 t0 99 99 6 b053 omenan oone 100 0 to 999 9 1 00 No s i ary p 1000 to 3600 interruption Deceleration starting width of non stop b054 function at 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 No Hz momentary power interruption Proportional gain setting of non stop b055 function at 0 00 to 2 55 0 20 Yes momentary power interruption Integral time setting bose Of non stop function 9 000 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 0 100 Yes s 4 60 at momentary power interruption 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 16 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter i Default Cinge Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation Set an upper limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 3 pus O upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 190 ves a width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 3 pte O lower limit level Upper limit Upp
339. minal If you choose to 100 enable proportional control set a KPP value in H052 P proportional gain The relationship between the KPP value and speed change ratio is expressed broadly in the following formula rpm 0 10 Speed change ratio ___ _ _ _ KPP set value The relationship between speed change ratio and speed error is expressed broadly in the following formula Speed error at rated torque A Speed change ratio _________________ x 100 Synchronous rpm at base frequency 4 90 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Forced Terminal Block Function F TM e This function forcibly enables operation via the control terminal block by turning on off the multi function terminal if the frequency reference RUN command sources are not set to the control terminal block Data Symbol Function name Description 51 F TM Multi function input selection Forced terminal Available input terminals C001 to C008 Related codes A001 A002 lf the Forced Terminal Block function is selected in the multi function input selection the Inverter is operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source selected in A001 and A002 when the input signal is OFF When the signal is ON the Inverter is forced to operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the control circuit terminal block lf you switch on off t
340. minator P029 100 In this case the orientation stop position is defined as 4096 divisions of the encoder s one rotation Note that the concept of the stop position is inverted from the description in Orientation stop position conceptual drawing page 4 130 Position Bias Function Set this function to apply position command bias in the pulse train position control mode The set number of pulses is added to a change value at 2 ms internals This is used for adjusting the phase of synchronization points during synchronous operation Set an addition value in position bias amount P024 A positive value adds the value in the forward direction Related functions P024 4 128 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Speed Bias Function This function applies speed command bias in the pulse train position control mode Set a bias value in frequency addition amount A145 and select a sign in frequency addition direc tion A146 Allocate 50 ADD to any of the multi function inputs While the ADD terminal is turned on the bias value is added to the speed command Speed bias Position bias ADD terminal Set with A146 Position command variation Speed control Position feedback variation Speed feedback value Related functions A145 A146 Orientation Function This function determines a motor position at a single desired point during one rotation of the motor an
341. mistake the terminal where you allocated the function last takes precedence The previous data is set to no no allocation and the terminal function is disabled After allocating functions to terminals 1 to 8 make sure that the function settings have been stored ee Data Function name Reference item Page 01 RV Reverse command RUN command 02 CF1 Multi step speed setting binary 1 03 CF2 Multi step speed setting binary 2 Multi step speed operation function 4 16 04 CF3 Multi step speed setting binary 3 05 CF4 Multi step speed setting binary 4 Multi step speed operation function 4 16 06 JG Jogging Jogging operation 4 18 TEL DC injection braking external DC C001 to 07 DB External DC injection braking injection braking 4 24 cate 08 SET 2nd control 2nd 3rd control function 4 80 09 2CH _ 2 step acceleration deceleration 2 step acceleration deceleration 4 37 function 11 FRS Free run stop Free run stop 4 69 12 EXT External trip External trip 4 82 13 USP USP function Power recovery restart prevention 4 82 function 14 CS Commercial switch Commercial switch 4 83 4 77 4 2 Function Mode Bera Data Function name Reference item Page 15 SFT Soft lock Soft lock 4 51 16 AT Analog input switching External analog input 4 12 17 SET3 3rd control 2nd
342. mong 45 Signal during RUN RUN Constant speed arrival signal FA1 Over set frequency arrival signal FA2 Overload warning OL Excessive PID deviation OD Alarm signal AL Set frequency only arrival signal FA3 Overtorque OTQ Signal during momentary power interruption IP Signal during undervoltage UV Torque limit TRQ RUN time exceeded RNT Power ON time exceeded ONT Thermal warning THM Brake release BRK Brake error BER 0 Hz signal ZS Excessive speed deviation DSE Position ready POK Set frequency exceeded 2 FA4 Set frequency only 2 FA5 Overload warning 2 OL2 Analog O disconnection detection ODc Analog Ol disconnection detection OIDc Analog O2 disconnection detection O2Dc PID FB status output FBV Network error NDc Logic operation output 1 LOG1 Logic operation output 2 LOG2 Logic operation output 3 LOG3 Logic operation output 4 LOG4 Logic operation output 5 LOG5 Logic operation output 6 LOG6 Capacitor life warning WAC Cooling fan life warning WAF Starting contact signal FR Fin overheat warning OHF Light load detection signal LOC Operation ready IRDY Forward run FWR Reverse run RVR Fatal fault MJA Window comparator O WCO Window comparator OI WCOIl Window comparator O2 WCO2 Alarm codes 0 to 3 ACO to AC3 suoljeoyinads Multi function monitor output terminal Analog voltage output Analog current output Pulse train outpu
343. mperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 3 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection period Inspection ME ee Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Check that any parts which may need tightening O Tighten securely No faults General are secure Check that no part has indications of O Visual inspection No faults overheating Check that there is no distortion with O Connection the conductor conductor Visual inspection No faults and wire Check that there is no damage to the O wire Insulation Terminal Check that there is oO Visual inspection No faults block no damage Disconnect the wiring of the Inverter main OA Refer to circuit terminal block Checking the Inverter unit and measure the 9 Inverter and Main Check the resistance levels Converter circuit Converter resistance o between terminals inverter uni Analog unit between the R L1 S L2 T L3 and rebl ement tester including terminals P N and between BN the resistor U T1 V T2 W
344. n 01h An unsupported function has been specified 02h Specified address does not exist 03h Specified data has an unacceptable format 21h Data is out of the Inverter s range for writing into the holding register The Inverter does not allow this function e Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed during operation 22h e Has issued the enter command during operation UV e Has written into the register during trip UV e Has written into the read only register coil lt No Response gt The Inverter ignores the query and does not respond if e The broadcast is received A communication error is detected in receiving a query e The query slave address does not correspond with the slave address set for the Inverter e The time interval between 2 pieces of data that configure the message is less than a 3 5 character length e Query data length is inappropriate Note If the timer is set in the master to monitor response but no response is returned within the set time period send the same query again 4 161 4 4 Communication Function HExplanation of Each Function Code lt Reading Coil Status 01h gt Reads out the coil status ON OFF Example Read multi function input terminals 1 to 6 on the Inverter with slave address 8 Refer to the following table for the multi function input terminal status
345. n SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 21 3 7 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page A005 O OI selection 00 01 02 03 04 Switches between O OI via terminal AT Switches between O O2 via terminal AT Switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between OI FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Switches between O2 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 00 No A006 O2 selection 00 01 02 03 O2 only O OI auxiliary frequency reference not reversible O OI auxiliary frequency reference reversible O2 disabled 03 No 4 12 Analog input Others A011 O start frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No Hz A012 O end frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No Hz A013 O start ratio 0 to O end ratio No A014 O end ratio O start ratio to 100 100 No A015 O start selection 00 01 External start frequency A011 set value 0 Hz 01 No 4 14 A016 O O2 Ol sampling 1 to 30 31 with 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz hysteresis 31 No 4 15 A017 Not used Use 00 Do not
346. n Ol FREQ adjuster via 00 terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 04 Switches between O2 FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used 00 O2 only 01 Auxiliary frequency reference of O and Ol not reversible 02 Auxiliary frequency reference of O and Ol reversible 03 O2 disabled A006 O2 selection 03 4 12 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Related functions A005 A006 C001 to C008 e The frequency reference and reversibility depend on whether 16 AT is allocated to a multi function input and depend on the combination of A005 and A006 as shown below If the frequency reference is reversible the motor runs in the reverse direction when main frequency reference auxiliary frequency reference is less than zero even if the FW Forward terminal is ON Also note that the motor may run in the reverse direction resulting in prolonged acceleration time or other phenomena if the voltage fluctuates around 0 V even with the O2 terminal not connected AT Auxiliary frequency A006 A005 Main frequency reference reference Reversibility terminal i O2 L terminal OFF O L terminal Disabled 00 Not ON OI L terminal Disabled i 00 03 reversible ji OFF O L terminal Disabled ON O2 L terminal Disable
347. n name Data Default setting Unit A063 Jump frequency 1 A065 Jump frequency 2 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 A067 Jump frequency 3 7 Zz A064 Jump frequency width 1 A066 Jump frequency width 2 0 0 to 10 0 0 5 A068 Jump frequency width 3 Related functions C001 to C008 eYou cannot set output frequencies within a jump frequency setting range where the frequency jump function avoids steady operation e The output frequency fluctuates continuously according to the acceleration deceleration time during both actions You can set up to three points for the jump frequency Output frequency A067 A063 Acceleration Stop Function Frequency reference When the moment of inertia of a machine load is large this function delays acceleration until the motor starting slip is reduced Use this function if an overcurrent trip occurs during startup e Does not depend on acceleration pattern selection A097 and works with all acceleration patterns Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A069 Acceleration stop frequency 0 0 to 400 0 0 00 Hz A070 Acceleration stop time 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 s Output frequency A069 A070 Frequency reference 4 30 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode PID Function e This function enables process control of such elements as flow rate air volume and pressure Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled
348. n once The tuning result is not displayed If the RUN command is input during this period priority is given to the RUN command and the online auto tuning is aborted The tuning result is not reflected With DC injection braking during stop selected online auto tuning starts after DC injection braking is completed lf FOC and SON are allocated to terminals online auto tuning is not performed Operating Procedure 1 Set motor parameter selection H002 to 02 online auto tuning enabled Set auto tuning selection H001 to 00 disabled 2 Turn on the RUN command The Inverter automatically performs online auto tuning during stop Secondary Resistance Compensation Function Temperature Compensation e This function compensates for speed fluctuations resulting from motor temperature changes when sensorless vector control 0 Hz sensorless vector control or sensor vector control is selected as the control method To use this function set thermistor selection b098 to 02 NTC With other thermistors and settings the motor temperature cannot be detected correctly Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Secondary resistance ay P025 compensation enable disable o0 Disabled 00 01 Enabled selection 4 112 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Motor Parameter Selection e Set this parameter according to your motor e To use several motors with a single
349. n reverse While the Inverter is running forward or when stopped this signal is turned off Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal selection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 52 RVR reverse run signal 05 Output frequency kHz Signal during forward operation Signal during reverse operation Fatal Fault Signal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output terminal selection 53 MJA fatal fault signal C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 05 eIn addition to an alarm this signal is output if any of the following trips occurs These trips are caused by hardware No Error code Description 1 E10 CT error 2 E11 CPU error 3 E14 Grounding protection 4 E20 Abnormal temperature due to cooling fan stop 5 E23 Gate array communications error 6 E25 Main circuit error 4 105 4 2 Function Mode Multi function Output Terminal ON Delay OFF Delay eYou can set ON OFF delay times for each output terminal Output terminal ON delay time OFF delay time 11 C130 C131 12 C132 C133 13 C134 C135 14 C136 C137 15 C138 C139 RY AL C140 C141 All output signals immediately turn on off when the specified conditions are satisfi
350. nabled a ype trip 02 Disabled during stop and during deceleration 0o _ g b 4 stop when the RUN command is turned off selection 00 Restarts 16 times during momentary power Momentary power 2 s interruption b005 interruption retry s fee 00 01 Restarts limitlessly during momentary power time selection interruption Frequency 0 00 to 400 0 matching lower When the motor free running frequency falls below b007 MaR P Ee 0 00 Hz limit frequency this lower limit frequency the Inverter restarts at 0 setting Hz examples 3 and 4 00 Outputs an alarm after a trip 01 Restarts from 0 Hz at retry THo teh selection 02 Matches the frequency at retry and starts b008 7 Pie 03 Performs Active Frequency Matching start at 00 retry and trips after deceleration stop 04 Performs Active Frequency Matching restart at retry b009 Undervoltage retry 00 Restarts 16 times in the event of undervoltage 00 time selection 01 Restarts limitlessly in the event of undervoltage Overvoltage 1 to 3 b010 overcurrent retry Select the number of retry times in the event of 3 Time time overvoltage overcurrent gt 4 42 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit F or 0 3 to 100 b011 Trip retry wait time Time before restart 1 0 S Active Frequency 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW b028 Matching restart 0 20 x Rated
351. nal 1 00 gain 2 H060 Limit at 0 Hz 100 0 E 0 0 to 100 0 Yes H260 2nd limit at 0 Hz 100 0 a S H061 Boost amount at SLV 50 4 115 startup 0 Hz 8 aie 0 to 50 Yes 2nd boost amount at Heo SLV startup 0 Hz 50 H070 For PI proportional 0 0 to 999 9 100 0 Yes BS gain switching 1000 H071 For PI integral gain 0 0 to 999 9 100 0 Yes _ switching 1000 4 87 Hoza OE propomional l6at6410i00 1 00 Yes gain switching H073 Gain switching time 0 to 9999 100 Yes ms P001 Operation selection 00 Trip 00 No o at option 1 error 01 Continues operation zag Operation selection 00 Trip one at option 2 error 01 Continues operation on No 4 120 128 to 9999 P011 Encoder pulses 1000 to 6500 10000 to 65000 1024 No Pulse Re 00 ASR speed control mode 01 APR pulse train position control mode a P012 oe mode 02 APR2 absolute position control mode 00 No _ pa 6 03 HAPR High resolution absolute position yes control mode O Pulse train mode 09 Mode 0 P013 selectio 01 Mode 1 00 No 4 123 02 Mode 2 FOIA Ar OnanonSiop 0 to 4095 0 No position P015 Orientation speed Starting frequency to Max frequency upper 5 00 No Hz 4 129 setting limit 120 0 P016 Orientation direction 00 Forward side 00 No ot setting 01 Reverse side 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 33 Appendix 1 Parameter List
352. nce Selection Select the method for using the frequency reference Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 03 ModBus communication Frequency reference A001 selection 04 Option 1 02 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency 07 Not used 10 Operation function result Related functions A005 A141 to A143 A145 A146 Data Frequency reference source 00 Set a frequency with the FREQ adjuster on the Digital Operator Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 01 Set a frequency via terminals O L Ol L O2 L 02 Set a frequency via the Digital Operator F001 03 Set a frequency through the ModBus communication 04 Set a frequency via the PCB mounted to option port 1 05 Set a frequency via the PCB mounted to option port 2 06 Set a frequency as a pulse train by using 3G3AX PG01 07 Not used 10 The operation result of the frequency operation function is defined as a frequency reference 4 10 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode RUN Command Selection Select the method for using the RUN STOP command Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 A002 RUN command 03 ModBus communication 02 selection 04 Option 1 05 Option 2 Related functions F004 C001 to C008 C019
353. nction Output Terminal Contact Selection page 4 94 This alarm is output through the self diagnosis based on the expected design life not a guaranteed value Therefore it has a margin of error depending on your environment or operation conditions Index Index Numerics 0 Hz sensorless vector Control s c 4 115 2 step acceleration deceleration ccceeeee 4 37 3 wire input FUNCTION 0 02 eee eee eeeee eect eeeeeeteeeeeteee 4 86 A acceleration stop acceleration time 2 acceleration deceleration pattern ceeeeeee 4 38 acceleration deceleration time ccceseeeeeeeeees 4 8 ADD irhatna iit ties Basho ands 4 41 E A hate ahi 4 91 AY forstean eia ete ret hate eit arene 4 93 alarm code OUtDUE eee eeeneeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeereeaaeeees 4 99 allowable momentary power interruption time 4 42 AM tags ti cen ear hh Se A aes 2 8 4 108 AM oes tee nni eead ledai 2 8 4 108 analog command hold function ceeeeeeeeee 4 91 automatic energy saving operation function 4 36 automatic optimum acceleration deceleration 4 36 automatic torque DOOSt ei eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 4 21 B capacitor life warning Carrier freQUENCY ccsccccecesseeessssteeeeesstseeeeesnaeeeees commercial switching Communication fUNCtION cceeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeee 4 139 constant torque characteristics VC ee 4 22 contro
354. ncy A101 0 00 to 400 0 a6 PE Set a start end frequency Nis O OI end frequenc A102 quency A013 0 O OI start ratio 0 to 100 A103 Set a start end ratio relative to an external 20 of frequency reference of 0 to 10 V and 4 to 20 i SE O OI end ratio mA 100 A104 i i A015 00 Start frequency A011 set value 01 A105 O OI start selection 01 0 Hz a Related functions A003 A203 A303 A081 A082 eTo input voltage ranging from 0 to 5 V on the OI L terminal set A014 to 50 Example 1 A015 A105 00 Max Max frequency frequency A012 A102 A012 A102 A011 A101 A011 A101 0 A013 A103 A014 A104 100 Analog input 0 A013 A103 A014 A104 100 0 V O mA 10 V 20 mA 0 Ol 0 V O mA 10 V 20 mA Example 2 A015 A105 01 Analog input 0 01 4 14 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Adjusting the O2 L Terminal Parameter No Function name Data Deiak Unit setting 400 to 400 A111 O2 start frequency Set a start frequency 0 00 Hz 400 to 400 A112 O2 end frequency Set an end frequency 0 00 100 to 100 A113 O2 start ratio Set a start ratio relative to an external 100 frequency reference of 10 to 10 V 100 to 100 A114 O2 end ratio Set an end ratio relative to an external 100 frequency reference of 10 to 10 V Related functions A003 A203 A303 A081 A082 Below is the ratio from 10 to 10 V 10 to 0 V
355. nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd acceleration time deceleration time base frequency maximum frequency multi step speed reference 0 torque boost selection manual torque boost voltage manual torque boost frequency V f characteristics selection automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain automatic torque boost slip compensation gain frequency upper limit frequency lower limit acceleration time 2 deceleration time 2 2 step acceleration deceleration selection 2 step acceleration frequency 2 step deceleration frequency electronic thermal level electronic thermal characteristics selection motor parameter selection motor capacity selection motor pole number selection speed response stabilization parameter motor parameter R1 motor parameter R2 motor parameter L motor parameter 10 motor parameter J motor parameter R1 auto tuning motor parameter R2 auto tuning motor parameter L auto tuning motor parameter I0 auto tuning motor parameter J auto tuning PI proportional gain PI integral gain P proportional gain Limit at 0 Hz Parameters changeable during operation e The 1st 2nd 3rd control functions are displayed identically You ll see which one is enabled by checking whether the terminal
356. nd Adjustment Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high Provide a separate holding brake if necessary 3 1 Precautions for Use Error Retry Function Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start HNon Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non stop function at momentary power interruption selection b050 because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on Operation Stop Command Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed When checking a signal with the main power supply applied if a signal voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal 3 2 uoiesado fo Operation 3 1 Operation Method 3 1 Operation Method This Inverter has the following operation methods that are selected by the RUN command frequency reference settings The features and the requirements for each operation method are also given below E To enter the RUN
357. ng R Read only R W Read and write enabled lt Coil Number List gt Coil No Item R W Description 0000h Not used 1 Run 0001h BUN commang R W 0 Stop Enabled when A002 03 REOR 1 Reverse 0002h Rotation direction command R W 0 Forward Enabled when A002 03 0003h External trip EXT R W 1 Trip 0004h Trip reset RS R W 1 Reset 0005h Not used 0006h Not used 0007h Multi function input terminal 1 R W TON P 0 OFF 1 0008h Multi function input terminal 2 R W KON P 0 OFF 0009h Multi function input terminal 3 R W On ulti function inp i 0 OFF 1 000Ah Multi function input terminal 4 R W TOW P 0 OFF OOOBh Multi function input terminal 5 R W Gon K 0 OFF 000Ch Multi function input terminal 6 R W TON p 0 OFF 000Dh Multi function input terminal 7 R W On P 0 OFF OOO0Eh Multi function input terminal 8 R W ON p 0 OFF 1 Run en Operation status R 0 Stop interlocked with d003 i Dy iat 1 Reverse Opak Rotation direction R 0 Forward Interlocked with d003 1 Ready 0011h Inverter ready R 0 Not ready 0012h Not used 0013h RUN during RUN R 1 During trip 0 Normal 0014h FA1 constant speed arrival signal R IFON P 9 0 OFF FA2 over set frequency arrival 1 ON gogai signal R 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circ
358. ng stop ROT reverse driving stop SPD speed position switching PCNT pulse counter PCC pulse counter clear NO no allocation 01 1 18 121 02 03 04 05 06 No 4 77 4 C001 and C003 are forcibly rewritten into 18 RS and 64 EMR respectively when the emergency shutoff function is enabled SW1 ON 64 cannot be set optionally When SW1 is turned ON once and then OFF C003 has no allocations no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 21 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Greige Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation C011 Multi function input 1 00 operation selection C012 Multi function input 2 00 operation selection C013 Multi function input 3 00 a operation selection Cc E C014 Multi function input 4 00 D operation selection 5 Ea j H H co15 Multi function input 5 0o NO 00 No _ 4 79 c operation selection 01 NC Q 9 C016 Multi function input 6 00 2 operation selection S co017 Multi function input 7 00 operation selection C018 Multi function input 8 00 operation selection C019 FW terminal 00 operation selection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function in
359. nput if needed V DC for 200 V class and 780 V DC p Pply inp for 400 V class Shuts off the output when a momentary power interruption Has the incoming power supply voltage occurs for 15 ms or more Momentary AES si dropped If the shutoff time is long it is POST normally recognized as a power cree Powerrecovery 4 60 interruption y 9 P amp 5 Is there a contact failure for MCCB and or shutoff Note that when restart is trip Mg selected the Inverter restarts at Replace MCCB Mg power on as long as the RUN P PAg command remains Temperature errorwhen Appears if a decrease of the cooling Has the cooling efficiency been reduced the rotation fan rotation speed has been Replace the cooling fan speed of the detected when a temperature error TE eins Is there any clogging in the heatsink fin cooling fan occurs Clean the fin decreases Shuts off the output if the Have you installed the Inverter vertically Temperature temperature has risen in the main Installation check error circuit because of the high ambient Ec 4 Is the ambient temperature high temperature Decrease the ambient temperature Is there any large electrical noise source around Gate array Trips when a fault is detected in Countermeasures against electrical communications communication behavior between 2 ar noise error the built in CPU and the gate array Has any internal cable been disconn
360. ns e Enabled in either control circuit terminal block or Digital Operator control mode When a limited RUN command is input the Digital Operator displays 2 77 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Rotation direction limit 00 Forward and Reverse are enabled b035 selection 01 Only Forward is enabled 00 02 Only Reverse is enabled 4 52 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reduced Voltage Startup Selection e Slowly increases voltage during motor startup e To increase torque during startup reduce the set value of reduced voltage startup selection b036 Note that if the value is too small the motor starts in full voltage starting mode possibly resulting in an overcurrent trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Reduced voltage startup disabled 01 to 255 b036 Reduced voltage startup 01 Short approx 6 ms 6 selection t 255 Long approx 1 53 s Related functions b082 FW o Starting frequency ____ b082 Output frequency Output voltage Display Selection eYou can change the items to be displayed on the Digital Operator Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Complete display 01 Individual display of functions b037 Display selection 02 User setting 04 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display __hno No allocation U001 to U012 User selection d0
361. nsional Drawing MRX A413K 2 12 p 79 480 POUTOQUTOTUT OUT AUNT OUUUCUUTETN TET TIIMIIN LIUQVAVUVOVUUQUOOUOUOUOUOUEUTUTUUOUEUOUOOTOTOTOTOTOTTTUTEUIUINT 710 740 7 13 12 380 480 FRPP Rr 270 7 3 Options 7 3 Options Braking Unit AX BCROOOOOOLD TE Dimensional Drawing B S __ lt F b e TAE Beni OVERCURRENT ACTIVE POWER DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE H H1 t BUSS Buss o B oe E Bi le T gt Dimensions Reference B B1 H H1 T S AX BCR4015045 TE 82 5 40 5 150 138 220 6 AX BCR4017068 TE AX BCR2035090 TE AX BCR2070130 TE 130 64 5 205 193 208 6 AX BCR4035090 TE AX BCR4070130 TE AX BCR4090240 TE 131 64 5 298 280 300 9 Specifications Specifications Voltage Reference Permanent Peak 5s max Minimum aan a connec
362. nspection and Maintenance Inspection period Inspection ME ee Inspection point Periodic Inspection method Criteria Meter part item Daily 1 year 2 years Check that there are no abnormal o Acoustic feeling and No faults vibrations or or visual inspection sounds General Check that there Check that there is no abnormal odor are no abnormal O No faults caused by damage or odors overheating Disconnect Inverter Motor aAa 3 main circuit terminals U T1 V T2 and Megger check W T3 and short Between the circuit the 3 phase Insulation collective motor O motor wires Then 5 MQ min 500 V DC resistance megger terminals and ground terminal use a megger to measure the resistance between the motor wire and ground terminal 1 The life of the smoothing capacitor depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Product Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycle or Appendix 2 Product Life Curve is based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 6 6 s ueUd UIeI pue uons dsu j Inspection and Maintenance 6 1 Inspection and Maintenance Megger test For a megger test of the external circuit be sure to disconnect all the terminals of the In
363. nstructions and other information necessary for design Chapter3 Operation Describes names of parts the Inverter s operations including how to use P P the keys on the Digital Operator and the monitor function Chapter 4 Functions Describes the functions of the Inverter Chapter 5 Maintenance Describes the causes and their countermeasures if the Inverter fails P Operations including the solutions to possible troubles troubleshooting Inspection and Describes items for periodical inspection and or maintenance for the Chapter 6 Maintenance Inverter Chapter7 Specifications Provides Inverter specifications as well as the specifications and dimensions of peripheral devices Describes the summarized parameter settings as a reference for users Appendix who have used this Inverter and understood the functions oo Contents WTMOCIICUOM sse a S ea oee Aa e ose AA ote ly asd dee sie De ell lat atte 1 Read and Understand this Manual c ceseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 2 Safety Precautions sensen Go uaielag ts alas hueess ude nantes uaaelant ae 5 Precautions for Safe WSC siisciercccccsventacedssevnurecenesewteeiedievevevecssvaweneheddddeeais 7 Precautions for Correct US cccceccccseseceneeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenanas 8 Checking Before Unpacking ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneaeaaeaaenenees 10 REVISION HIStONY samsetta s EEE Ae OTE RE ENA EAT Eai 11 About This Wilt es
364. nt 00 Enabled during acceleration deceleration Overload warning C040 ional o tb t mod constant speed 01 No 9 P 01 Enabled only during constant speed 5 0 0 Does not operate 4 49 P Ovelcad wami 0 1 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Rated w C041 level 9 0 4 to 55 kW rrent No A E 0 1 x Rated current to 1 80 x Rated current 5 75 to 132 kW 5 Arrival frequency 0 00 to 99 99 Q 2 coaz during acceleration 100 0 to 400 0 gog No Hg I ge F Z Arrival frequency 0 00 to 99 99 C043 during deceleration 100 0 to 400 0 0 09 N hiz gt oO Aaga Wee ELON 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 No 4 31 excessive level Arrival frequency 0 00 to 99 99 6043 during acceleration 2 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No be ae Arrival frequency 0 00 to 99 99 C046 during deceleration 2 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 lo Hz C052 PID FB upper limit 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 No 4 31 C053 PID FB lower limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 42 po uoiesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Cinge No Function name Monitor or data range n during Unit Page g operation Overtorque level C055_ Forward power 100 No running Overtorque level C056 Reverse 100 No regeneration 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW oe i 2 Overtorque level 0
365. ntation function 4 129 24 FA4 Set frequency exceeded 2 Frequency arrival signal 4 96 25 FA5 Set frequency only 2 26 OL2 Overload warning 2 Overload limit Overload warning 4 49 27 ODc Analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc Analog Ol disconnection detection Window comparator function 4 63 29 O2Dc Analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output PID function 4 31 32 NDc Network error Network error 4 102 4 93 4 2 Function Mode Data Description Reference item Page 33 LOG1 Logic operation output 1 34 LOGz2 Logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 36 LOG4 Logic operation output 4 pea een eee re 37 LOGS Logic operation output 5 38 LOG6 Logic operation output 6 39 WAC Capacitor life warning signal Capacitor life warning signal 4 101 40 WAF Cooling fan life warning signal Cooling fan speed drop signal 4 102 41 FR Starting contact signal Starting contact signal 4 103 42 OHF Fin overheat warning Fin overheat warning 4 103 43 LOC Light load detection signal Light load detection signal 4 104 44 Not used 45 Not used 46 Not used 47 Not used E 48 Not used 49 Not used 50 IRDY Operation ready signal Operation ready signal 4 104 51 FWR Forward run signal Forward run signal 4 104 52 RVR Reverse run signal Reverse run signal 4 105 53 MJA Fatal fault signal Fatal fault signal 4 105 54 WCO Window comparator O 55 WCOI
366. o Function name Monitor or data range in during Unit Page g operation C152 Logic output signal 4 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 3 00 AND C183 porton selection 91 OR 00 2 p 02 XOR g C154 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 5 selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 5 C155 Logic output signal 5 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 S selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 S l 00 AND No 4100 E aa rte o P 02 XOR K z C157 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 e selection 1 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 2 C158 Logic output signal 6 Same as options for C021 to C026 00 selection 2 excluding LOG1 to LOG6 i 00 AND gr a oR oo p 02 XOR c160 NPs terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 1 c161 Peet terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 2 c162 NPut terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 3 Input terminal 9 C163 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 D response time 4 g 7 m cred Pat terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 No ms 4 106 zZ response time 5 5 2 c165 ORL terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 2 response time 6 c166 NPUt terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 7 c167 Meet terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 response time 8 c168 FW terminal response lig to 200 x 2 ms 1 time o Multi step speed 4 16 2 C169 position 0 to 200 x 10 ms 0 No ms 4 132 5 determination time 2nd 3rd c
367. o the Exception Response section 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into the Coil 05h gt Writes into one coil The following table shows the coil status change Coil status OFF gt ON ON gt OFF Change data MSB FFh 00h Change data LSB 00h 00h Example Issue the RUN command to the Inverter with slave address 10 To run the Inverter set 03 in A002 The coil number of the RUN command is 1 Query Response No Field name pilin No Field name ae 1 Slave address OA 1 Slave address OA 2 Function code 05 2 Function code 05 3 Coil start number MSB 00 3 Coil start number MSB 00 4 Coil start number LSB 00 4 Coil start number LSB 00 5 Change data MSB FF 5 Change data MSB FF 6 Change data LSB 00 6 Change data LSB 00 7 CRC 16 MSB 8D 7 CRC 16 MSB 8D 8 CRC 16 LSB 41 8 CRC 16 LSB 41 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the start number is reduced by 1 If writing into the coil cannot be performed normally refer to the Exception Response section 4 164 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function lt Writing Into the Holding Register O6h gt Writes data into the specified holding register Example Write 50 Hz into the Inverter with slave address 5 as the base frequency A003 The data resolution of the holding register 1203h of the base frequency A003
368. o water oil or chemicals Locations subject to shock or vibration HTransporting Installation and Wiring Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction Do not hold by the front cover and terminal block cover but hold by the fins during transportation Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input output terminals Doing so may result in damage to the product Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body Do not connect any load other than a three phase inductive motor to the U V and W output terminals e Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations Not doing so may result in damage to the product Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong magnetic fields Locations close to power lines Operation and Adjustment Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high Provide a separate holding brake if necessary Maintenance and Inspection Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance inspection or parts replacement Precautions for Correct Use Precautions for Correct Use Bilnstallation e Mount the product vertically on a wall with the product s longer sides upright The material of the
369. ogging DB external DC injection braking SET 2nd control 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP USP function CS commercial switching SFT soft lock AT analog input switching SET3 3rd control RS reset STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID enabled disabled PIDC PID integral reset CAS control gain switching UP UP DWN function accelerated DWN UP DWN function decelerated UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE forced operator SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 OLR overload limit switching TL torque limit enabled TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 torque limit switching 2 PPI P PI switching BOK brake confirmation ORT orientation LAC LAD cancel PCLR position deviation clear STAT pulse train position command input permission ADD frequency addition F TM forced terminal ATR torque command input permission KHC integrated power clear SON servo ON FOC preliminary excitation Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used AHD analog command held CP1 position command selection 1 CP2 position command selection 2 CP
370. ol page 4 114 2 Refer to 0 Hz Sensorless Vector Control page 4 115 4 21 4 2 Function Mode Constant Torque Characteristics VC Output voltage is proportional to output frequency While proportional from 0 Hz to base frequency the output voltage is constant from base to maximum frequencies Output voltage 100 Output frequency Hz H i gt 0 Base frequency Max frequency MSpecial Reduced Torque Characteristics Special VP Suitable for a fan or pump that requires torque in a low speed range These have VC characteristics only for low deceleration in reduced torque characteristics Output voltage 100 VP f i Ye Output frequency Hz 0 H H i gt 10 of base Base Max frequency frequency frequency t v JN y IN y i Period a Provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 Hz to 10 of the base frequency Example If the base frequency is 50 Hz the Inverter provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 to 5 Hz Provides reduced torque characteristics within a range from 10 to 100 of the base frequency The Inverter outputs voltage based on a curve of the 1 7th power of the frequency Provides constant voltage characteristics within a range from the base frequency to the maximum frequency Period b Period c Free V f Setting e You can set desired V f characteristics by setting 7 points of voltage and freq
371. olding ES Query Functions register address Example Read past trip data from the Inverter with slave address 5 Below is the data on past three trips RX command d081 Previous factor d081 Previous Inverter status Holding register No 0012h 0013h Trip factor high order Overvoltage E07 During deceleration 02 Response No Field name Example No Field name Bane HEX HEX 1 Slave address 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 03 2 Function code 03 3 Register start number MSB 2 00 3 Number of data bytes 3 04 4 Register start number LSB 2 11 4 Register start number MSB 00 5 Number of holding registers MSB 00 5 Register start number LSB 07 6 Number of holding registers LSB 02 6 coy Start numbers 00 7 CRC 16 MSB 95 faa ee 02 8 CRC 16 LSB 8A 8 CRC 16 MSB 36 1 Broadcasting cannot be performed 9 CRC 16 LSB 37 ne Hole that the start number i teduced by 3 Transfers data by the number of data bytes In 4 163 Read the data received in response as follows Response buffer 4 5 6 7 Holding register start 0 MSB 0 LSB 1 MSB 1 LSB number Response data 00h 07h 00h 02h Trip cause Overvoltage trip During deceleration this example the Inverter sends response data on two holding registers 4 bytes If the holding register content has not been read out normally refer t
372. olding register O6h or into the consecutive holding registers 10h no change can be saved in the Inverter s memory element If the Inverter power shuts off without saving any changes the holding register returns to the status before the changes were made To save the holding register changes in the Inverter s memory element the Enter Command must be issued according to the following procedure When the control parameters are changed the motor parameters must be re calculated In this case perform re calculation with this register To issue the Enter command Write all memory data into the holding register with the write command 06h and write re calculated motor parameters into holding register 0900h Below are the values to be written into the holding register Set value Description 0000 Motor parameter re calculation 0001 Set value storage Other than the above Motor parameter re calculation and set value storage Note e The Enter command needs considerable time Monitor the data writing signal coil number 001Ah to check whether the data is being written e Since the Inverter s memory element has a limit on the number of rewrites approx 100 000 times the Inverter life may be shortened if enter commands are frequently used 4 168 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function MRegister Number List R W in the list shows whether the coil or holding register accepts reading and or writi
373. ommand the parameters for auto tuning may remain in the Inverter To perform the auto tuning again initialize the parameters and then set each parameter again This also applies when you restart ordinary operation If the offline auto tuning is performed with free V f setting selected as the control method the Inverter displays an error message and stops processing Even if auto tuning is completed normally the Inverter cannot be operated with the tuning data To do so be sure to set motor parameter selection H002 to 01 Online Auto Tuning Function Online auto tuning compensates for changes in motor parameters resulting from a motor temperature rise or other factor thus ensuring stable operation e This function is applicable to 1st 2nd control not to 3rd control Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H002 H202 Motor parameter selection 00 Standard motor parameter 01 Auto tuning parameter 02 Auto tuning parameter Online auto tuning data enabled 00 Note the following before use e Be sure to perform the offline auto tuning before the online auto tuning 4 111 4 2 Function Mode e This function calculates online auto tuning data during offline auto tuning Even with a general purpose motor perform offline auto tuning once After the motor is stopped online auto tuning is performed for 5 seconds max For tuning R1 and R2 this function performs DC excitatio
374. on Inverters simultaneously Communication bit 7 7 bits G03 length selection 8 8 bits E ies 00 No parity C074 P parity 04 Even 00 02 Odd Communication stop bit 1 1 bit me selection 2 2 bits i T 00 Trip Communicatiorreror 01 Trip after deceleration stop C076 02 Ignore 02 selection 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop C077 Communication error 0 00 to 99 99 Communication 0 00 timeout disconnection judgment time 4 140 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C078 Conimaunication waittime 0 to 1000 Time to wait for response from 0 iis the Inverter C079 Communication method 00 ASCII method 01 o selection 01 ModBus RTU method Related functions A001 A002 Communication Test Mode e The communication test mode allows you to check the RS485 communication line hardware 4 141 Communication Test Mode Procedure 1 Before conducting a loop back test disconnect the cable from TM2 on the control terminal block board 2 Set the following parameter via the Digital Operator Set C071 communication speed selection to 02 loop back test 3 Turn off the Inverter and turn it on again The check will start 4 After the check is complete the Digital Operator displays the following code Normal _ _ lo Abnormal a 5 Press
375. on e This function allows the Inverter to communicate with an external controller via the RS485 interface from the TM2 terminal on the Inverter s control terminal block board Communication Specifications Item ASCII method ModBus RTU method Note Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Select using the Digital Operator Communication method Half duplex communication Synchronous system Start stop synchronous system Asynchronous system Transmission code ASCII code Binary Transmission mode LSB first Compatible interface RS 485 Data bit length 7 or 8 bits 8 bits Select using the Digital Operator Parity No parity Even Odd Select using the Digital Operator Stop bit length 1 or 2 bits Select using the Digital Operator Starting method One side start using host command an Set using Wait time 10 to 1000 ms O to 1000 ms the Digital Operator Connection 1 N N 32 max Use the Digital Operator to select a station No Error check Overrun Framing BCC Vertical Horizontal parity Overrun Framing CRC 16 Horizontal parity lt RS485 Port Specifications and Connections gt For the RS485 communication function use the TM2 terminal on the control terminal block board Control terminal block Control terminal block board cera Description abbreviations SP Transmission Reception SN T
376. on Position range specification reverse side to 5 P065 command 5 Position range specification forward 0 2 side Displays MSB 4 digits including oe Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position t5 PO66 commiahd 6 Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including P z Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position oe P067 command 7 Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including 00 Low P068 Zero return mode 01 Hi1 00 Yes 02 Hi2 P069 Zero return direction 09 Forward side 00 Yes selection 01 Reverse side pory ro ee zoro 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Yes Hz return frequency High speed zero 0 00 to 99 99 ROKA return frequency 100 0 to Maximum frequency 0 00 YGS Be 4 131 Position range 0 to 268435455 at P012 02 P072 specification 0 to 1073741823 at P012 03 268435455 Yes 9 forward Displays MSB 4 digits 5 Position range 268435455 to 0 at P012 02 P073 specification 1073741823 to 0 at P012 03 268435455 Yes a reverse Displays MSB 4 digits including 00 Multi step position command 0 P060 8 01 Multi step position command 1 P061 lt 02 Multi step position command 2 P062 4 131 03 Multi step position command 3 P063 P074 Teaching selection 04 Multi step position command 4 P064 Pee reas Se 05 Multi step position command 5 P065 06 Multi step po
377. on prevents the Inverter from running out side the specified operation range The torque limit is set to 10 on the forward side when the FOT terminal is turned on and on the reverse side when the ROT terminal is turned on This function can be used as the limit switch at the machine end To do so allocate 71 FOT and 72 ROT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 Position Range Setting Function Set a forward reverse position control range in position range setting forward P072 and position range setting reverse P073 If the current position counter exceeds the setting range a position control range trip E63 or E73 occurs and the Inverter goes into free run status The upper limit setting of multi step position commands 0 to 7 P060 to P067 is limited by this con trol range setting You cannot set a position command beyond the position range Teaching Function This function starts or stops the motor at a desired position and stores the current position as a po sition command in a desired position command area Allocate 45 ORT to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 When V2 control mode selection P012 is set to 02 absolute position control or 03 high reso lution absolute position control the relevant terminal serves as a teaching terminal Related functions C001 to C008 P012 P074 lt Teaching Procedure gt 1 In teaching selection P074 select the position
378. on the main circuit board d022 monitor l fi ii fi ii ji i OFF 2 Cooling fan rotation speed reduced 4 5 2 i d023 Not used d024 Not used d025 Not used d026 Not used d027 Not used aoza Pulse counter 0 to 2147483647 Displays MSB 4 digits 4 5 monitor d029 Position command 1073741823 to 1073741823 4 5 monitor Displays MSB 4 digits including d030 Current position 1073741823 to 1073741823 4 5 monitor Displays MSB 4 digits including 4 132 Fault frequency 0 to 9999 gt 080 monitor 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 o EA d081 Fault monitor 1 Latest 4 6 d082 Fault monitor 2 Error code condition of occurrence 4 6 d083 Fault monitor 3 Output frequency Hz gt Output current A 4 6 gt Internal DC voltage V d084 Fault monitor 4 RUN time h 4 6 d085 Fault monitor 5 gt ON time h 4 6 d086 Fault monitor 6 4 6 d090 Warning monitor Warning code 4 6 d102 DC voltage monitor 0 0 to 999 9 V 4 6 Regenerative d103 braking load rate 0 0 to 100 0 4 6 monitor d104 Electronic thermal 0 0 to 100 0 a 4 7 monitor App 2 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Basic Function Mode F Parameter Default ee Function name Monitor or data range i during Unit Page No setting operation 0 0 Starting frequency to 1
379. ontrol circuit power supply Ro To set the multi function output terminal contact selection C031 to C036 for the multi function output terminals 11 to 15 and relay output terminals AL2 AL1 ALO to 00 If the multi function output terminal contact selection is set to 01 the output signal may chatter when the DC power supply is turned off Tightening torque for terminals Ro and To M4 1 2 Nem 1 4 max 2 20 Design 2 2 Wiring Wiring Control Circuit Terminals e Terminals L and PLC are insulated from each other via the input and output signal common terminals Do not short circuit or ground these common terminals Do not ground these common terminals via external equipment Check the external equipment ground conditions e For wiring the control circuit terminals use twisted shielded cables recommended size 0 75 mm and connect the shielded cable to each common terminal The control circuit terminal connection cables should be 20 m or less e Separate the control circuit terminal connection cables from the main circuit cable power cable and the relay control circuit cable e For the connection of the TH thermistor input terminal twist cables with the terminal PLC individually and separate them from other PLC common cables Since a weak current flows through the thermistor the thermistor connection cable must be separated from the main circuit cable power cable The thermistor connection cable shou
380. ontrol is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 29 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ines Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting Operation 00 Disabled H001 Auto tuning selection 01 Not rotate 00 No 4 109 02 Rotate Hoo2 Motor parameter 00 Standard motor parameter 00 4 109 selection 01 Auto tuning parameter No 4111 2nd motor 02 Auto tuning parameter 4 113 5 H202 parameter selection online auto tuning enabled 00 D E H003 Motor capacity Factory selection default 2 0 20 to 160 0 No kW g H203 2nd motor capacity Factory 4 19 5 selection default 4 109 o 4 113 Motor pole number no selection 4 4 116 2 4 6 8 10 No Pole H204 2nd motor pole 4 number selection H005 Speed response 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 80 00 E TAE Be H205 2nd speed response 10 000 to 80 000 1 590 4 90 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 30 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter i Default Cinge Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation H006 Stabilization 100 parameter H206 aa 0 to 255 100 Yes 4118 H306 3rd stabilization 100 parameter De
381. ooling fan rotation speed reduced 101Eh to Not used 1025h 1026h DC voltage monitor d102 R 0 to 9999 0 1 V 1027h Regenerative braking load d103 R 0to1000 0 1 rate monitor 1028h Electronic thermal monitor d104 R 0 to 1000 0 1 1029h to Not used 1033h 4 177 4 4 Communication Function Regies Function name pupeton R W Monitor and setting parameters Rresolution No code d028 1034h l HIGH R W Pulse counter monitor J028 0 to 2147483647 1 1035h LOW R W 1036h aia R Position command monitor 029 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 1037h LOW R 1038h fice R Current position monitor 2147483647 to 2147483647 1 1039h a030 R LOW 103Ah to Not used 1102h lt Holding Register Number List gt Register R Function s i 7 Function name R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code F002 1103h Kap HIGH Acceleration time 1 R W 1 to 360000 0 01 s 1104h F002 LOW F003 1105h HIGH Deceleration time 1 R W 1 to 360000 0 01 s 1106h F003 LOW 1107h Operator rotation direction F004 R W n Forward E selection 1 Reverse 1108h to Not used 1200h lt Holding Register Number List Function Mode gt Regji Function name pypcion R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 1 Terminal 2 Digital Operator F001 Freaiencir
382. or and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 Line Acceleration pattern ise laps curve 127Dh 3 P A097 R W 2 U shape curve selection 3 Inverted U shape curve 4 EL S shape curve 0 Line Deceleration pattern 139 shape curve 127Eh P A098 R W 2 U shape curve selection 3 Inverted U shape curve 4 EL S shape curve 127Fh Not used 1280h Not used A101 1281h HIGH R W Ol start frequency RIT O to 40000 0 01 Hz 1282h LOW R W A102 1283h HIGH R W Ol end frequency RT 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 1284h LOW R W 1285h Ol start ratio A103 R W O to Ol end ratio 1 1286h Ol end ratio A104 R W Ol start ratio to 100 1 1287h Ol start selection A105 R W r A start aan 1288h to Not used 128Ch A111 128Dh HIGH R W O2 start frequency 40000 to 40000 0 01 Hz A111 128Eh LOW R W A112 128Fh HIGH R W O2 end frequency Ge 40000 to 40000 0 01 Hz 1290h LOW R W 1291h O2 start ratio A113 R W 100 to O2 end ratio 1 1292h O2 end ratio A114 R W O2 start ratio to 100 1 1293h to Not used 12A4h DASH Aceeleration curve A131 R W 1 Small curve to 10 Large curve parameter AGH Deceleration curve A132 R W 1 Small curve to 10 Large curve parameter 12A7h to Not used 12AEh 4 184 suoljoun Functions 4 4 Communication Function egite Function name uneton R W Monito
383. orque HIGH 0 to 1st max frequency 0 01 Hz control forward P039 1628h LOW R W 1629h wes R W Speed limit value in torque HIGH 0 to 1st max frequency 0 01 Hz control reverse P040 162Ah LOW R W 162Bh Not used 162Ch Not used 162Dh Not used 162Eh Not used 0 Trip 1 Trip after deceleration stop 162Fh_ OPSration setting at P045 R W 2 Ignore communication error 3 Free run 4 Deceleration stop igoh Rut assembly Instance piae RW 20 21 100 No setting de th opr sssembly instance P047 RW 70 71 101 No setting 0 Trip 1 Trip after deceleration stop 1632h Operation setting at idle P048 R W 2 Ignore A mode detection 3 Free run 4 Deceleration stop 4 203 4 4 Communication Function oe Function name eld R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 OP 1 2P 2 4P 3 6P 4 8P 5 10P 6 12P 7 14P 8 16P Polarity setting for rotation 9 18P 1633h speed P049 R W 10 20P 11 22P 12 24P 13 26P 14 28P 15 30P 16 32P 17 34P 18 36P 19 38P 1634h to Not used 1638h 1639h Pulse train frequency P055 R W 9 to 500 0 1 kHz scale Input frequency at maximum frequency q63ah Pulse train frequency filter posg R W 1 to 200 0 01 s time constant 1463Bh PU Se train frequency bias 057 R W 100 to 100 1 amount 163C
384. otor capacity H031 H231 Motor parameter R2 0 000 to 65 53 Depends on the Q auto tuning data motor capacity 4 109 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit H032 H232 Motor parameterL 0 00 to 655 3 Dependsonthe hH auto tuning data motor capacity H033 H233 Motor parameter lo 0 00 to 655 3 Depends on the A auto tuning data motor capacity H034 H234 Motor parameter y 0 001 to 9999 Dependsonthe kym auto tuning data motor capacity A003 Base frequency 30 to Max frequency 50 Hz DC injection braking 00 Disabled AOSA selection 01 Enabled 00 E 200 215 220 230 240 Selectable for 200 V class A082 AVR voltage selection 380 400 415 440 460 480 200 400 Selectable for 400 V class e Note the following before use Set base frequency A003 and AVR voltage selection A082 according to the specifications of the motor to be measured The motor parameters can be determined for motors with the maximum applicable capacity or one rank lower motor size For motors with other capacities correct constant data may not be obtained In some cases auto tuning may not be completed In this case pressing the STOP RESET key displays an error message elf DC injection braking selection A051 is set to 01 enabled the data cannot be measured correctly Be sure to set to 00 disabled The default setting is 00 disabled elf 02 auto tuning
385. outputs LOG1 to LOG6 are not subject to operations Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 33 LOG1 Multi function Logic operation output C142 C143 C144 C021 to C025 output terminal 34 LOG2 selection Logic operation output 2 C145 C146 C147 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 C148 C149 C150 36 LOG4 Logic operation output 4 C151 C152 C153 Relay output _ C026 AL2 AL function S LOGS 05 sel ctior Logic operation output 5 C154 C155 C156 38 LOG6 Logic operation output 6 C157 C158 C159 142 C145 C148 Logic output signal E E o tput a 2 C151 C154 C157 selection 1 i Select operand 1 C143 C146 C149 Logic output signal aL E SE output a o C152 C155 C158 selection 2 j Select operand 2 C144 C147 C150 Logic output signal A An 00 E C153 C156 C159 operator selection 02 XOR 4 100 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode You can select from three types of operators AND OR and XOR Output signal 1 l l Output signal 2 l l LOGx AND l LOGx OR l l LOGx XOR l l l e The setting parameters vary depending on the logic operation output selected Refer to the following table to set the necessary parameters Site tila E E 33 Logic operation output 1 LOG1 C142 C143 C144 34 Logic operation output 2 LOG2 C145 C146 C147 35 Logic operation output 3 LOG3 C148 C149 C150
386. ower s __fon __ Inverter output frequency Operation l 4 2 Function Mode Timing example of switching from commercial power to Inverter a lt gt Interlock time of MC2 and MC3 ica ae s S s on OFF Retry wait time b003 0 5 to 1 S Operation Operates after frequency matching 4 84 suoijoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reset e This function resets an Inverter trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 0 3 to 100 fon Refer to Momentary Power Interruption b003 Retry wait time Trip Retry Restart page 4 42 1 0 s Time from reset to restart Frequency matching 0 00 to 400 0 b007 lower limit frequency Refer to Momentary Power Interruption 0 00 Hz setting Trip Retry Restart page 4 42 00 Trip reset at power on example 1 Normal Output shut off Abnormal Trip reset 01 Trip reset at power off example 2 Normal Output shut off Abnormal Trip reset C102 Reset selection 02 Trip reset at power on example 1 00 ER Normal Disabled Abnormal Trip reset 03 Trip reset only example 1 The Inverter does not initialize internal data at trip reset Normal Disabled Abnormal Trip reset Reset frequenc 00 Oli start C103 matchin a 01 Frequency matching start example 3 00 9 02 Active Frequency Matching restart eTo reset an Inverter trip press the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator or switch the
387. ower instantaneous value of the Inverter The data LED indicator kW V and A lights up while the d014 setting is displayed Display 0 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 kW Integrated Power Monitor d015 e Displays the integrated power integrated value of input power of the Inverter The gain conversion of displayed data is performed with integrated power display gain b079 d015 display Input power calculation value kWh Integrated power display gain b079 b079 1 to 1000 Can be set in increments of 1 When integrated power clear d078 is set to 01 pressing the Enter key clears the integrated power value e The integrated power value can also be cleared via terminal input if 53 KHC Integrated power clear is allocated to any of the multi function input terminals When b079 is set to 1000 up to 999000 kWh can be displayed Display 0 to 9999 Displays in increments of 1 kWh b079 set value 1000 to 9999 Displays in increments of 10 kWh b079 set value 100 to 999 Displays in increments of 1000 kWh b079 set value Total RUN Time d016 Displays the total RUN time of the Inverter Display 0 to 9999 Displays in increments of 1 hour 1000 to 9999 Displays in increments of 10 hours 100 to 999 Displays in increments of 1000 hours Power ON Time Monitor d017 Displays the total power ON time of the Inverter Display 0 to 9999 Displays in in
388. pending on the position loop gain setting While the SPD terminal is turned on the Inverter runs in the direction based on the RUN command When shifting from speed control to position control be careful about the polarity sign of the RUN command Output frequency Position count started Speed control Position control Time Target position 4 134 Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PG01 Is Used Zero Return Function This function performs three types of zero return operations depending on the setting of zero return mode P068 When zero return is complete the current position is cleared to zero You can select the zero return direction in zero return direction selection P069 If zero return is not performed the Inverter performs position control with the position at power on defined as the origin lt Low speed zero return P068 00 gt ORL terminal _ Sis Output frequency secon Low speed zero return Origin lt High speed zero return 1 P068 01 gt frequency P070 Position ORL terminal 2 Output frequency lt High speed zero return 2 P068 02 gt __ High speed zero return frequency P071 Position 4 Low speed zero return frequency P070 ORG terminal ORL terminal __ oN High speed zero return Output 2 frequency f 4 135 4 frequency P071 Low speed zero return frequency P070
389. pends H020 Motor parameter R1 onie motor 0 001 to 9 999 capacity R 5 10 00 to 65 53 Depends 2nd motor on the H220 parameter R1 motor capacity Depends H021 Motor parameter R2 onthe motor 0 001 to 9 999 EPIN a EE 10 00 to 65 53 Depends 2nd motor on the 2 H221 parameter R2 motor E capacity Oo D Depends 2 H022 Motor parameter L onne S motor S 0 01 to 99 99 capacity i ia 100 0 to 655 3 Depends 2nd motor on the pees parameter L motor capacity Depends H023 Motor parameter lo onthe motor 0 01 to 99 99 capacity ie r 100 0 to 655 3 Depends 2nd motor on the Hees parameter lo motor capacity 4 113 Depends H024 Motor parameter J onthe 0 001 to 9 999 motor 10 00 to 99 99 capacity toe ll Rane 100 0 to 999 9 Depends H224 2nd motor 1000 to 9999 on the parameter J motor capacity 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 31 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default aes Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting Operation Depends H030 Motor parameter R1 on the auto tuning data motor 0 001 to 9 999 capacity ie 10 00 to 65 53 Depends 2nd motor onthe H230 parameter R1 f motor auto tuning data i capacity Depends Motor parameter R2 on the H031 A auto tuning data motor 0 001 to 9 999 capacity Ne a 10
390. per and lower Window comparator limit levels 9 b065 Mpa Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes o Ol hysteresis width eee rae A S Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit O level x 2 Set an upper limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 3 pee O2 upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 109 XES width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 100 to 100 4 poet O2 lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 100 Yes fi width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator limit level b068 Ooh POEN ith Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes y Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Analog operation ee b070 level at O 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Analog operation b071 levelat Ol 0 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection Analog operation b072 level at O2 100 to 100 no ignored no No disconnection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 34 po uoiesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Cirene Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation b078 Integrated power Cleared with the Enter key after changing to 00 Yes clear 01 4 4 waza Integrated pow
391. peration e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default aE Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation C011 Multi function input 1 00 operation selection C012 Multi function input 2 00 operation selection C013 Multi function input 3 00 a operation selection Cc E C014 Multi function input 4 00 operation selection 5 E j 1 H co015 Multi function input 5 oO NO 00 No a 4 79 c operation selection 01 NC Q 9 C016 Multi function input 6 00 2 operation selection S c017 Multi function input 7 00 operation selection C018 Multi function input 8 00 operation selection C019 FW terminal 00 operation selection 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 39 3 7 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C021 Multi function output terminal 11 selection C022 Multi function output terminal 12 selection C023 Multi function output terminal 13 selection C024 Multi function output terminal Multi function output terminal 14 selection C025 Multi function output terminal 15 selection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 00 RUN signal during RUN 01 FA1 constant speed
392. power interruption Proportional gain setting of non stop b055 function at 0 00 to 2 55 0 20 Yes momentary power interruption Integral time setting bose f non stop function 9 000 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 0 100 Yes s 4 60 at momentary power interruption 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 33 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default ines Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation Set an upper limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 d pase O upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 100 mee K width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 b061 O lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis 0 ves i width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower Window comparator TUS Yel b062 O hysteresis width Setting range 0 to 10 0 Yes y Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level x 2 Set an upper limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 D063 Ol upper limit level Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis 100 Yes 4 oe width x 2 Set a lower limit level Window comparator Setting range 0 to 100 o Reon Ol lower limit level Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis p Yes width x 2 Seta hysteresis width for the up
393. prevention selection 01 Enabled og o Torque LADSTOP Function e If 03 sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 sensor vector control is selected in control method A004 A244 this function temporarily stops the frequency deceleration function LAD when the torque limit function is activated Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A044 A244 V f characteristics selection 03 Sensorless vector 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 05 Sensor vector A344 is blank 00 b040 Torque limit selection 00 Four quadrant separate setting 01 Terminal switch 02 Analog input 03 Option 1 04 Option 2 00 b041 Torque limit 1 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Forward power running under four quadrant separate setting b042 Torque limit 2 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Reverse regeneration under four quadrant separate setting 150 b043 Torque limit 3 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Reverse power running under four quadrant separate setting b044 Torque limit 4 0 to 200 0 4 to 55 kW 0 to 180 75 to 132 kW Forward regeneration under four quadrant separate setting b045 Torque LADSTOP selection 00 Disabled 01 Enabled 00 C001 to C008 Multi function inputs 1 to 8 selection 40 Torque limit enable
394. put assembl us poa7 PP Y bra 71 No S e instance No setting 101 00 Trip Operation setting at 01 Trip after deceleration stop P048 02 Ignore 01 No idle mode detection 5 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop P049 Polarity setting for 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0 No ex o rotation speed 32 34 36 38 po55 pulse train frequency 4 0 to 50 0 25 0 No kHz scale pose Pulse train frequency 001 to 2 00 0 10 No s filter time constant 4 138 pos7 Pulse train frequency 199 to 100 0 No bias amount P058 oe train frequency 0 to 100 100 No 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 35 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default ees Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation P Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position i P060 sommand O Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including oe Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position ches i P061 comm nd 1 Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including F ni Position range specification reverse side to Multi step position ne P062 command Position range specification forward 0 side Displays MSB 4 digits including
395. puts from C001 to C008 App 22 xipueddy Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C021 Multi function output terminal 11 selection C022 Multi function output terminal 12 selection C023 Multi function output terminal 13 selection C024 Multi function output terminal Multi function output terminal 14 selection C025 Multi function output terminal 15 selection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 00 RUN signal during RUN 01 FA1 constant speed arrival signal 02 FA2 over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL overload warning 04 OD excessive PID deviation 05 AL alarm output 06 FA3 set frequency only arrival signal 07 OTQ overtorque 08 IP signal during momentary power interruption 09 UV signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over 12 ONT Power ON time over 13 THM thermal warning 19 BRK brake release 20 BER brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 22 DSE excessive speed deviation 23 POK position ready 24 FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 25 FAS set frequency only 2 26 OL2 overload warning 2 27 ODc analog O disconnection detection 28 OlDc analog OI disconnection detection 29 O2Dc analog O2 disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status outpu
396. quency 23 b083 Carrier frequency 9 A004 Maximum frequency 24 b084 Initialization selection 10 A005 O Ol selection 25 b130 Ove Foltage Proctor MNEIGN selection during deceleration 11 A020 Multi step speed reference 0 26 b131 Overvoltage protection level during deceleration 12 A021 Multi step speed reference 1 27 C021 Multifunction outputterminak 1 selection 13 A022 Multi step speed reference 2 28 C022 Mult unction output eimina 12 selection 14 A023 Multi step speed reference 3 29 C036 Relay output AL2 AL1 contact 15 A044 V f characteristics selection Related functions U001 to U012 Initial Screen Selection Initial Screen at Power ON You can select the Digital Operator screen to be displayed at power on among the following items By factory default 01 d001 is selected suoljoun Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Screen when the Enter key was pressed last 01 d001 Output frequency monitor 02 d002 Output current monitor 03 d003 Rotation direction monitor 04 d007 Output frequency monitor after conversion 05 F001 Output frequency setting monitor b038 Initial screen selection 01 Note With 00 screen on which the Enter key was last pressed selected if the last screen is other than d or F the entrance of each group is displayed Example When the power is turned off and then on after a change in the A020 setting A is displayed
397. r and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 Digital Operator F001 1 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 2 Input O Operation frequency input 3 Input Ol T2AFER A setting Ma RW 4 RS485 communication An 5 Option 1 6 Option 2 7 Pulse train frequency 0 Digital Operator F001 1 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster 2 Input O Operation frequency input 3 Input Ol JEBON B setting alas RON 4 RS485 communication _ 5 Option 1 6 Option 2 7 Pulse train frequency 0 Addition A B 12B1h_ Operator selection A143 R W 1 Subtraction A B 2 Multiplication A x B 12B2h Not used 12B3h h icn R W Frequency addition 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz amount A145 12B4h LOW R W 12B5h Frequency addition A146 R W o Frequency reference A145 direction 1 Frequency reference A145 12B6h to Not used 12B8h donor Etre Serve ratio 1 during A450 RW 0to 50 1 acceleration 128A ES aerate 2 during 4151 RW 0to 50 1 acceleration 12BBh Ee Curve ratio 1 during 4452 RW 0to 50 1 deceleration 42Bch EES curve ratio 2 during 4453 RW 0to50 1 deceleration 12BDh to Not used 1300h 0 Trip 1 0 Hz start 1301h Retry selection b001 rw 2 Frequency matching start 3 Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 4 Active Frequency Matching restart 1302h Allowable momentary b002 R W 3 to 250 0 1 s power interruption time 1303h Retry wait time b003 R W 3 to 1000 0 1 s
398. r limit set al frequency to Frequency upper 0 00 4 28 g A No Hz 3 A262 2nd frequency lower 0 00 Starting frequency to 2nd frequency 0 00 limit upper limit gt 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 8 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter i Default Cinge Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation A063 Jump frequency 1 0 00 Jump frequency A064 width 1 0 50 A065 Jump frequency 2 0 00 5 Jump frequency 0 0 to 400 0 No Hz aoge Jump frequency Jump frequency width 0 0 to 10 0 0 50 width 2 z A067 Jump frequency 3 0 00 4 30 s Jump frequenc z aosa UMP frequency 0 50 Q width 3 Q 2 Acceleration stop 0 00 to 99 99 A069 frequency 100 0 to 400 0 ee We Hg ao7o Acceleration stop 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 No s time 00 Disabled A071 PID selection 01 Enabled 00 No 02 Reverse output enabled A072 PID P gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 Yes 0 0 to 999 9 A073 PID I gain 1000 to 3600 1 0 Yes s 0 00 to 99 99 A074 PID D gain 100 0 0 00 Yes s 2 A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 No Time Cc 8 00 Ol 4 31 zt PID feedback oe A076 i 02 RS485 communication 00 No selection 2 03 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output 00 OFF Deviation Target value Feedback
399. racteristics gt PR special VP A044 e N 02 Free V f characteristics 00 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 05 Sensor vector control V2 00 Constant torque characteristics VC fae No 4 21 2nd Vf 01 Special reduced torque characteristics td special VP nee A 02 Free V f characteristics o0 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control 3rd V f 00 Constant torque characteristics VC A344 characteristics 01 Special reduced torque characteristics 00 selection special VP A045 Output voltage gain 20 to 100 100 Yes 4 24 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 24 po uoiesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciete Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation Automatic torque A046 boost voltage 0 to 255 100 compensation gain Yes 8 2nd automatic w A246 torque boost voltage 0 to 255 100 S compensation gain S 4 19 ha Automatic torque 5 A047 boost slip 0 to 255 100 S compensation gain Yes 2nd automatic A247 torque boost slip 0 to 255 100 compensation gain ER 00 Disabled D Ps S A051 Z braking 01 Enabled 00 No Pi i 02 Frequency control A052 set valu
400. rame 2 is output as return after the Inverter receives the query Frame 1 not output independently 4 158 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function 4 159 Below is each frame format command Message Configuration Query Header Silent interval Slave address Function code Data Error check Trailer Silent interval lt Slave Address gt Pre set numbers ranging from 1 to 32 in each Inverter slave Only the Inverter having the same slave address as the query takes in the corresponding query e Broadcasting can be performed by setting the slave address to 0 e Data call or loop back cannot be performed while broadcasting lt Data gt e Sends the function command e The RX corresponds with the following data formats used in the ModBus Data name Description Coil 2 value data 1 bit long that can be referred to or changed Holding register 16 bit long data that can be referred to or changed lt Function Code gt Specifies the function for the Inverter to perform e Below are the function codes supported by the RX Function Code P Maximum number of Maximum data number in Function code Function data bytes in 1 message 1 message 01h Reading coil status 4 32 coils in bits 03h Reading holding register 8 4 registers in bytes content 05h Writing into the coil 2 1 coil in bits 06h Writing into th holding 2 1 regis
401. ransmission Reception RP Termination resistor enabling terminal SN Termination resistor enabling terminal The following wires are recommended for TM2 4 139 4 4 Communication Function Single wire Stranded wire Stranded wire with solderless terminal Wire strip length Tightening torque e Connection Connect the Inverters parallel to each other as shown below For the termination Inverter short circuit the RP and SN terminals Also if the RS485 communication function is used with a single Inverter the RP and SN terminals must be short circuited Short circuiting the RP and SN terminals activates the termination resistor inside the control terminal block board suppressing signal reflection 0 14 to 1 5 mm If two equal sized wires are connected to one pole 0 14 to 0 5 mm 0 14 to 1 0 mm2 If two equal sized wires are connected to one pole 0 14 to 0 2 mm 0 25 to 0 5 mm 5mm 0 22 to 0 25 Nem screw size M2 External controler 8 SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN SP SN RP SN Setting RS485 communication requires the following settings Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 02 Loop back test Communication speed 03 2400 bps C071 selection 04 4800 bps 04 Baud rate selection 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps eer 1 to 32 Allocate each Inverter s station No Communication station h C072 Set station numbers to control several 1 No selecti
402. ration C038 Light load signal output 01 Enabled only in constant speed 01 mode operation C039 Light load detection level 0 010 2 0 Balad Curent Rated current A Set an output level for low current signals Output current A Low current signal detection level C039 Low current signal Operation Ready Signal e This signal is output when the Inverter becomes ready for operation ready to receive the RUN command e Even if the RUN command is input while this signal is not output the Inverter does not recognize the RUN command e If this signal is not output check if the input power supply voltage R L1 S L2 T L3 is within the specified range Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output C021 to C025 terminal selection 50 IRDY operation ready signal Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection C026 Forward Run Signal e This signal is output while the Inverter is running forward While the Inverter is running in reverse or when stopped this signal is turned off Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function output C021 to C025 p terminal selection 51 FWR forward run signal Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection C026 4 104 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reverse Run Signal e This signal is output while the Inverter is running i
403. rdware circuit without going through the CPU software This function stops switching of the main element The circuit is not electrically turned off While the power supply is ON do not touch the Inverter terminals and power cable e g motor cable Doing so may result in electric shock injury or ground fault When this function is enabled the multi function input terminals 1 and 3 are exclusively used for this function No other function can be allocated to these terminals If another function has been allocated it will automatically be disabled and terminals 1 and 3 are changed to the emergency shutoff terminals Function of multi function input terminal 1 Reset signal RS NO contact Fixed This signal is used to reset the Inverter and to reset the emergency shutoff trip E37 Function of multi function input terminal 3 Emergency shutoff signal EMR NC contact Fixed This signal is used to turn off the Inverter output without using the built in CPU With this signal input the Inverter activates an emergency shutoff trip E37 If multi function input terminal 3 has not been connected or disconnected or if the signal logic is not matched the Inverter activates an emergency shutoff trip E37 After checking the cable connection and the signal logic input the reset signal RS Emergency shutoff trip E37 can be reset only by the reset signal RS via multi function input terminal 1 It cannot be re
404. re 380 V 15 to 480 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 phase 380 to 480 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage Rated output current A 1 5 2 5 3 8 5 3 9 0 14 19 25 32 38 48 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 6 6 6 14 14 14 Regenerative Built in braking resistor circuit discharge resistor braking Braking Minimum connection 100 100 100 100 70 70 35 35 24 24 20 resistance Q Class 3 phase 400 V Model name RX A4300 A4370 A4450 A4550 B4750 B4900 B411K B413K Max applicable kW 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 motor 4P Rated output 400V 40 1 51 9 63 0 77 6 103 2 121 9 150 3 180 1 capacity kVA 480v 48 2 62 3 75 6 93 1 128 3 146 3 180 4 216 1 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 380 V 15 to 480 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 phase 380 to 480 V Cannot exceed that of incoming voltage Rated output current A 58 75 91 112 149 176 217 260 Radio noise filter Built in Weight kg 22 30 30 30 60 60 80 80 Regenerative 3 y 3 braking Regenerative braking unit separately mounted Braking Minimum connection resistance Q 7 2 suoljeoyioads 7 1 Standard Specification List Common Specifications Item Specifications Enclosure rating IP20 up to 55KW IPOO from 75 to 132KW Cooling method Forced air cooling Control method Phase to phase sinusoidal modulation PWM Output frequency range 0
405. ree from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR Read and Understand this Manual Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s
406. reen Filter enable pin J61 Dummy plug green Short plug EMC filter disabled EMC filter enabled factory default RX A2004 to A2037 RX A4004 to A4037 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M4 Others M4 G q PD 1 P G Sk U short circuit bar When not using the DC reactor keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached Ground terminal with short circuit bar shaded area for EMC filter function switching EMC filter disabled EMC filter enabled factory default RX A2055 A2075 RX A4055 A4075 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M5 Others M5 RX A2110 RX A4110 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M5 2 15 2 2 Wiring Terminal arrangement Applicable model Fo To CHARGE LED indicator RX A2150 to A2185 RX A4150 to A4220 sae ae Ei Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 o G lt G PD 1 P short circuit bay C Others M6 D Ground terminal with short circuit When not using the DC E bar shaded area for EMC filter reactor keep the PD 1 P 5 function switching short circuit bar attached EMC filter function switching method RX A2220 Ro To M4 Ground terminal M6 Others M8 EMC filter enabled factory default EMC filter disabled hos RX A2300 CHARGE LED indicator re G R L1 a G Ro To M4 U T1 V T2 W T3 Ground terminal M6 Others M8 Ground terminal with short circuit PD 1 P short
407. relay output terminal provides relay output You can select NO or NC contact output for each output terminal with C031 to C035 or C036 lf alarm code output is selected in C062 refer to page 4 99 alarm code output ACO to AC3 is provided via output terminals 11 to 13 for 3 bit code or via output terminals 11 to 14 for 4 bit Functions code The C021 to C025 settings are disabled Data Description Reference item Page 00 RUN Signal during RUN Signal during RUN 4 96 01 FA1 Constant speed arrival signal Frequency arrival signal 4 96 02 FA2 Over set frequency arrival signal 03 OL Overload warning Overload limit Overload warning 4 49 04 OD Excessive PID deviation PID function 4 31 05 AL Alarm output 06 FA3 Set frequency only arrival signal Frequency arrival signal 4 96 07 OTQ Overtorque Overtorque 4 98 08 IP Signal during momentary power interruption Momentary power interruption Undervoltage 4 44 09 UV Signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ Torque limit Torque limit function 4 57 11 RNT RUN time over RUN time over 4 52 12 ONT Power ON time over Power ON time over 4 52 13 THM Thermal warning Electronic thermal function 4 46 19 BRK Brake release Brake control function 4 74 20 BER Brake error 21 ZS 0 Hz signal 0 Hz detection signal 4 99 22 DSE Excessive speed deviation V2 control mode selection 4 120 23 POK Position ready Orie
408. rent trip occurs at frequency matching start extend the retry wait time e Even if frequency matching start is selected the Inverter may start at 0 Hz when e The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency e The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates e The Inverter detects a frequency equal to or lower than the frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007 e After the retry wait time b003 elapses the Inverter starts output from the b030 set value The Inverter then decelerates according to b029 while keeping the output current at the b028 set value e When the frequency matches the voltage the Inverter accelerates again and then output frequency is restored to the original level e If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method reduce the b028 set value 4 70 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Automatic Carrier Frequency Reduction Function e This function automatically reduces carrier frequency according to an increase in output current e This function is enabled when automatic carrier frequency reduction selection b089 is set to 01 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b089 Automatic carrier reduction 00 Disabled 01 Enabled 00 When output current exceeds 60 72 84 and 96 of the rated current the carrier frequency is reduced to 12 9 6 and 3 kHz respectively When the output current falls
409. requency Hz at the time of tripping 4 AIX I I I Y I U HEE I 3 Output current A at the time of tripping AlY 4 P N DC voltage V at the time of tripping 4 ALY v 15 4 Aly Vv i 1 Trip factor Explanation of display ents EIJ ie Sorte ess 4 I AY I Indicates the cause of the trip Indicates the Inverter status at the time of tripping 1 I During initialization at power on or with the reset terminal set to ON f During stop During deceleration During constant speed 1 During acceleration 2 The RUN command is turned on at frequency 0 5 During startup 7 During DC injection braking a During overload limit TI During forcing servo ON Note The trip monitor display shows the Inverter status at the time of tripping not the actual motor operation Example While PID control is used or the frequency reference is input using analog signals voltage current the Inverter may alternate frequently between acceleration and deceleration because of the signal fluctuations even if the motor seems to operate at a constant speed In this case the onscreen Inverter status at the time of tripping may differ from the actual operation suoieiado sdueUDd UIeEW Maintenance Operations 5 2 Warning Function 5 2 Warning Func
410. requency Monitor d001 Displays the output frequency of the Inverter During stop 0 00 is displayed The data LED indicator Hz lights up while the d001 setting is displayed Display 0 00 to 99 99 _ Displays in increments of 0 01 Hz 100 0 to 400 0 Displays in increments of 0 1 Hz Note When the frequency reference is set using the Digital Operator the output frequency can be changed with the Increment Decrement key during operation only The frequency setting changed with this monitor will be reflected in frequency reference F001 Pressing the Enter key overwrites the currently selected frequency reference Output Current Monitor d002 Displays the output current value of the Inverter During stop 0 00 is displayed The data LED indicator A lights up while the d002 setting is displayed Display 0 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of 0 1 A Rotation Direction Monitor d003 Displays the RUN direction of the Inverter The RUN LED indicator lights up during forward reverse rotation Display F Forward o Stop r Reverse PID Feedback Value Monitor d004 When Enabled 01 or Reverse output enabled 02 is selected in PID selection A071 the PID feedback value can be monitored Gain conversion is enabled with PID scale A075 d004 display PID feedback value x PID scale A075 A075 0 01 to 99 99 Can be set in increments of 0 01 Display 0 00 to 99 99 _ Displays in increments of
411. rload protection of the Inverter Allocate 03 OL or 26 OL2 to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 Two types of overload warning signals are available for output Overload limit level b022 b025 Overload warning level i C041 C111 Output current ows aa d 4 50 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Overcurrent Suppression Function e This function suppresses overcurrent caused by a steep current rise in rapid acceleration You can set whether to enable or disable this function with b027 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Overcurrent suppression 00 Disabled nde function 01 Enabled 01 E Note If you use the Inverter with an elevating machine disable this function Otherwise the machine may slide down Output frequency Desired a Rg i Actual acceleration after suppression operation Time Output current Suppression level J Lo oJ os about 160 of the rating Time Soft Lock Function You can set whether to enable or disable the writing of various code data This helps prevent data rewriting due to erroneous operation Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 01 Data other than b031 and specified frequency parameter cannot be changed when terminal b031 Soft lock selection Ses 01 02 Data
412. rminal is turned on and then off with the RUN command turned on the Inverter starts acceleration in synchronization with the motor rpm during free running after the retry wait time b003 elapses frequency matching start Note that the Inverter may start at 0 Hz if e The motor rpm is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base rpm e The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates e If frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007 is set the Inverter starts at 0 Hz when the motor rpm lowers to the frequency set in b007 Refer to page 4 38 e Ensure that MC3 and MC2 are mechanically interlocked lf the earth leakage breaker ELB has tripped because of ground fault the commercial power supply circuit does not work either If you need backup supply power from a commercial power supply circuit ELBC For FWY RVY and CSY use low current relays Refer to the following sequence for timing lf an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching extend the retry wait time b003 e For commercial switching operation refer to the following examples of connections and timing of commercial switching operation At power on the Inverter can automatically perform retry operation This does not require the following CS terminal For details refer to Reset page 4 85 Examples of connections and timing of commercial switching operation Timing example of switching from Inverter to commercial p
413. rt the Inverter input the RUN command You can select as the Inverter output mode for restart a 0 Hz start frequency matching start or Active Frequency Matching restart at free run stop selection b088 Examples 1 2 3 e If you set frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007 the Inverter restarts at 0 Hz when the Inverter detects a frequency equal to or lower than this setting during frequency matching start e The setting of this function is applied to the FRS terminal and also to the status when the Inverter is reset from free running 4 69 4 2 Function Mode Example 1 0 Hz start FW FRS 0 Hz start Free running Motor rpm e The Inverter starts running at 0 Hz regardless of the motor rpm The retry wait time is ignored at 0 Hz start e If the Inverter starts running at 0 Hz with the motor rpm high an overcurrent trip may occur Example 3 Active Frequency Matching restart mw J L Output current Inverter output frequency Trip occurs in b030 Motor rpm i b003 lt Decelerates according to Frequency selectec Example 2 Frequency matching start FW FRS ea Free running Motor WHE a rpm Ls lt lt 0 b003 lt gt Frequency matching start e When the FRS terminal is turned off and the retry wait time elapses the motor frequency is matched and a Active Frequency Matching starts without stopping the motor If an overcur
414. ry Restart Restart During Momentary Power Interruption e You can set whether the Inverter trips or retries restarts when a momentary power interruption or undervoltage occurs e If the retry function is selected in retry selection b001 the Inverter retries for the number of times set in b005 for momentary power interruption or b009 for undervoltage and trips on the next time Under the limitless retry setting the Inverter doesn t trip e You can use b004 to select whether the Inverter trips or not when a momentary power interruption or undervoltage occurs during stop When selecting the retry function set retry condition b008 according to your system lf undervoltage is retained for 40 seconds even during retry operation it results in E09 undervoltage trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Outputs an alarm after a trip 01 Restarts from 0 Hz at retry 02 Matches the frequency at retry and starts 6 example 1 ge DOOI Retry selection 03 Performs Active Frequency Matching start at oe retry and trips after deceleration stop 1s 04 Performs Active Frequency Matching restart at retry example 1 3 Allowable 0 3 to 25 0 b002 momentary power If the momentary power interruption is within the set 1 0 s interruption time time the Inverter follows the setting in b001 Bis 0 3 to 100 b003 Retry wait time Time before restari 1 0 s UL i 00 Disabled i 01 E
415. s Rated current to 00x Rated current A Rated current b312 3rd electronic thermal level b013 Electronic thermal characteristics selection i 7 00 Reduced torque characteristics 2nd electronic thermal i as b213 oe f 01 Constant torque characteristics 00 characteristics selection i 02 Free setting 3rd electronic thermal b313 ats characteristics selection b015 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 b017 Free setting electronic thermal 0 to 400 0 Hz frequency 2 Free setting electronic thermal b019 frequency 3 b016 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 b018 Free setting electronic thermal 0 0 to Rated current 0 0 A current 2 b020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 C061 Thermal warning level 0 to 100 1 80 Related functions C021 to C025 C026 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on 1 Set a percentage relative to the electronic thermal multiplication value When the value reaches 100 an overload trip E05 occurs 4 46 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Electronic Thermal Level Motor Protection Level Electronic Thermal Characteristics Example RX A2150 Rated current 64 A Setting range 12 8 A 20 to 64 0 A 100 The graph on the right shows the time limit characteristics with the electronic thermal level b012 set to 64 A Reduced Torque Characteristics Trip time s 60
416. s are used for alarm CRs heal Resistance load Inductive load C036 status Inverter set Power Max values status AL2 AL1 contact 200VAC 2A 250V AC 0 2 A ALO ALO A 30 V DC 8A 30 V DC 0 6 A AL2 capacity ALO Min 100 V AC 10 mA Abnormal Closed Open contact 5 V DC 100 mA capacity ON tar 250VAC 1A 250V AC 0 2 A 00 Normal Open Closed contact 30VDC 1A 30 V DC 0 2 A AL1 capacity ALO Min i 100 V AC 10 mA OFF Open Closed contact 5 V DC 100 mA capacity Abnormal Open Closed 01 ON Default Normal Closed Open OFF Open Closed 4 95 4 2 Function Mode Signal During RUN relay output terminal e This signal is also output during DC injection braking Below is the time chart Output frequency FW RUN es ae _f gt l o While the Inverter is running this signal is output via multi function output terminals 11 to 15 or the e Allocate 00 RUN to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 nT i c Frequency Arrival Signal 5 s When the output frequency reaches the set level a frequency arrival signal is output z Parameter Default H Function name Data Unit No setting C042 Arrival frequency during acceleration 0 0 Does not output arrival signal during acceleration 5 i 0 0 Hz Gae Arrival frequency during 9 1 to 400 0 Outputs
417. s defined as the point where the pulse is input between EZP and EZN Below is the layout of the stop target position Positive phase connection Position of Z pulse Motor shaft viewed from motor Reference point shaft load side 0 1024 3072 2048 Orientation stop position conceptual drawing 4 130 suoljoun Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used Absolute Position Control Mode eTo use this function set V f characteristics selection A044 to 05 V2 and V2 control mode selection P012 to 02 APR2 Absolute position control When 03 high resolution absolute position control is selected in V2 control mode selection P012 control is based on x4 the number of pulses used for internal operations Set the multi step position command and position range setting for x4 multiplication control e The position command can be changed up to 8 steps depending on combinations of multi function input terminals Zero return speed can be selected from one low speed and two high speeds The orientation function described in the previous section is not available e By using the teaching function you can set the position command while running the machine e By allocating 73 SPD to a multi function input you can switch between the speed and position controls For data with many digits e g position command only the higher 4 digits are displayed Par
418. s there any ground fault temperature error in the main p Check the output wires and motor IGBT error element or drop of the main eon elementdrivind bow r suppi SU Has the main element been damaged gP ppYy Check the IGBT Pee Is there any clogging in the fin Retry operation cannot be Clean the fin i performed for this trip f Is the motor temperature too high Shuts off the Inverter output when Check the motor temperature detecting the thermistor resistance Is there any damage to the thermister Thermistor value inside the motor has changed inside the motor 2 10 error which is connected to the TH E 334 Check the thermistor 4 73 terminal resulting motor Is there any electrical noise being temperature rise introduced in the thermister signal Separate the wiring When 01 is selected in b120 brake Is the brake ON OFF function working control selection this error appears Brake check if the brake ON OFF cannot be Is the set time for b124 too short Brake error confirmed within the b124 set time cg Increase b124 4 74 brake confirmation wait time after Has the brake confirmation signal been the Inverter outputs the brake input release signal Wiring check Shuts off the hardware output and Did any error occur in the external Emergen cv shutoff displays an error when the EMR devices when the emergency shutoff 2 10 S terminal S3 is turned on with SW1 3 14 function was selected
419. se frame Positive response Frame format 4 4 Communication Function STX Station No ACK Data BCC CR Description Data size Setting STX Control code Start of Text 1 byte STX 0x02 Station No Station No of the target Inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge 1 byte ACK 0x06 Data Data Decimal ASCII code 8 bytes ig Exclusive OR from station No to BCC Block check code 2 bytes data Refer to page 4 157 CR Control code Carriage Return 1 byte CR 0x0D If the data is a selected item the corresponding code data is received transmitted Data on H003 and H203 motor capacity selection are the following code data Code data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Domestic USA mode b085 00 or 02 0 2 kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 EU mode b085 01 0 2 kW 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 3 0 4 0 Code data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Domestic USA mode b085 00 or 02 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 EU mode b085 01 5 5kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code data 22 23 24 25 26 Domestic USA mode b085 00 or 02 90 kW 110 132 150 160 EU mode b085 01 90kW 110 132 150 160 e f the data is a numeric value refer to the function code list Example When acceleration time F002 is set to 30 00 sec the data is 3000 Negative response Refer to page 4 15
420. selection 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop co77 Communication error 0 00 to 99 99 0 00 No s 2102 timeout 4 140 coza Communication wait o to 1000 0 No ms time C 00 ASCII AN ommunication C079 method selection 01 ModBus RTU 91 Ne 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 26 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Del Function name Monitor or data range f during Unit Page No setting operation F 0 to 9999 Factory COS to O adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 default VS ST 0 to 9999 Factory E C982 f Oladjustmert 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 defaut YS 0 to 9999 Factory y C0837 QZ adjustment 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 defaut YS T lt Thermistor 0 0 to 999 9 Factory C085 adjustment 1000 defaut YS 473 C091 Not used eaters 00 No Do not change C101 UP DWN selection 00 Do not store the frequency data 00 No 488 01 Store the frequency data 00 Trip reset at power on 01 Trip reset when the power is OFF 4 85 5 C102 Reset selection 02 Enabled only during trip Reset when the 00 Yes 4 132 5 power is ON 03 Trip reset only Reset frequenc OOO Hiz start C103 m tchin ae 01 Frequency matching start 00 No 4 85 9 02 Active
421. selection 21 ZS 0 Hz signal C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 05 function selection y 0 00 to 100 0 Hz 2063 O Hz detection level Set a frequency to be detected as 0 Hz 0 09 Related functions A044 A244 A344 e Enabled when 21 ZS is allocated to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the relay output terminal C026 When VC special VP free V F sensorless vector control or 0 Hz sensorless vector control is selected as the control method this function works for the Inverter s output frequency When the control method is sensor vector control this function works for the motor rotation frequency Alarm Code Output ACO to AC3 e This function outputs a 3 bit or 4 bit code signal to indicate the cause of an Inverter trip Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled C062 Alarm code selection 01 3 bit code 00 02 4 bit code e If 01 3 bit or 02 4 bit is selected in alarm code selection C062 multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 are forced to output an alarm code The following table shows the output alarm codes Multi function output terminals With 4 bit code selected With 3 bit code selected 14 13 12 11 Factor code Trip cause Factor code Trip cause AC3 AC2 AC1 ACO 0 0 0 0 Normal Normal Normal Normal E01 to E03 E01 to E03 4 0 0 0 1 E04 Overcurrent
422. selection 01 Enabled 00 N z biog Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s release p122 Brake wait time for 000 to 5 00 0 00 No s acceleration p123 Brake wait time for 0 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s stopping _ 4 75 p124 Brake wait time for 00 to 5 00 0 00 No s confirmation Brake release 0 00 to 99 99 b125 frequency 100 0 to 400 0 9 00 No Hz 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated b126 Brake release current 9 9 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW current N oF o Brake input 0 00 to 99 99 b124 sequency 100 0 to 400 0 0 005 ZNO Hz 2 O It aati Aine 00 Disabled b130 j 01 DC voltage kept constant 00 No selection during A 02 Acceleration enabled deceleration sian ees 200 V class 330 to 390 380 No y pro i 400 V class 660 to 780 760 during deceleration p132 OVervoltage 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 No s 476 protection parameter Overvoltage p433 Protection 0 00 to 2 55 0 50 Yes proportional gain setting Overvoltage ee 0 000 to 9 999 b134 protection integral 10 000 to 65 53 0 060 Yes s time setting 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 37 3 7 Parameter List Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Default setting Changes during operation Unit Page C001 Multi function selection 1 input 1 C002 Multi
423. set with the Digital Operator e To enable this function set the slide switch SW1 lever in the Inverter to ON With the factory default setting slide switch SW1 is OFF This function is disabled 2 10 Design 2 2 Wiring Before operating slide switch SW1 make sure that the input power supply is OFF Slide switch SW1 setting and status of multi function input terminals 1 and 3 Slide switch Multi function input terminal 1 Multi function input terminal 3 es Multi function input 1 Multi function input 1 Multi function input 3 Multi function input 3 g selection operation selection selection operation selection C001 co11 T1 C003 C013 1 2 SW1 OFF Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected Emergency randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 7 Shit Factory 01 RV Factory 00 NO Factory 12 EXT Factory 00 NO Disabled default default default default factory default SW1 ON Automatic allocation to multi function input terminals 1 and 3 Emergency and the input terminal with 18 RS setting 3 shutoff Fixed 18 RS Fixed 00 NO Fixed 64 EMR Fixed 01 NC Enabled f T function function function function Cannot Cannot Cannot Cannot be be be be changed changed changed changed Turning SW1 Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected Can be selected on and then randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 4 randomly 4 3 Holds 18 R
424. shooting Function List of the DIP and Rotary Switches on the digital command board 3G3AX DI01 ae Resolution setting ol DIP switch ch 5 Torque Posi TYPE Acceleration Deceleration co CODE Set frequency 5 4 limit tion time setting setting setting Switch No j Setting do1Hz 0 1Hz 1Hz Rate O0tsec 01sec 14sec 1 1 pulse 1 2 code 0 O 1 O OFF 2 O Batch 3 O input 7 a mode PAC 5 For factory adjustment Do not set 6 O On 7toF For factory adjustment Do not set BCD 0 O input 1 O O BCD 5 o OFF Binary 3 O input 4 O O BIN ON Dividing _ 6 S input 6 O mode DIV 7 O O 8 O 9 O A O O B O CtoF For factory adjustment Do not set How to Read the Input Mode List Example 1 Switch setting when setting the frequency with a resolution of 1 Hz via binary input BIN in the batch input mode PAC TYPE CODE 1 2 OFF BIN OFF PAC Example 2 Switch setting when setting the frequency with a resolution of 0 1 Hz via BCD input and setting the acceleration deceleration time with a resolution of 0 1 sec via BCD in put in the dividing input mode DIV TYPE CODE ON BCD ON DIV 5 7 5 1 Protective Functions and Troubleshooting Trip Monitor Display 2 Output f
425. signal l PLOR b124 Brake confirmation wait time b124 Brake confirmation wait time Note The above operation chart applies to a case where the brake confirmation signal 44 BOK is selected for any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 If BOK is not selected the acceleration wait time b122 starts at the brake release signal ON timing The stop wait time b123 starts at the brake release signal OFF timing eTo use the brake control function allocate the following functions to multi function I O terminals as required eTo input a brake release signal from an external brake to the Inverter allocate the brake confirmation signal 44 BOK to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 4 74 suoi un4 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Allocate the brake release signal 19 BRK to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 Also to use a brake error output signal allocate the brake error signal 20 BER eTo use the brake control function you are recommended to select sensorless vector control A044 03 0 Hz sensorless vector control A044 04 or sensor vector control A044 05 so that the Inverter outputs high torque during startup Refer to page 4 21 Parameters Required for Brake Control Function Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Disabled b120 Brake control selection 01 Enabled 00 0 0
426. sistance is lower than the specified value Doing so may damage the regenerative braking circuit The Inverters with 30 kW or higher capacity do not incorporate a regenerative braking circuit To improve braking capability the optional regenerative braking unit and braking resistor are required In this case connect the regenerative braking unit terminals to the Inverter terminals P N The cable length should be 5 m or less Twist the two wires Do not connect any device other than the optional regenerative braking unit or external braking resistor to this terminal 2 13 2 2 Wiring Ground Terminal GS To prevent electric shock be sure to ground the Inverter and the motor According to the Electric Apparatus Engineering Regulations the 200 V class Inverter should be connected to the grounding electrodes under type D grounding conditions conventional type 3 grounding ground resistance 100 or less the 400 V class Inverter should be connected to the grounding electrodes under type C grounding conditions conventional special type 3 grounding ground resistance 10 or less e For the ground cable use the applicable cable or a cable with a larger diameter Make the cable length as short as possible e When several Inverters are connected the ground cable must not be connected across several Inverters and must not be looped Otherwise the Inverters may malfunction Your ground bolt Winstalling Screws in
427. sition command 6 P066 07 Multi step position command 7 P067 P100 to Not used Do not use 0 P131 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 53 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Changes Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting operation U001 User 1 selection no d001 to P074 no U002 User 2 selection no d001 to P074 no U003 User 3 selection no d001 to P074 no U004 User 4 selection no d001 to P074 no U005 User 5 selection no d001 to P074 no oO E U006 User 6 selection no d001 to P074 no 5 Yes 4 53 2a U007 User 7 selection no d001 to P074 no E U008 User 8 selection no d001 to P074 no U009 User 9 selection no d001 to P074 no U010 User 10 selection no d001 to P074 no U011 User 11 selection no d001 to P074 no U012 User 12 selection no d001 to P074 no 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 54 po uoiesado Operation e 3 7 Parameter List 3 55 Chapter 4 Functions Ae Lig SIMI GENIE OT VI o de 4 1 4 2 Function Mode ee eee ae 4 8 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 3G3AX PGOMISUSed a E drives 4 119 4 4 Communication Function ccccseeeees 4 139 Functions 4 1 Monitor Mode 4 1 Monitor Mode Output F
428. solute Position Control Operation RUN command on Output frequency Hz SPEEA eae ae ees command When the position command level is low the motor decelerates and its position is determined before the output frequency reaches the speed Position ready range setting P017 command level Position POK signal Position ready delay time setting P018 In the absolute position control mode the Inverter moves to the target position according to the fol lowing parameter settings and is then set in the position servo lock status e Position command e Speed command frequency reference e Acceleration Deceleration time The servo lock status is retained until the RUN command is turned off The frequency reference and acceleration deceleration command for absolute position control con form to the items selected when the RUN command is turned on 4 132 suoljoun Functions 4 3 Functions When PG Option Board 83G3AX PG01 Is Used If the position command is set to a low value the Inverter may stop deceleration and perform posi tioning before the speed command value is reached In the absolute position control mode the direction of RUN command FW or RV does not refer to the rotating direction The FW or RV signal starts or stops the Inverter The Inverter runs forward when Target position Current position is a positive value or runs in reverse when it is a negative value If you do not perform zero ret
429. splay example Description uonesado fo 6 0 b b Power On ll lal Nw 1 Press the Mode key once and then press the Decrement key three C2 X 7 7 times to display b Press the Mode key C2 Li LI L b001 is displayed A yw LK T pan r Use the Increment or Decrement key to display b084 CD z E Press the Mode key The set value in b084 is displayed A yw T m Use the Increment or Decrement key to display 02 J I I C LI Press the Enter key The set value is entered and b084 is displayed Linksys a STOP Press the STOP RESET key while holding down the Mode and RESET Decrement keys simultaneously When the display blinks release the STOP RESET key first and then CD x the Mode and Decrement keys T 1 1 Displays initialization e ll l In 1 s cc E g i The parameter number is displayed again in approximately 1 s 3 6 Operation po 3 3 Test Run Operation No load Operation eStart the no load motor i e not connected to the mechanical system using the Digital Operator Forward Reverse Rotation via the Digital Operator Key sequence Display example Description Press and hold the Mode key for 3 seconds or more to display d001 CD H and then press again nt Int
430. sponds to the range of 0 to the maximum target value Allocate 04 OD to any of multi function output terminals C021 to C025 or relay output terminal C026 Feedback Comparison Signal lf a PID feedback value is out of the specified range it can be output to a multi function output terminal Allocate 31 FBV to any of multi function output terminals C021 to C025 or relay output terminal C026 4 34 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode PID feedback FW FBV PID Integral Reset Clears the integral value of PID operation Allocate 24 PIDC to any of multi function inputs C001 to C008 Clears the integral value every time the PIDC terminal is turned on Do not turn on the PIDC terminal during PID operation to avoid a possible overcurrent trip Turn on the PIDC terminal after turning off PID operation AVR Function C052 OFF level C053 ON level ON cS SS a a OFF ON j wwe d T d 4 EPID Feedback Value Monitor eYou can monitor the PID feedback value e The monitor value is displayed as the product of the feedback value and PID scale A075 Monitor display Feedback value x A075 setting e This function outputs voltage to the motor correctly even if the incoming voltage to the Inverter fluctuates With this function output voltage to the motor is based on the voltage set in the motor voltage selection Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Alw
431. st 2nd 3rd max F001 ee frequency Yes Hz 48 9 0 0 to 100 0 PID control enabled 0 01 to 99 99 F002 Acceleration time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 1000 to 3600 2nd acceleration 9 0 1510 3999 F202 time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 1000 to 3600 3rd acceleration 9 01 109993 F302 time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 1000 to 3600 0 01 to 99 99 F003 Deceleration time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 1000 to 3600 2nd deceleration 0 01 1099 99 F203 time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 1000 to 3600 3rd deceleration 9 0151999 93 F303 time 1 100 0 to 999 9 30 00 Yes s 4 8 i 1000 to 3600 F004 Operator rotation 00 Forward 00 No _ 4 9 direction selection 01 Reverse 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 3 Appendix 1 Parameter List Extended Function Mode Parameter Default SETS Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting operation 00 Digital Operator FREQ adjuster Enabled when 3G3AX OP01 is used 01 Terminal 02 Digital Operator F001 Frequency reference 03 ModBus communication 4 10 A001 selection 04 Option 1 02 No 4138 05 Option 2 06 Pulse train frequency 07 Not used 10 Operation function result 01 Terminal D 02 Digital Operator F001 i Anoa SUN commans 03 ModBus communication 02
432. switching time H073 R W 0 to 9999 1 ms 1555h to Not used 1600h 4 201 4 4 Communication Function Regjiey Function name Funeden R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 1601h Operation selection at P001 R W o Trips a option 1 error 1 Continues operating 1602h Operation selection at P002 R W 0 Trips E option 2 error 1 Continues operating 1603h to Not used 160Ah 160Bh Encoder pulses P011 R W 128 to 65535 1 0 ASR 160Ch V2 control mode selection P012 R W TARR 2 APR2 E 3 HAPR 0 Mode 0 160Dh Pulse train mode selection P013 R W 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2 160Eh Orientation stop position P014 R W 0 to 4095 1 F Starting frequency to 1st max frequency 160Fh Orientation speed setting P015 R W upper limit 12000 0 01 Hz 1610h Orientation direction P016 R W o Forward o setting 1 Reverse 4614h Position ready range P017 R W 0 to 10000 1 setting 1612h POSition ready delay time po4g R W 0 to 999 0 01 s setting 1613h Electronic gear setting P019 R W o Feedback side _ position selection 1 Command side 1614h Electronic gear ratio P020 RW 1 to 9999 numerator 1615h Electronic gear ratio P021 R W 1 to 9999 denominator 16dehr Foston control P022 R W 0 to 65535 0 01 feedforward gain 1617h Position loop gain P023 R W O to 10000 0 01 1618h Position bias amount P024 R W
433. t 32 NDc network error 33 LOG1 logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 logic operation output 3 36 LOG4 logic operation output 4 37 LOG5 logic operation output 5 38 LOG6 logic operation output 6 39 WAC capacitor life warning signal 40 WAF cooling fan life warning signal 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF fin overheat warning 43 LOC light load detection signal 44 Not used 45 Not used 46 Not used 47 Not used 48 Not used 49 Not used 50 IRDY operation ready signal 51 FWR forward run signal 52 RVR reverse run signal 53 MJA fatal fault signal 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 56 WCO2 window comparator O2 When C062 is used to select the alarm code output the multi function output terminals 11 to 13 or 11 to 14 are forcibly changed to ACO to AC2 or ACO to AC3 Acn Alarm code output respectively 00 01 03 07 40 05 No 4 93 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 23 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter A s Default Greige 3 Function name Monitor or data range 7 during Unit Page No setting operation 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 03 Digital output frequency 04 Output voltage 05 Input voltage 4 107 GUAN EM s
434. t 1 on e Control circuit power supply Common Multi function output 1 Q Multi function output 2 Q FW j j Multi function input 1 l Multi function output 3 Multi function input 2 A gt Q Multi function output 4 Multi function input 3 3 f O 3 Q Multi function output 5 Multi function input 4 A4 Multi function input 5 I CM2 Q Multi function output common Multi function input ulti function input 6 amp 6 A Multi function input 7 A7 J Multi function input 8 O 8 RS485 communication For termination Sequence input common resistors Thermistor Analog monitor output A AM voltage output Analog monitor output current output Frequency setting unit Frequency reference power supply A Fm Digital monitor output 500 to 2 KQ PWM output a Frequency reference input voltage A Frequency reference auxiliary input voltage A Option 1 y Frequency reference input current A AMI 9 Frequency reference common Option 1 a Design 2 2 Wiring E Main Circuit Terminals Terminal symbol Terminal name Description R L1 S L2 Main power supply input Connect the input power supply T L3 terminal U T1 V T2 Inverter output terminal Connect to the 3 phase motor W T3 PD 1 P External DC reactor Remove the short circuit bar between terminals PD 1 terminal and P and connect the optional power factor improvement DC reactor P RB Braking resistor Connect optional external
435. t A F D F multiplied by n pulse output only A T V P etc Display monitor Output frequency Output current Output torque Frequency conversion value Trip record I O terminal status Electric power etc Other functions V f free setting 7 Upper lower frequency limit Frequency jump Curve acceleration deceleration Manual torque boost level break Energy saving operation Analog meter adjustment Starting frequency Carrier frequency adjustment Electronic thermal function free setting available External start end frequency rate Analog input selection Trip retry Restart during momentary power interruption Various signal outputs Reduced voltage startup Overload limit Initialization value setting Automatic deceleration at power off AVR function Automatic acceleration deceleration Auto tuning Online Offline High torque multi motor operation control sensor less vector control of two monitors with one Inverter 7 4 Specifications 7 1 Standard Specification List Item Specifications Carrier frequency modification range 0 5 to 15 kHz Protective functions Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection Undervoltage protection Electronic thermal protection Temperature error protection Momentary power interruption Power interruption protection Input phase loss protection Braking resistor overload protection Ground fault current detection at power on USP error
436. t an appropriate power supply voltage is supplied and that the power input terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 are wired correctly RX A20 3 phase 200 to 240 V AC RX A40 3 phase 380 to 480 V AC e Make sure that the motor output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor correctly e Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly and that all control terminals are turned off e Set the motor to no load status i e not connected to the mechanical system EPower On After checking the above turn on the power Display Status Check When the power is turned on normally the display shows Normal RUN LED indicator during RUN ON ALARM LED indicator OFF POWER LED indicator ON RUN command LED indicator ON Data LED indicator frequency ON Data display Displays the set value in d001 lf an error occurs refer to Chapter 5 Maintenance Operations and make the necessary changes to remedy Fault RUN LED indicator during RUN ON ALARM LED indicator ON POWER LED indicator ON RUN command LED indicator ON Data LED indicator frequency ON Data display An error code such as E 01 is displayed The display varies depending on the type of error 3 5 3 3 Test Run Operation Parameter Initialization Initialize the parameters using the following procedure eTo initialize the parameters set parameter b084 to 02 Key sequence Di
437. t from the external control device to the Inverter Query 2 Frame to be returned from the Inverter to the external controller Response 3 Unless the Inverter completes reception of a query from the host within the time set in C077 after the Inverter completes a response response transmission the Inverter becomes ready to receive the first data again In this case the Inverter sends no response Also the Inverter s operation conforms to the setting of communication error selection C076 For details refer to the following table The receiving timeout monitor starts after the first transmission reception is performed after power on or reset Receiving timeout is inactive until reception or transmission is performed Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Trip Trip after receiving timeout E41 01 Trip after stop Deceleration stop after receiving timeout Trip after stop E41 Communication error 02 Ignored C076 selection No trip and no alarm output 02 03 FRS Free run stop after receiving timeout No trip and no alarm output 04 Deceleration stop Deceleration stop after receiving timeout No trip and no alarm output C077 Communication error 0 00 to 99 99 a 0 00 o timeout Time before receiving timeout 0 to 1000 Wait time until response starts C078 Communication wait time after reception is completed excluding silent 0 interval Response from the Inverter F
438. t level b028 RW 200 to 1800 75 to 132 kW OTA Sieh oe Frequency Match b029 R W 10 to 3000 0 01 s ing restart parameter Starting frequency at 0 Frequency at interruption 131Fh Active Frequency Match b030 R W 1 Max frequency ing restart 2 Set frequency 0 Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 1 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON 1320h Soft lock selection b031 R W 2 Data other than b031 cannot be changed 3 Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed 10 Data can be changed during RUN 1321h Not used 1322h Not used 1323h aca R W RUN time Power ON time 0 to 65535 1 10h setting b034 1324h LOW R W Rotation direction limit 0 Forward Reverse enabled 1325h A b035 R W 1 Forward only selection 2 Reverse only 0 Reduced voltage startup time Short Reduced voltage startup to 1326h selection b036 RIV 255 Reduced voltage startup time A Long 0 Complete display 1 Individual display of functions 1327h Display selection b037 R W 2 User setting b037 3 Data comparison display 4 Basic display 4 187 4 4 Communication Function oe Function name punction R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code 0 Screen on which the Enter key was last pressed 1 d001 1328h Initia
439. t setting Unit C030 Digital current monitor 0 2 x Rated current to 2 0 x Rated current Rated current A reference value Set a current value at 1440 Hz output 3 When sensor vector control is selected A044 05 the real frequency detected frequency is displayed 4 107 4 2 Function Mode EFM Adjustment Adjust the Inverter output gain according to the meter connected to the FM terminal Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C105 FM gain setting 50 to 200 Set a gain for the FM monitor 100 Related functions C027 b081 Analog Output AM AMI Terminals You can monitor the output frequency and current using the AM and AMI terminals on the control circuit terminal block The AM terminal provides 0 to 10 V analog output The AMI terminal provides 4 to 20 mA analog output BAM AMI Selection e Select a signal to output from the following table ELEM Function name Data Perel Unit No setting 00 Output frequency 0 to Max frequency Hz 01 Output current 0 to 200 02 Output torque 0 to 200 04 Output voltage 0 to 100 05 Input voltage 0 to 200 06 Thermal load rate 0 to 100 i 07 LAD frequency 0 to Max frequency Hz C028 C029 A rsa q y q y Hz aa 7 selection 09 Motor temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 10 Fin temperature 0 C to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower
440. t the upper and lower limiter settings do not exceed the maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 e Make sure that the output frequency F001 and multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 are not lower than the lower limit setting and not higher than the upper limit setting e Neither limit works if set to 0 Hz Disabled when the 3rd control is selected 4 When Using O L and OI L Output frequency Hz Once the lower limit is set the Inverter outputs the frequency A062 set for the lower limit if O V 4 mA 2 ME ay is input to the frequency reference ce 5 A061 oO c LL A062 5 Frequency OV reference 4mA 20 mA When Using O2 L e When the lower limit is used for the O2 input the Max frequency 4 J i ic fi i AO0A AOA 5 rotation at 0 V is fixed to A062 for either forward or 7 reverse rotation as described below A061 A062 Reverse 10V Forward A062 A061 Max frequency A004 A204 a When the RUN command is set to the terminal A002 01 Terminal Rotation when O2 0 V FW ON A062 for forward rotation RV ON A062 for reverse rotation a When the RUN command is set to the Digital Operator A002 02 F004 Rotation when O2 0 V 00 A062 for forward rotation 01 A062 for reverse rotation 4 29 4 2 Function Mode Frequency Jump Function e The frequency jump function helps avoid resonant points of loaded machines Parameter No Functio
441. table fee FD 1A Current A KVA Current A KVA resistor Ohms AX BCR2035090 TE 35 13 90 32 4 100 200V AX BCR2070130 TE 70 25 130 47 2 8 125 AX BCR4015045 TE 15 11 45 33 16 50 AX BCR4017068 TE 17 13 68 51 11 63 400V AX BCR4035090 TE 35 26 90 67 8 5 100 AX BCR4070130 TE 70 52 130 97 5 5 125 AX BCR4090240 TE 90 67 240 180 3 2 250 suoljeoyioeds 7 3 Options Braking Resistor AX REMOOKOOOOLD IE Dimensional Drawing AX REM00K1200 400 IE AX REM00K2 4 6000 IE Specifications VUNUNUN lt lt 106 Specifications Dimensions Weight Type Resistance Q Power W L H M l KG AX REM00K2070 IE 70 200 AX REM00K2120 IE 120 200 105 27 36 94 0 2 AX REM00K2200 IE 200 200 AX REM00K4075 IE 75 400 AX REM00K4035 IE 35 400 200 27 36 189 0 425 AX REM00K4030 IE 30 400 AX REM00K5120 IE 120 500 260 27 36 249 0 58 AX REM00K6100 IE 100 600 320 27 36 309 0 73 AX REM00K6035 IE 35 600 7 15 7 3 Options AX REM00K9000 IE AX REM00K9070 IE 70 900 AX REM00K9020 IE 20 900 200 62 100 74 1 41 AX REM00K9017 IE 17 900 AX REM01K9000 IE suoiesiioads AX REM01K9070 IE 70 1900 200 62 100 74 1 41 AX REM01K9017 IE 17 1900 7 3 Options AX REM02 03KOOO0 1E Specifications Dimensions Weight Type Resistance Q Power W L H M I T KG AX REM02K1070 IE 7
442. te the AT function to the multi function input terminal L Frequencyreference Common terminal for the frequency setting common signals O O2 and Ol and the analog output terminals AM and AMI Do not connect this terminal to the ground Continued to the next page 2 2 Wiring Terminal symbol Terminal name Description Specifications Analog Monitor output AM Multi function analog output Voltage This terminal outputs a signal selected from the 0 to 10 V DC Voltage Output monitor items Output frequency Output current Output torque with without sign Output voltage Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature and Fin temperature Allowable max current 2 mA AMI Multi function analog output Current This terminal outputs a signal selected from the 4 to 20 mA DC Current Output monitor items Output frequency Output current Output torque without sign Output voltage Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature and Fin temperature Allowable load impedance 250 Q max Digital contact Monitor output FM Multi function digital output This terminal outputs a signal selected from the 0 to 10 V DC Voltage Output PWM monitor items Output frequency Output current Output torque without sign Output voltage Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor
443. temperature Fin temperature Digital output frequency and Digital current monitor Digital output frequency and Digital current monitor output a digital pulse at 0 10 V DC pulse voltage and 50 duty ratio Allowable max current 1 2 MA Max frequency 3 6 kHz Power supply P24 Internal 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply for contact input signal When the source logic is selected this terminal functions as the contact input common terminal Allowable max output current 100 mA PLC Input common Common terminal for the interface power supply P24 terminal thermistor input TH terminal and digital monitor FM terminal When the sink logic is selected this terminal functions as the contact input common terminal Do not connect this terminal to the ground Continued to the next page 2 8 a ubiso Design 2 2 Wiring P ermina Terminal name Description Specifications symbol g FW Forward rotation When the FW signal is ON the motor runs Contact input ON g command terminal forward When it is OFF the motor decelerates condition E and stops Voltage between 8 each input terminal and the CM1 terminal X 18 V DC or more 1 Multi function input Select 8 functions from among the 61 functions f 2 and allocate them to terminals 1 to 8 Input impedance 3 between each input 4 Note Only terminals 1 and 3 can be used for the terminal and the CM1 5 emergency
444. tep selection with 4 i terminals A019 Multi step speed selection 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 00 terminals A020 Multi step speed reference 0 2nd multi step speed nea reference 0 6 0 A320 3rd multi step speed reference 0 A021 Multi step speed reference 1 A022 Multi step speed reference 2 0 0 Starting frequency to A A023 Multi step speed reference 3 Max frequency A024 Multi step speed reference 4 A025 Multi step speed reference 5 0 0 A026 Multi step speed reference 6 A027 Multi step speed reference 7 A028 to A035 Multi step speed references 8 to 15 To switch to the 2nd 3rd control allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input and then turn it on e During multi step speed operation if frequency reference selection A001 is set to the terminal 01 and the external analog input O O2 Ol setting mode based on a combination of O OI selection A005 O2 selection A006 and the AT terminal is set to reversible the RUN command is inverted when main frequency reference auxiliary frequency reference is less than zero 4 16 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Binary Operation e By allocating 02 to 05 CF1 to CF4 to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 you can select from multi step speeds 0 to 15 Use A021 to A035 multi step speeds 1 to 15 to set frequencies for speeds 1 to 15 When the Digital Operator is selected as the frequency reference speed 0
445. ter in bytes register 08h Loop back test OFh Writing into multiple coils 4 32 coils in bits 10h Writing into multiple registers 8 4 registers in bytes lt Error Check gt CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check is used for the ModBus RTU error check The CRC code is a 16 bit data generated for the block of random length data in the 8 bit unit eTo prepare the CRC code use a generation polynomial of CRC 16 x16 X15 X 1 4 4 Communication Function CRC 16 Calculation Example CRC 16 calculation CRC FFFFh All target data completed Interchange the Hi and Lo bytes of CRC i CRC CRC register 2 bytes CRC CRC XOR target data Bits left Shift CRC CRC by 1 bit to the right Overflow bit after shift CRC CRC XOR A001h Completed Lasstsctesecceonsce seco scceseesessssesezeckeesesscccse Shift by 1 byte against target data lt Header and Trailer Silent Interval gt Wait time from receiving the query from the master to the response by the Inverter Be sure to provide 3 5 characters 24 bits as the wait time If the length does not reach 3 5 characters the Inverter does not respond e The actual communication wait time is the total of the silent interval 3 5 character length and C078 communication wait time setting Message Configuration Response lt Total Communication Time gt e The tim
446. ter the retry wait time b003 elapses In this case increase the retry wait time Even if the retry operation is selected the Inverter trips when undervoltage remains for 40 seconds or longer If frequency matching start or Active Frequency Matching restart is selected for retry operation the Inverter abruptly restarts at power on by alarm reset or retry start e Below is the timing chart for frequency matching start retry selection b001 02 Note that the Inverter switches regardless of settings to the initial state when the power supply is turned on in the case of a complete power discharge t0 Momentary power interruption time t1 Allowable momentary power interruption time b002 t2 Retry wait time b003 Example 1 Example 2 Duration of momentary power interruption Duration of momentary power interruption lt Allowable duration of momentary power interruption b002 gt Allowable duration of momentary power interruption b002 Power supply Power supply Inverter Inverter output TZ ee ee i output pz Free running Free running Motor rpm Motor rpm 4 43 4 2 Function Mode Example 3 Motor frequency rpm gt b007 Example 4 Motor frequency rpm lt b007 a ee ae Inverter Inverter i output output Free running A i Free running j 007 Motor frequency N L Motor frequency vV rpm Frequency rpm Yj mat
447. terminal response C165 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 6 q4aah MPut terminal response C166 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 7 4 199 4 4 Communication Function Regjieier Function name Funeden R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution No code q4apn IPPUt terminal response C167 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 time 8 14ACh erda IOS PRNS C168 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 q4aph Multi step speed position C169 R W 0 to 200 x 2 ms 1 determination time 14AEh to Not used 1500h 0 Disabled 1501h Auto tuning selection H001 R W 1 Does not rotate 2 Rotates 0 Standard 1502h Motor parameter selection H002 R W 1 Auto tuning data 2 Auto tuning data with online auto tuning 1503h Motor capacity selection H003 RW 0 2P 1 4P Jadah 2109r pole numbar H004 RW 2 6P selection 3 8P 4 10P H005 1505h HIGH R W Speed response 0 to 80000 0 001 1506h 1008 R W LOW 1507h Stabilization parameter H006 R W 0 to 255 1 1508h to Not used 1514h 1515h H020 R W HIGH 0 001 Motor parameter R1 1 to 65530 1516h M020 R W a LOW 1517h t1021 R W HIGH 0 001 Motor parameter R2 T 1 to 65530 io 1518h LOW R W 1519h t1022 R W HIGH 0 01 Motor parameter L 1 to 65530 151Ah H022 R W oe LOW H023 151Bh HIGH R W Motor parameter lo 1 to 65530 0 01 A 151Ch ne R W LOW 151Dh 11024 R W HIGH 0 001 Motor par
448. than 02 Digital Operator is selected in RUN command selection A002 Refer to RUN Command Selection page 4 11 If 02 Digital Operator is selected in A002 the STOP command and trip reset operation are enabled regardless of this setting Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit 00 Enabled b087 STOP key selection 01 Disabled 00 02 Disabled only during stop Data STOP command via the STOP Trip reset operation via the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator RESET key on the Digital Operator 00 Enabled Enabled 01 Disabled Disabled 02 Disabled Enabled Stop Selection e You can set whether the Inverter decelerates to a stop for the set deceleration time or goes into free run status when the STOP command is input from the Digital Operator or the control circuit terminal block e If the RUN command is input again during free running the Inverter restarts according to free run stop selection b088 Refer to Free run Stop Selection page 4 69 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit b091 Stop selection P Ar AER 00 01 Free run stop 00 0 Hz start 01 Frequency matching start posg Freerun Stop selection 02 Active Frequency Matching re me E start b003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 0 00 Hz b007 Froguengy matching IOWer 9 0046400 0 1 0 s limit frequency setting Related functions F003 F203 F303 4 68 suo
449. the Main Circuit Terminal Block e For the main circuit terminal blocks of RX A2055 A2075 A4055 A4075 be sure to install the terminal block screw washers with their grooved sides aligned vertically as shown below Not doing so may result in a contact failure or fire Intended terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 PD 1 P N U T1 V T2 W T3 RB Terminal block screw washer 2 14 ubisag 2 2 Wiring E Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminals The terminal arrangement on the Inverter main circuit terminal block is shown below Terminal arrangement Applicable model When not using the DC reactor keep the PD 1 P short circuit bar attached CHARGE LED indicator PD 1 P short circuit eo EMC filter function switching method In order to enable the EMC filter Dummy plug green function set up the plug inserted into the filter enable pin J61 and filter disable pin J62 as shown in the table below Confirm that i electrical power has been 5 disconnected before performing this Filter enable pin setup Not doing so may result in J61 electric shock Also use with the Short plug plug inserted Filter disable pin J62 Filter disable pin J62 Short plug Dummy plug g
450. the RESET button on the Digital Operator or on the copy unit to show the basic setting screen Reset the parameter that you changed in step 2 to a desired setting 4 4 Communication Function ASCII Method Communication Procedure e The following shows the communication procedure between the Inverter and external controller 1 External controller Inverter Wait time Set via the Digital Operator 1 Indicates a frame sent from the external controller to the Inverter 2 Indicates a frame sent back from the Inverter to the external controller Frame 2 is response output from the Inverter after reception of frame 1 It is not an active output Below is each frame format command Command List Command Description Communication with all stations Note 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B Inputs forward reverse stop command Sets frequency reference Sets multi function input terminal status Reads all monitor data Reads the Inverter status Reads trip data Reads a parameter Sets a parameter Initializes each set value Checks if a set value can be stored in EEPROM Stores a set value in EEPROM Re calculates internal parameters Available Available Available Not available Not available Not available Not available Available Available Not available Available Available Enabled only when b084 is set to 01 or
451. the max frequency Set frequency fon foff h 2 of the max frequency Output w N i Example Max frequency fmax 120 Hz Set frequency fset 60 Hz fon 120 x 0 01 1 2 Hz fot 120 x 0 02 2 4 Hz FAI During acceleration ON at 60 1 2 58 8 Hz During deceleration OFF at 60 2 4 57 6 Hz WSet frequency exceeded Output 02 FA2 24 FA4 2 A signal is output when the output frequency has exceeded the arrival frequencies during Ke acceleration deceleration set in C042 C043 FA2 and C045 C046 FA4 6042 0045 6043 0046 fon 1 of the max frequency ra fae co 4 fot i foff 2 of the max frequency Output frequency FA2 FA4 ESet frequency only Output 06 FA3 25 FA5 A signal is output when the output frequency equals the arrival frequencies during acceleration deceleration set in C042 C043 FA3 and C045 C046 FA5 fon N C043 C046 Output frequency Pio a tor fon 1 of the max frequency C042 C045 i foff 2 of the max frequency fon FA3 FA5 4 97 4 2 Function Mode Overtorque OTQ e This function outputs a signal when detecting a motor output torque estimated value exceeding a specified level Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit C021 to C025 Multi function output 7 terminal selection 07 OTQ Overtorque signal Relay output AL2 AL1 C026 A i 05 function selection 0 to 200 0 4 to 55
452. time for b122 R W 0 to 500 0 01 s acceleration 437Eh Brake wait time for b123 R W 0 to 500 0 01 s stopping q437Fh_ Brake wait time for b124 R W 0 to 500 0 01 s confirmation 1380h Brake release frequency b125 R W 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 0 to 2000 0 4 to 55 kW 6 1381h Brake release current b126 R W 0 to 1800 75 to 132 kW 0 1 1382h Brake input frequency b127 R W 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 1383h Not used 1384h Not used Overvoltage protection 0 Disabled 1385h function selection during b130 R W 1 DC voltage kept constant deceleration 2 Acceleration enabled Overvoltage protection 200 V class 330 to 390 V 1386h level during deceleration pled RAY 400 V class 660 to 780 V 1M 1387h OVeroltage protection b132 R W 10 to 3000 0 01 s parameter 1388h OVeNoltage protection b133 R W 0 to 255 0 01 proportional gain setting 4 191 4 4 Communication Function Register No Function name Function code R W Monitor and setting parameters Resolution 1389h Overvoltage protection integral time setting b134 R W 0 to 65535 0 004 s 1390h to 1400h Not used 1401h Multi function input 1 selection C001 R W 1402h Multi function input 2 selection C002 R W 1403h Multi function input 3 selection C003 R W 1404h Multi function input 4 selection C004 R W 1405h Multi function inp
453. tion e The following table shows the details of warning display and parameter correction Warning display Target code Condition Base code 001 201 Frequency upper limit A061 A261 gt 002 202 Frequency lower limit A062 A262 gt 004 204 304 Base frequency A003 A203 A303 1 gt O fi F001 Mul d ref 0 A020 KEA P utput frequency Multi step speed reference A004 A204 A304 005 205 305 A220 A320 2 gt 006 206 306 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 gt 009 Orientation speed setting P015 gt 012 212 Frequency lower limit A062 A262 gt 015 215 Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 A020 5 Frequency upper limit A220 2 A061 A261 016 216 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 gt 019 P ma speed Frequency upper limit A061 A261 021 221 lt Frequency lower limit 025 225 Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 A020 2 A062 A262 A220 A320 031 231 Frequency upper limit A061 A261 lt 032 232 Frequency lower limit A0Q62 A262 lt Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference 0 A020 Starting frequency 035 2351335 A220 A320 2 b082 036 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 lt 037 Jogging frequency A038 lt Output frequency F001 Multi step speed reference O A020 Jump frequency 1 2 3 085 285 385 4220 4320 2 lt gt Jump width A063 A064 086 Multi step speeds 1 to 15 A021 to A035 lt gt A065 A066 A
454. tion frequency cannot be changed through key operations from output frequency monitor d001 frequency conversion monitor d007 or output frequency setting F001 Note 2 The same setting is available in A141 and A142 eTo use this function as a frequency reference set frequency reference selection A001 to 10 eTo use this function as a PID feedback set PID feedback selection A076 to 10 Frequency Addition Function e The value set in frequency addition amount A145 can be added to or subtracted from the selected frequency reference value eTo use this function allocate 50 ADD to any of the multi function inputs The A145 value is added or subtracted with the ADD terminal turned on Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit A145 Frequency addition 6 0te 400 0 0 00 Hz amount Fieduencevadditi n 00 Add A145 value to output frequency A146 q y 01 Subtract A145 value from output 00 direction frequency Related functions C001 to C008 ADD input Note 1 If the sign of the frequency reference is changed gt or as a result of operation the rotation direction will be inverted Note 2 When the PID function is used the frequency addition function is enabled for a PID target value Note that A145 is displayed in in increments of 0 01 4 41 4 2 Function Mode lt Group B Detailed Function Parameters gt Momentary Power Interruption Trip Ret
455. tion times allocate 08 SET 17 SET3 to the desired multi function input refer to Multi function Input Selection page 4 77 and use the SET SET3 You can set the acceleration deceleration time via 1 the Digital Operator 2 optional board 1 or 3 optional board 2 Even if a short acceleration deceleration time is set the actual time cannot be shorter than the minimum acceleration deceleration time that is determined by the mechanical inertia moment and the motor torque If you set a time shorter than the minimum time an overcurrent overvoltage trip may occur Acceleration Time Ts Ju Inertia moment of the load converted to the motor shaft kg m Ju Inertia moment of the motor kg m Nm Motor rotation speed r min Ts Max acceleration torque with the Inverter driving N m Ts Max deceleration torque with the Inverter driving N m Tu Required driving torque N m n J JUm x Nm S 9 55x Ts T Deceleration Time Ts JL Jm x Nym 9 55x Tg T B For short time deceleration use a braking unit optional Operator Rotation Direction Selection e Select the rotation direction applied to the RUN command via the Digital Operator e This is disabled at terminals Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit F004 Operator rotation direction op Forward 00 _ selection 01 Reverse 4 9 4 2 Function Mode lt Group A Standard Function Parameters gt Frequency Refere
456. tion inputs from C001 to C008 3 26 Operation e 3 7 Parameter List Parameter i Default aE No Function name Monitor or data range etn during Unit Page g operation 00 Normal operation A085 RUN mode selection 01 Energy saving operation 00 No 02 Automatic operation PE Energy saving A086 response accuracy 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 Yes adjustment A092 Acceleration time 2 15 00 A292 2nd acceleration 15 00 time 2 3rd acceleration A392 me 2 0 01 to 99 99 15 00 100 0 to 999 9 Yes s a A093 Deceleration time 2 1000 to 3600 15 00 x 5 A293 2nd deceleration 15 00 5 time 2 ew x S A393 3rd deceleration 15 00 time 2 xo g 2 step acceleration amp A094 deceleration 00 g selection 00 Switched via multi function input 09 2CH 2 01 Switched by setting i 437 5 2nd 2 step 02 Enabled only when switching forward S A294 acceleration reverse 00 2 deceleration n selection T 5 E A095 2 step acceleration 0 00 zZz frequency x 2nd 2 step No Hz A295 acceleration 0 00 frequency 0 00 to 99 99 3 100 0 to 400 0 A096 2 step deceleration 0 00 frequency 2nd 2 step No Hz A296 deceleration 0 00 frequency A097 Acceleration pattern 00 Line 00 No selection 01 S shape curve f 02 U shape curve 4 38 Aogs Peceleration pattern 03 Inverted U shape curve 00 No pan selection 04 EL S shape
457. to 180 75 to 132 kW w C057 Reverse power 100 No E running E Overtorque level C058 Forward 100 No a regeneration fo x 2 Coat Thermal warning 0 to 100 80 No 4 46 level z 00 Disabled C062 Alarm code selection 01 3 bit 00 No 4 99 02 4 bit C063 0 Hz detection level Haar 99 99 0 00 No Hz 4 99 Coos F n overheat warning 0 to 200 120 No oc 4 103 level 02 Loop back test Communication 03 2400 bps C071 speed selection 04 4800 bps 04 No Baud rate selection 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps co72 CoMmunication 4 to 32 1 No _ station No selection Communication bit 7 7 bit cor length selection 8 8 bit yo E S Communication 09 No parity A e C074 i 01 Even 00 No E parity selection 02 Odd O Communication stop 1 1 bit 10 E E C075 pit selection 2 2 bit f ne E 00 Trip 5 Coinm nitaton error 01 Trip after deceleration stop O co76 poi 02 Ignore 02 No 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop co77 Communication error 9 00 to 99 99 0 00 No g 3102 timeout 4 140 coz Communication wait o to 1000 0 No ms time 4 140 Communication 00 ASCII C079 method selection 01 ModBus RTU 01 Ne E 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 43 3 7 Parameter List
458. to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Windications and Meanings of Safety Information In this user s manual the following precautions and signal words are used to provide information to ensure the safe use of the RX Inverter The information provided here is vital to safety Strictly observe the precautions provided Meanings of Signal Words N WARNING VAN CA U TI O N may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided is likely to result in serious injury or may result in death Additionally there may be severe property damage Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided BAlert Symbols in this Document N WARNING Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not change wiring and slide switches SW1 put on or take off Digital Operator and optional devices replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Be sure to ground the unit Not doing so may result in a serious
459. top 0 4 60 momentary power interruption undervoltage trip during Stop SelECTION cccceteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee 4 42 4 44 MP ieee aos i Stank as ee cola ee iaaa oe Dnata so ae eet 4 107 multi function input monitor 00 2 eee ee eee etter teens 4 2 multi function input terminal selection we 4 77 multi function output Monitor cece eeeteeeeeeeee 4 2 multi function output terminal ceceeeeeeeeeee 4 93 Index 2 Index R T pe M real frequency MONItOF cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteteeeeteees 4 3 LOSE FUM anten ae aiaa t 3 4 reduced voltage startup ee eeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeereeeeeees 4 53 MOr S OE e et i ee a N 4 73 relay output terminals 00 0 0 eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 4 95 TA Misecatoee et tenit ica etal ia ceetetetodleae eeented dalineene 4 48 Ue scene eee eee sith Aaa eae 4 58 torque bias Monitor 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeneeeeeeenaneee 4 3 torg bOOSti 4 nai Ac dete rns 4 19 torque LADSTOP function 0 ccceeeseeeeeeeeeteeeee 4 59 lorquesliMit cH tented eee 4 57 torque reference MONIOF cececeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeee 4 3 total RUN ME tee ae ae 4 4 trip monitor display ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeees 4 6 5 8 trip retry TRQ TRQ1 TRQ2 U SS UID Gee Peto AA AA E E 4 88 S a E A E 4 88 a UP DOWN fUNCtion 0 00 cecececeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaes 4 88 OO Se Rs Se ee 2 21 USEF parameter
460. tput voltage Input voltage Thermal load rate LAD frequency Motor temperature Fin temperature Not used 00 No 4 108 4 116 value Digital current C030 monitor reference 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Rated current Current value at the digital current monitor output 1440 Hz Rated current Yes A 4 107 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 3 41 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Ciega Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page No setting Operation Multi function output C031 terminal 11 contact selection Multi function output C032 terminal 12 contact g selection S Multi function output C033 terminal 13 contact 00 Q 3 selection 00 NO contact at AL2 NC contact at AL1 No _ 4 94 Multi function output 01 NC contact at AL2 NO contact at AL1 5 C034 terminal 14 contact 5 selection Multi function output C035 terminal 15 contact selection Relay output AL2 C036 AL1 contact 01 selection Light load signal 00 Enabled during acceleration deceleration C038 9 9 constant speed 01 No output mode 01 Enabled only during constant speed 4 104 C039 Light load detection 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current 0 4 to 55 kW Rated No A level 0 0 to 1 80 x Rated current 75 to 132 kW curre
461. uency b100 to b113 e The free V f frequencies should always be 1 lt 2 lt 3 lt 4 lt 5 lt 6 lt 7 All the default settings are 0 Hz You must set Free V f setting 7 first Operation is disabled by factory default e If the free V f setting is enabled the functions of torque boost A041 A241 base frequency A003 A203 A303 and maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 are disabled Free V f frequency 7 is regarded as the maximum frequency suoi un4 Parameter No Function name Data Description Default setting Unit b100 Free V f frequency 1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 b102 Free V f frequency 2 0 to Free V f frequency 3 b104 Free V f frequency 3 0 to Free V f frequency 4 b106 Free V f frequency 4 0 to Free V f frequency 5 eile pa 0 Hz b108 Free V f frequency 5 0 to Free V f frequency 6 b110 Free V f frequency 6 0 to Free V f frequency 7 b112 Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 4 22 Functions 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Data Description Default setting Unit b101 Free V f voltage 1 b103 Free V f voltage 2 b105 Free V f voltage 3 b107 Free Vif voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 a 10 0 V b109 Free V f voltage 5 b111 Free V f voltage 6 b113 Free V f voltage 7 Related functions A044 A244 A344 4 23 Example Output voltage V p ge V Ww V2 V3 f4 f5 f6 f7 gt Output frequency Hz Ev
462. uit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 169 4 4 Communication Function Coil No Item R W Description F 1 ON 0016h OL overload warning R 0 OFF 0017h OD excessive PID deviation R 10h 0 OFF 1 ON 0018h AL alarm signal R 0 OFF FA3 set frequency only arrival 1 ON 0919h signal p 0 OFF 1 ON 001Ah OTQ overtorque R 0 OFF IP during momentary power 1 ON 091Bh interruption R 0 OFF 001Ch UV during undervoltage R 1 ON 9 9 0 OFF 001Dh TRQ during torque limit R 1 ON gg 0 OFF 001Eh RNT RUN time exceeded R TON 0 OFF 001Fh ONT ON time exceeded R TON 0 OFF 1 ON 0020h THM thermal warning R 0 OFF 0021h Not used 0022h Not used 0023h Not used 0024h Not used 0025h Not used 1 ON 0026h BRK brake release R 0 OFF 1 ON 0027h BER brake error R 0 OFF 1 ON 0028h ZS 0 Hz signal R 0 OFF 0029h DSE excessive speed deviation R 1 ON p 0 OFF a 1 ON 002Ah POK position ready R 0 OFF 002Bh FA4 set frequency exceeded 2 R ON quensy 0 OFF 002Ch FAS set frequency only 2 R 1 ON ern Q 0 OFF 002Dh OL2 o
463. ulti function inputs from C001 to C008 3 51 3 7 Parameter List Parameter Default Cienges Function name Monitor or data range 5 during Unit Page No setting Operation 00 None PO036 Torque bias mode 01 Digital Operator 00 No 02 Terminal O2 P037 Torque bias value 7200 to 200 0 4 to 55 kw 0 Yes E q 180 to 180 75 to 132 kW Torque bias polarity 00 Signed POSG selection 01 Depends on the RUN direction 00 N Speed limit value in P039 torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz forward 4 122 Speed limit value in P040 torque control 0 00 to Maximum frequency 0 00 Yes Hz reverse P044 Not used Ose th 00 1 00 No s Do not change 00 Trip f 01 Trip after deceleration stop pods OPeration setting at 02 ignore 01 No e 25 communications error 03 Free run a 04 Deceleration stop Cc 2 Output assembl 20 amp poss uP Y f2 21 No ead ex instance No setting 100 Input assembl po47 9P Y J7 71 No ee instance No setting 101 00 Trip Operation setting at pak Trip after deceleration stop P048 4 02 Ignore 01 No idle mode detection 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop P049 Polarity setting for 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0 No 3 o rotation speed 32 34 36 38 poss Hse train frequency 4 0 to 50 0 25 0 No kHz scale pose Pulse train frequency 004 to 2 00 0 10 No s filter time constant
464. unction input With pulse counter monitor d028 you can monitor the total count of input pulses Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Multi function inputs 74 PCNT pulse counter _ C001 t0 C008 1 to 8 selection 75 PCC pulse counter clear Related functions d028 e The total pulse count value cannot be stored After the power is turned on or after reset the counter is reset to zero e Turning on PCC pulse counter clear clears the total count value e The input pulse frequency resolution can be obtained with the following formula This applies to pulse input with a 50 duty ratio The Inverter cannot input frequency higher than the specified frequency resolution It is recommended that you use input frequencies up to 100 Hz For details on input terminal response refer to Input Terminal Response Time page 4 106 Frequency resolution Hz 250 Input terminal response time set values C160 to C168 1 Example When the input terminal response time 1 the frequency resolution 125 Hz Input terminal response time Input pulse ON PONT ace Counter value 4 92 suoljoun 4 2 Function Mode Multi function Output Terminal Selection e You can allocate the following functions to any of multi function output terminals 11 to 15 C021 to C025 or the alarm relay output terminal C026 e Multi function output terminals 11 to 15 provide open collector output The alarm
465. ures against electrical noise EEPROM because of external noise error i cmon Has the cooling efficiency been reduced 2 3 or abnormal temperature rise Eii Note This may be a CPU error depending on the case Check that there is no clogging in the cooling fan and fin if so clean it Replace the cooling fan if faulty 4 The reset command is not accepted until approximately 10 seconds after the trip occurs protection function works 2 The reset command is not accepted if the EEPROM error 5 amp 2joccurs Turn off the power once If you find E08 when turning on the power again it is possible that the internal memory element of the drive has been damaged or the parameters have not been memorized correctly Perform the user initialization to set the parameters again 3 The reset command through the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power Display on Name Description Digital Check point and remedy Reine page Operator Shuts off the output if the incoming supply voltage drops below the Has the power supply voltage specified level This is because the decreased control circuit stops working Check the incoming power supply Undervoltage properly when the incoming supply lt en Is the power supply capacity sufficient 4 28 trip voltage to the Inverter drops EOF Check the power supply Trips when the DC volt
466. urn operation to be described later the position at power on is re garded as the origin position 0 When position command is set to 0 positioning is performed when the RUN command is turned on In reset selection C102 select 03 trip reset only If reset selection C102 is not set to 03 turning on the Inverter s reset terminal or RESET key clears the current position counter To operate the Inverter by using the current position count value after resetting a trip by turning on the reset terminal or RESET key be sure to set reset selection C102 to 03 If PCLR is allocated turning on the PCLR terminal clears the current position counter The internal position deviation counter is simultaneously cleared The absolute position control mode disables the ATR terminal Torque control is disabled The absolute position control mode disables the STAT terminal Pulse train position control is dis abled The absolute position control mode disables the orientation function However the ORT terminal is used for teaching as described later Multi step Position Switching Function CP1 CP2 CP3 4 133 By allocating 66 to 68 CP1 to CP3 to any of multi function inputs 1 to 8 C001 to C008 you can select multi step positions 0 to 7 Set position commands in multi step position commands 0 to 7 P060 to P067 If no position command is allocated to the terminals multi step position command 0 P060 is de fined
467. ut 5 selection C005 R W 1406h Multi function input 6 selection C006 R W 1407h Multi function input 7 selection C007 R W 1408h Multi function input 8 selection C008 R W 01 RV reverse 02 CF1 multi step speed setting binary 1 03 CF2 multi step speed setting binary 2 04 CF3 multi step speed setting binary 3 05 CF4 multi step speed setting binary 4 06 JG jogging 07 DB external DC injection braking 08 SET 2nd control 09 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration 11 FRS free run stop 12 EXT external trip 13 USP USP function 14 CS commercial switch 15 SFT soft lock 16 AT analog input switching 17 SET3 3rd control 18 RS reset 20 STA 3 wire start 21 STP 3 wire stop 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse 23 PID PID enabled disabled 24 PIDC PID integral reset 26 CAS control gain switching 27 UP UP DWN function accelerated 28 DWN UP DWN function decelerated 29 UDC UP DWN function data clear 31 OPE forced operator 32 SF1 multi step speed setting bit 1 33 SF2 multi step speed setting bit 2 34 SF3 multi step speed setting bit 3 35 SF4 multi step speed setting bit 4 36 SF5 multi step speed setting bit 5 37 SF6 multi step speed setting bit 6 38 SF7 multi step speed setting bit 7 39 OLR overload limit switching 40 TL torque limit enabled 41 TRQ1 torque limit switching 1 42 TRQ2 torque
468. ut off the Inverter s output via a multi function input terminal use the free run stop terminal FRS Example 4 Active Frequency Matching restart e After the retry wait time b003 elapses the FW oe Inverter starts output from the b030 set value The Inverter then decelerates according to RS the b029 setting while keeping the output current at the b028 set value e When the frequency matches the voltage the Inverter accelerates again and the frequency is restored to the original level e If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method reduce the b028 setting Output current Decelerates according to b029 Inverter output frequency l i Frequency selected Trip occurs in b030 Motor rpm o CA Co 000 lt gt Note If a reset signal is input during the retry wait time the value of frequency at interruption stored in the Inverter is cleared resulting in a 0 Hz start 3 wire Input Function e This function helps start and stop the Inverter using an auto recovery contact e g pushbutton switch Data Symbol Function name Status Description ON Starts with auto recovery contacts 20 STA 3 wire start OFF Irrelevant to the motor operation ON Stops with auto recovery contacts 21 STP 3 wire stop OFF Irrelevant to the motor operation ON Reverse 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse OFF Forward Available input terminals C001 to C008 Required settings A0
469. ut pulse train frequency value Hz Feedforward Selection e Select a terminal used for feedforward signals in PID feedforward selection A079 e The A079 setting is enabled even if the terminal selected in A079 is duplicated with the terminal selected for target value or feedback value input lf A079 is set to disabled feedforward control is disabled Reverse PID Function Depending on the sensor characteristics the polarity of deviation between the target and feedback values may not match the Inverter s command In this case you can invert the deviation polarity by 4 33 setting A077 to 01 Example To control a refrigerator compressor If the specified temperature range of a temperature sensor is 20 C to 100 C at 0 to 10 V the target value is 0 C and the current temperature is 10 C the Inverter reduces the frequency under normal PID control since the feedback value is higher than the target value Set A077 to 01 so that the Inverter increases the frequency PID target value PID feedback value PID operation 4 2 Function Mode EPID Output Limit Function e This function limits PID output within a variable range relative to the target value e To use this function set PID output limit function A078 The output frequency will be limited within a range of target value A078 with the maximum frequency defined as 100 With A078 set to 0 0 this function is disabled PID output ee
470. value ROEN Revered FIPAUNENON 01 ON Deviation Feedback value Target on No E value Aoza PID outpurimit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 No function 00 Disabled PID feedforward 01 0 Q a is 5 ADO selection 02 Ol og No ae L 03 O2 00 Always ON A081 AVR selection 01 Always OFF 02 No z 02 OFF during deceleration 4 35 A082 AVR voltage 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 200 No V selection 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 400 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 9 Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Greige No Function name Monitor or data range tin during Unit Page g operation 00 Normal operation A085 RUN mode selection 01 Energy saving operation 00 No 02 Automatic operation aise Energy saving A086 _ response accuracy 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 Yes adjustment A092 Acceleration time 2 15 00 A292 2nd acceleration 15 00 time 2 3rd acceleration A392 me 2 0 01 to 99 99 15 00 100 0 to 999 9 Yes s a A093 Deceleration time 2 1000 to 3600 15 00 Q i 5 A293 2nd deceleration 15 00 S time 2 c S A393 3rd deceleration 15 00 time 2 KE Y 2 step acceleration amp A094 deceleration 00 s selection 00 Switched via multi function input 09 2CH 01 Switched by setting No 4 37 5 2nd 2 step 02 Enabled onl
471. vel in DC injection braking power A054 lf DC injection braking delay time A053 is set the Inverter output is shut off during the set time period and the motor goes into free run status After the set time elapses DC injection braking starts Set DC injection braking time A055 via the Digital Operator or the DB terminal while taking into account motor heat generation e Perform each setting according to your system after setting DC injection braking method selection A056 a Edge operation A056 00 b Level operation A056 01 Example 1 a Example 1 b FW FW DB DB Output Output frequency frequency X A A055 y Example 2 a Example 2 b FW l FW DB DB Output Output frequency frequency i A055 4 25 4 2 Function Mode a Edge operation A056 00 b Level operation A056 01 Example 3 a Example 3 b FW w 7 DB DB a SS aS l Output v Free running Output Freerunning frequency frequency D 7 A053 A055 A053 i lt gt Winternal DC Injection Braking A051 01 DC injection braking is applied without terminal operation at start stop of the Inverter To use internal DC injection braking set DC injection braking selection A051 to 01 e Set the startup DC injection braking power in A057 In A058 set the startup DC injection braking time regardless of the edge or level operation Example 4 a Example 4 b e Set DC injection brak
472. verload warning signal 2 R 10N 9 S19 0 OFF 1 When either the control circuit terminal block or the coil is turned on these settings are ON The control circuit terminal block has the priority for the multi function input terminals If the master cannot reset the coil ON status because of communication disconnection turn the control circuit terminal block from ON to OFF to turn off the coil 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation 4 170 suoi un4 Functions 4 4 Communication Function Coil No Item R W Description ODc analog O disconnection 1 ON 0025ER detection R 0 OFF OlDc analog Ol disconnection 1 ON ae detection R 0 OFF O2Dc analog O2 disconnection 1 ON 0030h detection 5 0 OFF 0031h Not used 0032h FBV PID FB status output R TON P 0 OFF 1 ON 0033h NDc network error R 0 OFF 0034h LOG1 logic operation output 1 R IZON IIS Op p 0 OFF 0035h LOG2 logic operation output 2 R ON eR p 0 OFF 0036h LOG3 logic operation output 3 R pen gic op p 0 OFF 0037h LOG4 logic operation output 4 R TON gic op p 0 OFF 0038h LOGS logic operation output 5 R TON gic op p 0 OFF 0039h LOG6 logic operation output 6 R ION gic op p 0 OFF 003Ah WAC capacitor life warning R 1 ON P 9 0 OFF 003Bh WAF cooling fan life warning R ION 9 9 0 OFF 003Ch FR startin
473. verter so as not to apply the test voltage to the Inverter Use a high resistance tester for a power distribution test of the control circuit Do not use a megger or buzzer Conduct an Inverter megger test only to the main circuit not to the control circuit Use a 500 V DC megger for a megger test For a megger test of the Inverter main circuit remove the short circuit bar used for switching the Inverter built in filter function and then short circuit terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 PD 1 P N RB Ro and To with the wires as shown below After the megger test remove the short circuit wires from terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 P PD 1 N RB Ro and To and reconnect the short circuit bar for switching the Inverter built in filter function Note that the RB terminal is provided only for the Inverters with 22 kW or lower capacity Motor EE alain Galen T L3 aground terminal Ground terminal o Do not connect the power wire Do not connect to the To motor 500 V DC megger Be sure to remove the short circuit bar for switching the built in filter function Withstand Voltage Test Do not conduct a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter Doing the test is dangerous and may cause damage or deterioration to the parts inside the Inverter Checking the Inverter and Converter e The quality of the Inverter and converter can be checked using a tester Preparation
474. wall has to be noninflammable such as a metal plate Main Circuit Power Supply Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as AC power supply voltage Error Retry Function Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start HINon Stop Function at Momentary Power Interruption Do not come close to the machine when selecting restart in the non stop function at momentary power interruption selection b050 because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on Operation Stop Command Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal Product Disposal e Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product Precautions for Correct Use Warning Labels Warning labels are located on the Inverter as shown in the following illustration Be sure to follow the instructions
475. wed With the user setting function only 12 parameters for frequent use can be viewed Compliance With Safety Standards The RX Series meets the requirements of the CE and UL cUL and complies with various standards The RoHS Directive The standard model meets the requirements of the RoHS Directive Easily Meets the Requirements Specified by the Ministry of Land Infrastructure and Transport of Japan The RX Series incorporates a zero phase reactor radio noise filter as a standard specification When an optional DC reactor is added the RX Series meets the requirements specified by the Min istry of Land Infrastructure and Transport of Japan 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts When the product is unpacked it appears as below Example of RX A2150 A4150 to A2220 A4220 Front cover Digital Operator Spacer cover a Terminal block cover Open the terminal block cover and you can connect cables to the main circuit terminal block as well as the control circuit terminal block Also open the front cover and you can mount the optional board Position for installing optional board 1 Position for installing optional board 2 Control circuit terminal block Main circuit terminal block Backing plate M IAI9AQ Chapter 2 Design 72 TSE Een eeceeeasdeesas eeee eee 2 1 2 2 Wiring e ee E eee 2 6
476. wing figure shows torque limits 1 to 4 with 01 terminal switching selected in torque limit selection b040 They can be switched with torque limit switchings 1 and 2 allocated to multi function inputs Example When torque limit switching 1 41 and torque limit switching 2 42 are allocated to multi function input terminals 7 and 8 respectively Multi function input terminals 41 42 7 8 PLC O O s 6 OFF OFF gt b04 ON OFF gt b042 OFF ON b043 ON ON b044 e To use the torque limit function in a low speed range also use the overload limit function 4 58 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Reverse Rotation Prevention Function e This function is enabled when 03 sensorless vector control 04 0 Hz sensorless vector control or 05 Sensor vector control is selected in control method A044 A244 e Because of the Inverter s control characteristics the Inverter may output a rotation signal in the direction opposite to that of the RUN command e g in a low speed range If the motor s reverse rotation may cause a problem e g damage to the machine driven by the motor set reverse rotation prevention selection b046 to enabled Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit Wit characteristics 03 Sensorless vector A044 A244 Soleeti n 04 0 Hz sensorless vector 00 05 Sensor vector A244 is blank Reverse rotation 00 Disabled pose
477. with motor rotation is selected in auto tuning selection H001 note the following Make sure there is no problem even if the motor accelerates up to approx 80 of the base frequency The motor is not driven by external equipment eThe brake is released During auto tuning the output torque is insufficient which may cause an elevator system to slip and fall To prevent this remove the motor from the load machine and perform the auto tuning for the motor separately In this case moment of inertia J is determined for the single motor You should add a motor shaft conversion value of the load machine s moment of inertial to parameter J With a machine e g lift ball screw whose motor shaft rotation is limited the machine may be damaged if the allowable rotation limit is exceeded In this case set H001 to 01 auto tuning without motor rotation With a motor whose no load current is unknown measure the current at 50 Hz in the V f setting mode and perform auto tuning after setting the current value in HO23 H223 Even if 01 auto tuning without motor rotation is selected in H001 the motor may slightly rotate eTo perform auto tuning for one rank lower motor size enable the overload limit function and set the overload limit level to 1 5 times the rated current of the motor 4 110 suoljoun Functions 4 2 Function Mode Operating Procedure 1 Set auto tuning selection H001 to 01 or 02 2 Turn on the
478. y when switching forward S A294 acceleration reverse 00 2 deceleration selection ze 5 z E A095 2 step acceleration 0 00 Zz frequency 2 x 2nd 2 step No Hz A295 acceleration 0 00 frequency 0 00 to 99 99 2 100 0 to 400 0 A096 2 step deceleration 0 00 frequency 2nd 2 step No Hz A296 _ deceleration 0 00 frequency A097 Acceleration pattern 00 Line 00 No selection 01 S shape curve 02 U shape curve 4 38 Aogs Peceleration pattern 03 Inverted U shape curve 00 No selection 04 EL S shape curve 2nd 3rd control is displayed when SET 08 SET3 17 is allocated to one of multi function inputs from C001 to C008 App 10 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameter List Parameter Default Cinge N Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page O setting operation E A101 Ol start frequency 0 00 to 99 99 0 00 No Hz E A102 Olend frequency 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No Hz n A103 Ol start ratio 0 to Ol end ratio 20 No 4 14 a A104 Ol end ratio Ol start ratio to 100 100 No oO A105 Ol start selection 00 Use Ol start frequency A101 00 No g 01 0 Hz g A111 O2 start frequency 400 to 100 0 00 No Hz 2 99 9 to 0 00 to 99 99 i A112 O2 end frequency 100 0 to 400 0 0 00 No Hz T g A113 O2 start ratio 100 to O2 end ratio 100 No 4 15 3 Oo A114 O2 en

RX USER`S MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents